You are on page 1of 131

DESIGN DIRECTIVES

2002

MATERIALS

DRILLING AND THREAD DEPTHS


THREAD SELECTION SERIES AND UNDERCUTS

CURVES, DIAGONALS, UNDERCUTS

PERMISSIBLE BOLT LOADS,


TIGHTENING TORQUES, PRETENSIONING UNITS
DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS ON FASTENERS

SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS IN CONJUNCTION WITH


COUNTERSINKINGS/COUNTERBORES AND/OR HOLES;
FOUNDATION ANCHORING ELEMENTS

MECHANICAL FASTENERS
PRODUCT STANDARDS / PARTS KEPT IN STOCK

STANDARDS BOOK

SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS; SETSCREWS, PINS, STUDS, OTHER


SCREWS/BOLTS; WASHERS AND RETAINING ELEMENTS;
LOCKNUTS AND LOCKING PLATES

FITTING KEYS, TAPER KEYS

AXLE STOP PLATES, PINS, BUSHINGS

SEMI-FINISHED PRODUCTS AVAILABLE FROM STOCK,


STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS

10

STANDARD PIPE DIMENSIONS, PIPE COUPLINGS,


FLANGES, WELDING FITTINGS, PIPE FASTENERS,
HOSELINES, AUXILIARY AND OPERATING MATERIALS

The most recent versions of the standards can be found in the Intranet under:

Online Standards

All rights reserved. DIN 34


SMS Demag Aktiengesellschaft
Dsseldorf and Hilchenbach
Normung / Standardisierung (Dept. of Standardisation)
1st edition (January 2002)

January 2002

Materials
SN 359
Selection
This standard lists materials which are used in SMS Demag products; priority shall be given to the materials of SN 483,
which are available from stock.

Contents:
Material designations (designation systems) .................................................. Pages 2 to 8
Footnotes .................................................................................................................... Page 9

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Rolled and forged steels


Engineering steels ...................................................... DIN EN 10025, ........................................................... Pages 10/11
DIN EN 10137-2, SEW 090-2...................................... Pages 16/17
Fine grained engineering steels................................... DIN EN 10113-2 ......................................................... Pages 12/13
Bright steels ............................................................... DIN EN 10083-2, DIN EN 10277-2 .............................. Pages 12/13
Sheets........................................................................ DIN EN 10130 ........................................................... Pages 12/13
Pipe/tube steels.......................................................... DIN 1629, DIN 1630, DIN 2391, DIN 17175, ................ Pages 12/13
DIN 17457, DIN 17458................................................ Pages 12/13
Steels for pressure purposes....................................... DIN EN 10028-2 und 3................................................ Pages 14/15
Quenched and tempered steels................................... DIN EN 10083-1 und 2................................................ Pages 16-19
Flame and induction hardening steels.......................... DIN 17212.................................................................. Pages 18/19
Case hardening steels ................................................ DIN EN 10084 ............................................................ Pages 20/21
Steels for forgings....................................................... DIN EN 10222-2, ........................................................ Pages 20/21
DIN EN 10250-2 bis 4, SEW 550................................. Pages 20-23
High temperature steels.............................................. DIN EN 10269 ............................................................ Pages 20/21
Stainless steels .......................................................... DIN 17440, DIN EN 10088-1 bis 3, DIN EN 10250-4.... Pages 24/25

Cast iron
Grey cast iron ............................................................. DIN EN 1561 .............................................................. Pages 26/27
Spheroidal graphite cast iron....................................... DIN EN 1563 .............................................................. Pages 26/27
Malleable cast iron...................................................... DIN EN 1562 .............................................................. Pages 26/27

Cast steel
Cast steel ................................................................... DIN 1681, DIN 17182,................................................. Pages 26/27
DIN 17205, SEW 835, DIN EN 10213-2....................... Pages 28/29

Non-ferrous metals
Red brass................................................................... DIN EN 1982 .............................................................. Pages 30/31
Tin bronze .................................................................. DIN EN 1982 .............................................................. Pages 30/31
Cast tin-lead bronze.................................................... DIN EN 1982 .............................................................. Pages 30/31
Cast aluminium bronze ............................................... DIN EN 1982 .............................................................. Pages 30/31
White bronze .................................................................................................................................................... Pages 30/31
Special brass.............................................................. DIN EN 12164 ............................................................ Pages 32/33
Special cast brass ...................................................... DIN EN 1982 .............................................................. Pages 32/33
Babbitt metal .............................................................. DIN ISO 4381 ............................................................. Pages 32/33
Sintered bronze ................................................................................................................................................ Pages 32/33
Maintenance-free sliding materials ................................................................................................................... Pages 32/33

Continued on pages 2 to 33

Page 2
SN 359 : 2002-01

- Blank page -

European steel grades

Steel grade classification

Designation system and comparison with DIN

Classification
Designation system
Fig. 1

as in EN 10020

Unalloyed steels
as in table 1

Alloyed steels
as in table 1

Main quality grades

Main quality grades

Base steels

Unalloyed quality steels

Unalloyed high-grade steels

Alloyed quality steels

BS

UQS

UES

LQS

Steels with no particular


quality requirements

Steels with no requirements made on the degree

Quenched and tempered or


surface-hardened steels having

Steels whose applications are similar to those of


unalloyed quality steels and which contain alloying

Steels which exceed the requirements made on the


alloying elements in table 3 and which, due to their

(deep drawing, coldforming ..) on the steel


grade in production.
No heat treatment
Requirements defined
by standards and
delivery specifications
as in table 2.
No alloying elements
besides Si and Mn.

of purity with regard to


non-metallic inclusions.
No uniform response to
heat treatment.
Steel whose quality requirements exceed the
limit contents of table 2 for
base steels.
In comparison with the
base steels more severe
requirements are made
with regard to sensibility to
brittle fracture, grain size,
shapability etc.

a higher degree of purity with


regard to non-metallic inclusions as compared with
unalloyed quality steels.
Uniform response to heat
treatment.
Exact chemical composition
makes it possible to obtain
special properties such as

elements because of their special requirements.


Alloyed quality steels are not intended for quenching
and tempering or for surface treatment
Fine-grain engineering steels for steel construction,
pressure vessel manufacture and line pipe engineering with a minimum yield point < 380 N/mm for
thicknesses < 16 mm; limit content of alloying elements as in table 3; alloyed steels for rails, sheet
piling products and structural sections for mines.
Alloyed steels with Si or with Si and Al.
Hot or cold-rolled flat steel products alloyed with
B, Nb, Ti, V or Zr alone or combinations of these
elements.

chemical compositioni, have a wide variety of


processing and utilisation properties,
for example
Stainless, heat-resisting, high-temperature steels,
antifriction-bearing, tool, mechanical-engineering
steels and steels for steel structures, with particular
physical properties. Stainless steels with C = 1,20%
and Cr = 10,5% and Ni <2,5%: ferritic and
martensitic steels, Ni = 2,5%: austenitic steels.

high strength or hardenability in conjunction with


the shapability
suitability for welding
ductility
etc.

Alloyed high-grade steels


LES

High-speed steels with at least two of the following


three elements: Mo, W, V with an overall mass
content of 7% and with C = 0,60% and
Cr = 3 to 6 %.
Table 2
Requirements

Designation system as in EN 10 027-1


Group 1
Short name based on usage and mechanical
and physical properties (Figs. 2, 3)
as in EN 10 020, appendices A, B
BS
UQS
UES
LQS
LES
G = Unalloyed cast steel
x
x
x
S = Steels for steel construction
x
x
x
x
x
P = Steels for pressure vessel manuf.
x
x
x
x
x
L = Steels for line pipe engineering
x
x
x
E = Mechanical-engineering steels
x
x
B = Concrete reinforcing steel
x
Y = Prestressing steels
x
R = Steels for or in the shape or rails
x
x
H = Cold-rolled flat products of higher
x
-strength drawing qualities
D = Flat products in low-carbon steels

for cold shaping


T

= Packing plate and strapping band

X = mean content of at least


one alloying element
=5%
HS = High-speed steel

Prescribed
Limit content
elements
Percentage by mass
Al
Aluminium
0,1
B
Boron
0,0008
Bi
Bismuth
0,10
Co
Cobalt
0,10
Cr
Chromium
0,30
1)
Cu
Copper
0,40
La
Lanthanides
0,05
3)
Mn
Manganese
1,65
1)
Mo
Molybdenum
0,08
2)
Nb
Niobium
0,06
1)
Ni
Nickel
0,30
P
Lead
0,40
Se
Selenium
0,10
Si
Silicium
0,50
Te
Tellurium
0,10
2)
Ti
Titanium
0,05
2)
V
Vanadium
0,10
W
Tungsten
0,10
2)
Zr
Circonium
0,05
Others (except C, P, S, N)
0,05
1)
If 2, 3 or 4 elements are marked for steel with this footnote and if their contents
are smaller than the limit contents stated in the table, a limit content of 70%
of the total resulting from the 2, 3, or 4 elements must be taken into account.
2)
1)
The rule given under footnote applies by analogy to the elements marked
2)
with footnote .
3)
If only a maximum value is indicated for Mn, the applicable limit content is
1.80 percent by weight.

Type
Minimum tensile strength
Minimum yield point
1)
Minimum elongation at fracture
Minimum diameter
Minimum energy consumption in the
notched bar impact test (at 20C)
Max. allowable C content
Max. allowable P content
Max. allowable S content
1)
see EN 10020 Table 2, page 5

apply for
thicknesses (d)
mm
= 16
= 16
= 16
= 3
= 10 = 16

Limit value
= 690 N/mm
= 360 N/mm
= 26 %
= 1xd
= 27 joule
=
=
=

0,10 %
0,045 %
0,045 %

Table 3
Prescribed
Limit content
elements
Percentage by mass
1)
Cr
Chromium
0,50
1)
Cu
Copper
0,50
La
Lanthanides
0,06
Mn
Manganese
1,80
1)
Mo
Molybdenum
0,10
2)
Nb
Niobium
0,08
1)
Ni
Nickel
0,50
2)
Ti
Titanium
0,12
2)
V
Vanadium
0,12
2)
Zr
Circonium
0,12
Elements which are not stated
(see Table 1)
1)
If 2, 3 or 4 elements are marked for steel with this footnote and if their
contents are smaller than the limit contents stated in the table, a limit
content of 70% of the total resulting from the 2, 3 or 4 elements must be
taken into account.
2)
1)
The rule given under footnote applies by analogy to the elements marked
2)
with footnote .

Seite 3
SN 359 : 2002-01

x
x
x
Group 2
Short name based on chemical composition (Fig. 4)
as in EN 10 020, appendices A, B
BS
UQS
UES
LQS
LES
G = Alloyed cast steel
x
x
x
x
x
x
C = Carbon
x
M = Electr. sheet & magnet. steel strip

Table 1

Page 4
SN 359 : 2002-01

Short name based on usage and mechanical


or physical properties as in
DIN V 17006-100 (Group 1), Fig. 2
Structure of the designation system
1)

Main symbols

Examples

Letter
G = Cast steel (if necessary)
S = Steels for steel
construction
P = Steels for pressure
purposes
L = Steels for line pipe
engineering
E = Mechanical-engineering
4)
steels
B = Concrete reinforcing
steel
Y = Prestressingsteels
R = Rail steels
H = Cold-rolled flat products
in higher-strength steels
for cold shaping
T = Packing plate and
strapping band
M = see Fig. 3 (appendix)

a
s
D

a
X

n
3
5

Mechanical properties
For letter (S, P, L, E)
nnn
= Minimum yield point (Re) in N/mm
For (B)
nnn
= Characteristic yield poiint (Re) in N/mm
For (Y, R)
5)
n n n n1 = Min. tensile strength
for (Rm) in N/mm
For (H)
nnn
= Minimum yield point (Re) in N/mm
T n n n = Min. tensile strength for (Rm) in N/mm
For (D)
Cnn
= Cold-rolled, followed by a two-digit key
number n n
Dnn
= Hot-rolled, intended for immediate cold
forming, followed by a two-digit
key number n n
Xnn
= Type of rolling (hot or cold) not prescribed,
followed by a two-digit key number n n
(For T)
Hnn
nnn

= Prescribed mean hardness value for singlereduced products


= Nominal yield point (Re) in N/mm for doublereduced products

Examples of ordering designations


Plate EN 10029 - 20A x 2000 x 4500 Steel EN 10025 - S355J2G3+N
Strip EN 10143 - 2,5 x 500 Steel EN 10142 - DX52D+ZF

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

a = letter, n = figure, an = alphanumeric


The symbols M, N and Q of Group 1 apply to fine-grained engineering steels
For distinction between two steel grades of the respective quality standard, one or two digits
may be added to the additional symbols of Group 1 or 2, but not to the symbols of chemical
elements.
Without special demands on ductility or suitability for welding
Three-digit values of tensile strength must be preceded by the figure 0.
Note: No symbols provided for ultra-thin sheet.

n
5
2

Additional symbols for steels


n
5

n1

1)

Additional symbols for steel products

an ...
J2G3
D

Group 1

2)

3)

For letter (S)


Notch impact energy in Joule
Test temperature
27 J
40 J
60 J
in C
JR
KR
LR
+20
JO
KO
LO
0
J2
K2
L2
-20
J3
K3
L3
-30
J4
K4
L4
-40
J5
K5
L5
-50
J6
K6
L9
-60
A = Precipitation-hardening
For (S, P, L)
M = Thermomechanically rolled
N = Normalised or normalising-rolled
Q = Quenched and tempered
For (P)
B = Gas bottles
S = Single pressure vessels
T = Tubes
For (B)
a = Ductility class, followed by one or two key figures when
required
For (Y)
C = Cold-drawn wire
H = Hot-formed or treated bars
Q = Quenched and tempered wire
S = Stranded wire
For (R)
Mn = High Mn content
Cr = Chrome-alloyed
Fr (H)
M = Thermomechanically rolled)
B = Bake hardened
P = Phosphorous-alloyed)
X = Binary phase
Y = Interstitial-free steel
For (D)
D = For hot-dip metal coatings
EK = For conventional enamelling
ED = For direct enamelling
H = Hollow sections
T = For tubes
For (S, D)
an = Chemical symbols of prescribed additional elements, if
necessary together with a one-digit number which indicates the
mean value multiplied by ten of the prescribed range of the content (rounded off to 0.1 %) of the element.
For (S, P, L, E, Y, R, H, D, T)
G = Other features, if necessary followed by 1 or 2 figures as specified in the quality standard (technical delivery conditions).

1)

+an + an ...
+N
+ZF

Group 2

3)

For letter (S)


C = With special cold-workability)
D = For hot- dip metal coatings
E = For enamelling
F = For forging
H = Hollow sections
L = For lower temperatures
M = Thermomechanically rolled
N

= Normalised or normalising-rolled

O
P
Q
S
T
W
a

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

For offshore
Sheet piling steel
Quenched and tempered
For shipbuilding
For tubes
Weathering-resistant
Requirement classes, if necessary followed by a
figure as specified in the quality standard
technical delivery conditions).
an = Chemical symbols of prescribed additional elements,
if necessary together with a one-digit number which
indicates the mean value multiplied by ten of the
prescribed range of the content (rounded off to 0.1%)
of the element.
For (P)
H = High temperature
L = Low temperature
R = Room temperature
X = High and low temperatures
a = Requirement classes, if necessary followed by a
figure as specified in the quality standard (technical
delivery conditions).
For (L)
a = Requirement classes, if necessary followed by a
figure as specified in the quality standard (technical
delivery conditions).
For (E)
C = Suitability for cold drawing
For (R)
Q = Quenched and tempered
For (H)
D = For hot-dip metal coatings

For steel products


For letter (S, P, L)
Tables 4, 5, 6
For (E, B, Y)
Table 6
For (H)
Table 5
3)

For (D, T)
Tables 5, 6

3)

Short name based on chemical composition


as in DIN V 17006-100 (Group 2), Fig. 4
Structure of the designation system
1)

Main symbols
a

Additional symbols for steels

a...

n-n

Mn

1)

Additionial symbols for steel products

an ...

1)

+an + an ...

Examples
2

Letter
G

= Cast steel (if


necessary)
C = Carbon
X = Mean content of at
least one alloying
element = 5 %
HS = High speed steel

Carbon content

2)

For letter (G, C, X)


n n n = 100 times the mean
C content of the
prescribed range.
When no carbon-content
range is specified, a
suitable representative
value is assumed.

1) a = letter, n = figure, an = alphanumeric


2) For distinction between two steel grades of similar
chemical compositions, the key number of the carbon
content can be increased by one.
3) The symboles of Group 1, except E and R, can be followed
by one or two figures for distinction between two steel grades
of the respective quality standard.
4) The symbols E and R of Group 1 can be followed by a figure
which represents the maximum allowable or mean sulphur
content, rounded off to 0.01% and then multiplied by 100.

Alloying elements

Group 1

= Symbols of the alloy elements


which are characteristic of the
steel, followed by hyphenated
n-n = numbers which represent the
mean contents of the elements,
multiplied by the factors given
below.

3) 4)

For letter (C)


E = Prescribed max. S content
R = Prescribed range of the
S content
D = For wire drawing
C = Special cold-workability
(cold heading, cold
extrusion)

Cr, Co, Mn, Ni, Si, W


Al, Be, Cu, Mo, Nb,
Pb, Ta, Ti, V, Zr
Ce, N, P, S
B

x
x
x

10
100
1000

For letter (X)


n-n = Numbers separated by hyphens
which indicate the mean
contents of the elements
rounded to the next integer.
For (HS)
n-n = Numbers separated by hyphens
which indicate the percentages
of the alloying elements in the
following order:
- Tungsten (W)
- Molybdenum (Mo)
- Vanadium (V)
- Cobalt (Co)

For steel products


For letter (C, HS)
Table 6
For (G, X)
Tables 4, 6

S = For springs
U = For tools
W = For welding wire)
G = Other features, if necessary
followed by 1 or 2 figures
as specified in the quality
standard (technical delivery
conditions)

Table 5: Type of coating


Symbol
Meaning
+A *
Hot aluminium plated
+AR
Aluminium-clad by rolling
+AS
Coated with Al-Si alloy
+AZ
Coated with Al-Zn alloy (> 50 % Al)
+CE
Special chromium electrodeposition plated (ECCS)
+CU
Copper coating
+IC
Anorganic coating
+OC
Organic coating
+S *
Hot tin plated
+SE
Electrolytic tin plated
+T *
Hot dipped with lead-tin alloy (terne)
+TE
Electroplated with lead-tin alloy
+Z *
Hot-dip galvanized
+ZA
Coated with Zn-Al alloy (> 50 % Zn)
+ZE
Electrogalvanized
+ZF
Diffusion-annealed zinc coats (with diffused Fe)
+ZN
Zinc-nickel coat (electrolytic)
* Note: The symbols are separated from the preceding symbols by a plus sign
(+). To avoid confuction with other symbols, the letter S can be placed before the
symbol, e.g. +SA.

Table 6: Treatment condition


+A
Soft annealed
+AC
Annealed for obtaining spheroidal carbides
+AR
As rolled (no particular rolling and heat-treatment conditions)
+AT
Solution-annealed
+BC
Hot worked and blasted (DIN EN 10083-1, edition of Oct. 96)
+C
Cold worked (e.g. by rolling or drawing)
+Cnnn
Cold-worked to a min. tensile strength of n n n N/mm
+CR
Cold-rolled
+DC
Delivery condition at maker's discretion
+FP
Treated for ferrite-pearlite structure and hardness range
+HC
Hot-cold worked
+HW
Hot-shaped
+I
Isothermally treated
+LC
Slightly cold redrawn or slightly skin pass rolled
+M
Thermomechanically rolled
+N
Normalised or normalising-rolled
+NT
Normalised and tempered
+P
Precipitation-hardened
+P
Hot worked and pickled (DIN EN 10083-1, edition of Oct. 96)
+RA
Recrystallisation-annealed
+Q
Quenched
+QA
Air-hardened
+QL
Hardened and tempered (DIN EN 10028-2, edition of April 93)
+QO
Oil-hardened
+QT
Quenched and tempered
+QW
Water-quenched
+S
Treated for cold-shearing property
+SR
Stress-free annealed
+T
Tempered
+TH
Treated for hardness range
+U
Unprocessed
+WW
Hot-work hardened
Anmerkung: The symbols are separated from the preceding symbols by a
plus sign (+). To avoid confusion with other symbols, the letter T can be
placed before the symbol, e.g. +TA.

Page 5
SN 359 : 2002-01

Table 4: Special requirements


Symbol
Meaning
+CC *
Nonworked conticast material
+H
With special hardenability
+HL *
With restricted hardenability scatterbands
+HH *
With restricted higher hardenability scatterbands
+Z15
Min. area reduction at break perpendicular to surface 15 %
+Z25
Min. area reduction at break perpendicular to surface 25 %
+Z35
Min. area reduction at break perpendicular to surface 35 %
Note: The symbols are separated from the preceding symbols by a plus sign (+).
Basically, these symbols mark special requirements which are made on the steel.
For practical reasons, however, they are treated like additional symbols for steel
products.
* acc. to DIN EN 10083-1 (edition of Oct. 96)

Group 2
For letter (C)
an = Chemical symbols of prescribed additional elements, if necessary together with a one-digit
number which indicates
the mean value multiplied by ten of the prescribed range of content
(rounded off to 0.1%)
of the element.

Page 6
SN 359 : 2002-01
Material designations
Steel
1. Designation based on mechanical properties
1.1 e.g. as in DIN EN 10025 Hot rolled unalloyed steel products
S

235

JR

G2

Deoxidizing process only acc. to


DIN EN 10025

+C
Code letter of the suitability for particular applications
(e.g. suitability for cold working when required)
Code for deoxidizing process
G2 = unkilled not permitted (FN).
Code for quality group
(suitability for welding and notch impact energy).
Fixed min. value of yield point
for thicknesses 16 mm in N/mm2.
Code letter for steel group
(e.g. S = steels for general structural purposes)

FN = unkilled steel
FN = unkilled steel not
permitted
FF = fully killed steel

1.2 e.g. as in DIN EN 10028 Steels for pressure purposes


P

355

H
High temperature
Normalized
Fixed min. yield point value for thicknesses 16 mm in N/mm2.
Code letter for steel group (e.g. P = steels for pressure purposes).

2. Designation based on chemical composition


2.1 for unalloyed steels e.g. as in DIN EN 10083 Quenched and tempered steels
C

45

Heat treatment conditions acc. to


DIN EN 10083

+QT
Heat treatment: quenched and tempered
Prescribed max. S content
Medium C content 0,45%
Steel with fixed C content

2.2 for low-alloy steels, e.g. as in DIN EN 10084 Case hardening steels
16

Mn

Cr

Cr content - no particular specification


Mn content 5 : 4 = 1,25%
Medium C content 0,16 %

+A
= dead-soft annealed
+N = normalized
+QT = quenched and tempered

G1
G2
G3, G4

Page 7
SN 359 : 2002-01
2.3 for high-alloy steels, e.g. as in DIN EN 10088 Stainless steels
X

Cr

Ni

Ti

18

10
Ti content: no particular specification
Ni content = 10,0 %
Cr content = 18,0 %
Medium C content 0,06 %
Alloy constituents other than the C content are stated in plain text

3. Multipliers for low-alloy steels


Alloying additions
Cr, Co, Mn, Ni, Si, W
Al, Be, Cu, Mo, Nb, Pb, Ta, Ti, V, Zr
Ce, N, P, S
B

Multipliers for low-alloy steels


4
10
100
1000

Cast iron
Designation according to yield point
e.g. as in DIN EN 1563 Spheroidal graphite cast iron
EN

- GJS -

400

15

U
Proving on integrally cast test boss
Min. value of elongation A in per cent
Tensile strength min. 400 N/mm at wall thicknesses 30 mm
Spheroidal graphite cast iron
European standard

Cast steel
1. Designation based on mechanical properties
1.1 e.g. DIN 1681 Cast steels for general engineering purposes (remaining from the old designation system)
GS

52
Tensile strength min. 520 N/mm
Cast steel

1.2 for unalloyed cast steel, e.g. DIN EN 10213 Ferritic steel castings for service at elevated temperatures
GP

240

GH

+N
Designation for
G = castings
P = pressure vessels

Normalized
High temperature (heat resistant)
Code no. of min. yield point Rp 0,2 in Mpa (Mpa
Cast steel for pressure purposes

N/mm)

Page 8
SN 359 : 2002-01
2.
Designation based on chemical composition
2.1 for low-alloy cast steel, e.g. DIN 17205 Quenched and tempered steel casting (remaining from the old designation
system)
GS

42

Cr

Mo

VI
Hardened and tempered to strength class I
Mo content: no particular specification
Cr content 4 : 4 = 1,0 %
C content 0,42 %
Cast steel

2.2 for high-alloy cast steel, e.g. DIN EN 10213 Steel castings for service at elevated temperatures
G

23

Cr

Mo

12

+QT
Heat treatment: quenched and tempered
V content: no particular specification
Mo content 1 %
Cr content 12 %
C content 0,23 %
High-alloy, alloy information in plain text
Cast steel

Non-ferrous metals
Designation based on chemical composition (in the case of wrought alloys the strength class is added).
e.g. DIN EN 1982 Copper-tin-zinc casting alloy (former designation red brass)
CU

Sn7

Zn4

Pb7 -

GZ
Casting process: centrifugal casting
Casting
Zn content 4%, Pb content 7%
Sn content = 7%
Principal alloying element, no quantity specification

Page 9
SN 359 : 2002-01
Footnotes
1)

Semi-finished products available from stock see SN 483 (Standards Book, Chapter 9).

2)

The notch impact energy values are determined at 20C (for S355J2G3 at 20C) and are valid for samples with
longitudinal fibre orientation.

3)

Measured on polished round bars of 10 mm dia.

4)

The hardening depth (Eht) depends upon the duration of use. Therefore, only the absolutely necessary Eht has to be
indicated for reasons of economy.

5)

Categories of suitability for welding:


Category 1: Well-suited for welding.
Category 2: In general well-suited for welding, heat pre- and/or post-treatment may be required.
Category 3: Moderately suited for welding, preheating and tempering required after welding.
Category 4: Limited suitability for welding. Moderately suited for welding, preheating and tempering required after
welding; special electrode must be used.
Category 5: Difficult to weld or no suitability for welding.

6)

The specified temperatures are guidance values; for the exact determination of the preheat temperature the influences
exerted by electrode thickness, plate thickness and type of weld must be taken into account. If necessary, the
department of welded fabrications must be consulted.

7)

In the case of steel the relative cost refers to S355J2G3 (St 52-3), in the case of cast iron EN-GJL (GG) and EN-GJS
(GGG) to EN-GJL-2900 (GG-20), and in the case of cast steel to GS-38 (GS-38). Comparisons are possible only within
the individual groups of steel, cast iron or cast steel. The data on relative cost must not be used for cost estimating. In
the case of cast iron and cast steel the relative cost does not include the cost of the wage, mould and core components,
which lead to a higher relative cost depending upon the degree of difficulty in the making of the castings.

8)

There are difficulties in the supply of hot-rolled pipe St 37.4, for this reason St 35.8 (boiler pipe) has to be used, which
includes St 37.4 in terms of quality.

9)

NBK = normalised (former designation system) + (bright annealed, after the last cold working the pipes have been
annealed in a shielding gas atmosphere at a temperature above the upper transformation point).

10) The materials of DIN 17212 are steels specially developed for flame and induction hardening, which are not always
available from stock; in this case the corresponding C-steels of DIN EN 10083 can be used as substitutes. These steels
are not always fine-grained, there may be an increased risk of failure.
11) For workpieces with thicknesses above 30 mm the hardness values are lower.
12) The steel is available in two strength categories and the drawing must bear an indication like e.g. "Quenched and
tempered to 700-850 N/mm".
13) When used for castings for hydraulic components, the drawing must state: Casting for hydraulic components, test
pressure e.g. 300 bar.
14) Entries concerning heat treatment after casting are not required in addition to the material designation itself.
15) Entry required for weld-in parts: Product analysis C 0,25 %.
15) Wrought alloy
16) Bushings in sintered bronze B 50 are standardised up to d1 = 80 mm and commercially available up to d1 = 100 mm.
To be used only up to an operating temperature of 80 C. In the case of bigger diameters and temperatures above
80 C, "DEVA metal" or "devagleit" must be used instead.
18) Upon agreement
19) Observe DIN EN 10164 when loading is in thickness direction (lamellar tearing).
20) The desired heat-treatment condition in the as-delivered state is indicated by additional symbols preceded by a plus sign
(e.g. 13CrMo4-5+NT) after the material designation.
21) The material designation already indicates the heat-treatment condition upon delivery.

Page 10
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Tensile strength

Elongation at fracture

Reduction of area at rupture

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Brinell hardness G
(Guide values)

Nominal thickness
(Heat
treatment
condition) 21)

Designation
Current

S235JRG2

S275JR

S355J2G3

No.

1.0038

1.0044

1.0570

Former

RSt 37-2

St 44-2

St 52-3

normalised *

Engineering
steels
DIN EN 10025
19)

E295

E335

E360

1.0050

1.0060

1.0070

St 50-2

St 60-2

St 70-2

*) normalised or state achieved by normalising shaping

For footnotes see page 9

mm

>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>

16
16 40
40 63
63 80
80 100
100 150
150 200
200 250
16
16 40
40 63
63 80
80 100
100 150
150 200
200 250
16
16 40
40 63
63 80
80 100
100 150
150 200
200 250
16
16 40
40 63
63 80
80 100
100 150
150 200
200 250
16
16 40
40 63
63 80
80 100
100 150
150 200
200 250
16
16 40
40 63
63 80
80 100
100 150
150 200
200 250

3)

ReH /
Rp 0,2
N/mm2
min.
235
225
215
215
215
195
185
175
275
265
255
245
235
225
215
205
355
345
335
325
315
295
285
275
295
285
275
265
255
245
235
225
335
325
315
305
295
275
265
255
360
355
345
335
325
305
295
285

Rm

A5

KV

Rbw

HB

Material

Type
and
standard

2)

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

1)

N/mm2

340 to 470

320 to 470

410 to 560
400 to 540
380 to 540

490 to 630
470 to 630
450 to 630

470 to 610
450 to 610
440 to 610

570 to 710
550 to 710
540 to 710

670 to 830
650 to 830
640 to 830

% %
J N/mm2
min. min. min. min. max.
26
180
26
25
27
24
24
22
21
23
21
22
200
22
21
27
20
20
18
17
23
17
22
270
22
21
27 2)
20
20
18
17
23 2)
17
20
240
20
19
18
18
16
15
15
16
16
15
14
14
12
11
11
11
11
10
9
9
8
7
7
-

HRC HV1 Rht HV3 HV3

Nht

(mm)

(mm)

min. min.

min. min.

Si

Mn

P&S

%
%
%
%
max. max. max. max. each

Cr

Mo

Ni

TV

%
max.

(C)

7)

Application
example
Material

6)

Relative cost
factor

Machining

5)

Welding preheat temperature

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)
Nitriding depth

In nitriding depth

On the surface

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Flame and
Nitration-hardened
induction hardened

Welding suitability

Page 11
SN 359 : 2002-01

0,17
-

0,20

1,40

0,045

0,009

1,50

0,045

0,009

0,55 1,60

0,035

0,9 1,2 0,9

0,21
-

limited feasibility
480 420
+ 50

0,22

Wall thickn.
from

General purpose
30 mm: 1,0 1,2 0,9 steels
ca. 150C

0,20

0,6

Wall thickn.
from

0,045

0,009

150 to
200

General purpose
1,0 1,3 1,0 steels.
Bolts 5.6 up to
dia. 40 mm

0,045

0,009

200 to
400

1,1 1,4 1,0

0,22

30 mm: 1,0 1,3 1,0


ca. 150C

General purpose
steels

0,045

0,009

200 to
400

1,2 1,6 1,0

Page 12
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Current

No.

S355N
Weldable finegrained
engineering
steels
DIN EN
10113-2

> 16
> 40
> 63
> 80
>100
>150

1.0545 StE 355

S420N

1.8902 StE 420

normalised

19)

1.8901 StE 460

S460N

Unalloyed
bright steels

E295GC

1.0533 St 50-2 KG

C45+C

1.0503 C 45 K

DIN EN
10083-2
DIN EN
10277-2

Sheets
DC01+LC
DIN EN 10130

1.0330 St 12 03

St 37.0
Tubes
DIN 1629
DIN 1630
DIN 2391
DIN 17175

8) 9)

8)

St 52.4

Stainless steel X6CrNiTi18-10


tubes
DIN 17457
DIN 17458

16
40
63
80
100
150

18)

1.0255 St 37.4 NBK


1.0305 St 35.8
1.0581 St 52.4
1.4541 X10 CrNiTi
18 9

solution heat
treated and
quenched
X10 CrNiMoTi
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 1.4571 18 10

For footnotes see page 9

Fatigue strength under reversed


bending stresses

Brinell hardness G
(Guide values)

Tensile strength

KV

Rbw

HB

% %
J N/mm2
min. min. min. min.

22

max.

55

55

55

140-168
140-168

43

39

18)

420
400
390
370
360
340

18)

18)

16
40
63
80
100
150

460
440
430
410
400

550 to 720

17

18)

18)

18)

10
16
40
63
100
10
16
40
63
100

510
420
320
300
255
565
500
410
360
310

650 to 950
600 to 900
550 to 850
520 to 770
470 to 740
750 to 1050
710 to 1030
650 to 1000
630 to 900
580 to 850

6
7
8
9
9
5
6
7
8
8

140

270 to 410

28

16
40
65

235
225
215

16
> 16 40
> 40 65

355
345
335

500 to 650

21

43

145 to
185

50

200

500 to 730

35

85

130 to
180

50

210

500 to 730

35

85

130 to
180

> 16
> 40
> 63
> 80
>100
>150

> 16
> 40
> 63
> 80
>100
>150
5
cold drawn > 10
and
> 16
soft annealed > 40
> 63
5
> 10
cold drawn > 16
> 40
> 63
Slightly cold
redrawn
normalized
(bright
annealed)

18)

A5

16
40
63
80
100
150

18)

1.0254 St 37.0

St 37.4 NBK
St 35.8

mm

Former

ReH /
Rm
Rp 0,2
N/mm2
N/mm2
min.
355
345
470 to 630
335
325
315
295
450 to 600

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

(Heat
treatment
condition) 21)

Designation

3)

Reduction of area at rupture

Type
and
standard

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

Nominal thickness

Material

2)

Elongation at fracture

1)

> 16
> 40

520 to 680
500 to 650

19

350 to 480
25
360 to 480

100 to
140

Page 13
SN 359 : 2002-01

Nht

Si

Mn

(mm)

(mm)

%
max.

min. min.

P&S

Cr

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

(C)

max. each

7)

Application
example
Material

Machining

Welding preheat temperature

Nitriding depth

In nitriding depth

On the surface

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

6)

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

HRC HV1 Rht HV3 HV3


min. min.

5)

Welding suitability

Relative cost
factor

Flame and
Nitration-hardened
induction hardened

N max. 0,015
Al min. 0,02 )

0,90 P: 0,035 max. max. max. total


max.
Cu max.
0,50 to
S: 0,030 0,30 0,10 0,50
0,20
1,65
Nb max.
V max.
Ti max.
N max.
Al min.
total
1,00
max. 0,60 to P: 0,035 max. max. max.
Cu
max.
0,20
1,70 S: 0,030 0,30 0,10 0,80 Nb max.
V max.
Ti max.
N max.
Al min.
total
1,00
max. 0,60 to P: 0,035 max. max. max. Cu
max.
0,20
1,70 S: 0,030 0,30 0,10 0,80 Nb max.
V max.
Ti max.
-

0,42
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,50
0,80
max. - max.
0,12
0,60
max.
0,17
max. 0,35 min.
0,17
0,35
0,10 0,40
max.
to
0,17 to
0,35 0,80

0,045

0,35 1
0,05
0,12
0,03
0,025
0,02 )

150

0,70 ) 2
0,05
0,20
0,03
0,025
0,02 )

150

1,2 1,7 1,2

0,70 ) 2
0,05
0,20
0,03

150

1,3 1,8 1,2

N = 0,009

1,1 1,6 1,2


Welding regulations
of SEW 088 must be
observed.
Subsequent
attachment welds are
not permitted; bolted
connections must be
used instead.

3 150 to 1,0 1,3 1,3


200
Bright unalloyed
steels, key steels

0,045

max. max. max.


0,40 0,10 0,40

Cr+Mo+Ni
max. 0,63

4 200 to 1,1 1,4 2,3


400

0,045

0,040

N 0,009

0,040

0,040

Ti 5x%C
to 0,80

8,1

Ti 5x%C
to 0,80

12,0

max. 0,55 max. P: 0,040


0,22
1,60 S: 0,035

max.
0,08

1,0

max.
0,08

1,0

max. P: 0,045 17,0


to
2,0 S: 0,030
19,0
max. P: 0,045 16,5
2,0 S: 0,030 to
18,5

9,0
to
12,0
2,0 10,5
to
to
2,5 13,5
-

1,0 Sheets
1,0

0,9 1,2

2,3
3,0

The minimum value of the Al total content does not apply if there are sufficient contents of nitrogen-fixing elements.
When the copper content exceeds 0,35%, the nickel content must amount up to at least half the copper content.

1,0 1,3 1,3

Pipelines

Page 14
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Tensile strength

Elongation at fracture

Reduction of area at rupture

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Brinell hardness G
(guide values)

Rm

A5

KV

Rbw

HB

16
40
60
100
150
16
40
60
100
150

265
255
245
215
200

Nominal thickness
Designation
Current

16Mo3

P265GH

No.

Former

1.5415 15 Mo 3

1.0425 H II

Additional symbols 20)


(heat treatment
condition) 21)

normalised

normalised

mm
> 16
> 40
> 60
> 100
> 150
> 16
> 40
> 60
> 100
> 150

+NT
13CrMo4-5

1.7335 13 CrMo 4 4

+QL

Steels for
pressure
purposes
DIN EN
10028-2 and 3

+NT, +QA
oder +QL

P275NH

1.0487 WStE 285

normalised

19)

1.0565 WStE 385

normalised

1.8935 WStE 460

normalised

For footnotes see page 9

18)

410 to 530
400 to 530

23
22
19

22

20

31

440 to 590

255

430 to 580

18)

18)

18)

390 to 510

24

> 16
> 35
> 50
> 70
> 100

275
275
265
255
235
225
18)

355
355
345
325
315
295
18)

16
35
50
70
100
150

27

18)

275

16
35
50
70
100
150

18)

150

460
450
440
420
400
380
18)

19

370 to 490
350 to 470

23

18)

18)

490 to 630

22

470 to 610
450 to 590

21

18)

18)

570 to 720

17

540 to 710
520 to 690

16

18)

18)

***

***

***

18)

18)

100

> 16
> 35
> 50
> 70
> 100

27

18)

100

16
35
50
70
100
150

23

60

> 150

31

18)

450 to 600

> 150
*** Mechanical properties of transverse samples

430 to 580
420 to 570

24

300
295

> 150

P460NH

440 to 590

% %
J N/mm2
min. min. min. min. max.

16
60

> 150

P355NH

18)

N/mm2

> 16

> 16
> 35
> 50
> 70
> 100

3)

ReH /
Rp 0,2
N/mm2
min.
275
270
260
240
220

Material

Type
and
standard

2)

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

1)

27
18)

55

18)

55

18)

55

18)

Page 15
SN 359 : 2002-01

HRC HV1 Rht HV3 HV3

Nht

Si

Mn

(mm)

(mm)

%
max.

min. min.

min. min.

P&S

Cr

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

(C)

0,25
to
0,35

max.
0,30

Al tot..
min. 0,020
Cu max. 0,30
max. Nb max. 0,010
0,30 Ti max. 0,03
V max. 0,02
Cr+Cu+Mo+Ni
max. 0,70

max. each

0,12
0,40
to 0,35 to P: 0,030 max.
S: 0,025 0,30
0,20
0,90

0,50 P: 0,030 max.


max.
0,40 to
0,20
S: 0,025 0,30
1,40

max.
0,08

0,08
0,40 P: 0,030 0,70
to 0,35 to S: 0,025 to
0,18
1,00
1,15

0,40
to
0,60

0,50 P: 0,030 **
max.
max.
0,18 0,40 to S: 0,025
1,40
0,30

**
max.
0,08

max.
0,50

0,90
**
max. 0,50
P: 0,030
to
max.
0,20
1,70 S: 0,025 0,30

**
max.
0,08

max.
0,50

max. 0,60
0,20

1,00
P: 0,030 max.
to
S: 0,025 0,30
1,70

max.
0,10

max.
0,80

Al tot.. *
Cu max. 0,30

Al tot.. *
Cu max. 0,30
Al tot..
min. 0,020
Cu max. 0,30
N max. 0,020
Nb max. 0,05
Ti max. 0,03
V max. 0,05
Nb + Ti + V
max. 0,05
Al tot..
min. 0,020
Cu max. 0,30
N max. 0,020
Nb max. 0,05
Ti max. 0,03
V max. 0,10
Nb + Ti + V
max. 0,12
Al tot..
min. 0,020
Cu max. 0,70
N max. 0,025
Nb max. 0,05
Ti max. 0,03
V max. 0,20
Nb + Ti + V
max. 0,22

7)

Application
example
Material

Machining

6)

Welding preheat
temperature

Nitriding depth

In nitriding depth

On the surface

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

5)

Welding suitability

Relative cost
factor

Flame and
Nitration-hardened
induction hardened

Pressure vessels,
metal sheets,
steel strips
2

* The Al content of the heat must be determined and stated in the certificate.
** The total content of the three elements chromium, copper and molybdenum taken together must not exceed 0,45 %.

Page 16
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Tensile strength

Elongation at fracture

Reduction of area at rupture

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Brinell hardness G
(Guide values)

Nominal thickness
Designation
Current

No.

Former

(Heat
treatment
condition) 21)

mm

Rm

A5

KV

Rbw

HB

S620QL

Engineering steels
with higher yield
point in quenched
and tempered or
in precipitationhardened condition

1.8927

TStE 620 V

620

Quenched and
tempered for > 50 100
lower
temperatures

580

> 100 150

560

650 to
830

3 50

690

Quenched and
tempered for > 50 100
lower
temperatures

770 to
940

650

760 to
930

> 100 150

630

710 to
900

3 50

890

940 to
1100

S690QL

1.8928

TStE 690 V

DIN EN
10137-2
SEW 090-2

Unalloyed
quenched and
tempered steels

S890QL

1.8983

TStE 890 V

N/mm 2

3 50

Quenched and
tempered for
lower
temperatures

> 50 100

Quenched and
tempered for
lower
temperatures

700 to
890

830

880 to
1100

960

980 to
1150

% %
J
min. min. min.

N/mm 2
min. max.

15

30 at
- 40C

14

30 at
- 40C

11

30 at
- 40C

10

30 at
- 40C

S960QL

1.8933

TStE 960 V

C22+N

1.0402

C 22 N

16
> 16 100

240
210

min. 430 24
min. 410 25

200
-

156

C35+N

1.0501

C 35 N

16
> 16 100
> 100 250

300
270
245

min. 550 18
min. 520 19
min. 500 19

240
-

183

normalised *

3 50

3)

R eH /
R p 0,2
N/mm 2
min.

Material

Type
and
standard

2)

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

1)

DIN EN
10083-1 and 2

C45+N

1.0503

C 45 N

16
> 16 100
> 100 250

340
305
275

min. 620 14
min. 580 16
min. 560 16

280
-

207

Continued on
pages 18 and 19

C60+N

1.0601

C 60 N

16
> 16 100
> 100 250

380
340
310

min. 710 10
min. 670 11
min. 650 11

330
-

241

*) normalised or state achieved by normalising shaping

For footnotes see page 9

Page 17
SN 359 : 2002-01

HRC HV1 Rht HV3 HV3

Nht

(mm)

(mm)

min. min.

min. min.

Si

Mn

P u. S

Cr

%
%
%
%
%
max. max. max. max. each max.

0,20 0,80 1,70 P: 0,020 1,50


S: 0,010

0,20 0,80 1,70

P: 0,020
1,50
S: 0,010

0,20 0,80 1,70 P: 0,020 1,50


S: 0,010

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

%
max.

%
max.

%
max.

(C)

Material

0,70

120
to
150

0,70

B 0,0050
Cu 0,50
N 0,015
Nb 0,06 4
Ti 0,05
V 0,12
Zr 0,15

120
to
150

2,0

B 0,0050
Cu 0,50
N 0,015
Nb 0,06 4
Ti 0,05
V 0,12
Zr 0,15

120
to
150

B 0,0050
Cu 0,50
N 0,015
Nb 0,06 4
Ti 0,05
V 0,12
Zr 0,15

120
to
150

0,70

2,0

0,20 0,80 1,70 P: 0,020 1,50


S: 0,010

0,70

2,0

0,17
0,40
to 0,40 to
0,24
0,70

0,045

0,40

0,10

0,40

0,32
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,39
0,80

0,045

0,40

0,10

0,40 Cr+ Mo+ 4


Ni

0,42
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,50
0,80

0,045

0,40

0,10

0,40

0,57
0,60
to 0,40 to
0,65
0,90

0,045

2 to
4

Application
example

B 0,0050
Cu 0,50
N 0,015
2,0 Nb 0,06 4
Ti 0,05
V 0,12
Zr 0,15

50+6 450

7)

Machining

6)

Welding preheat
temperature

Nitriding depth

In nitriding depth

On the surface

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

5)

Welding suitability

Relative cost
factor

Flame and
Nitration-hardened
induction hardened

Vessel, trunnion ring,


brackets, lamella
plates

from
2 30 mm 1,0 1,3 1,1 Quality steel for
medium loading
150 C

max.
0,63

200
to
400

Quality steel for


1,1 1,4 1,2 medium loading,
bolts 5.6 from dia. 40
to 160 mm

200
to
400

1,2 1,5 1,2

1,6 2,1 1,3

Quality steel for


higher loading

limited feasibility
2 to
55+6 500
4

0,40

0,10

0,40

At least one of the grain-minimizing elements, one of which is aluminium, should be present at a min. percentage of 0,015%.
In the case of aluminium the minimum of 0,015% is valid for the soluble aluminium; this value is also considered attained when the total aluminium content
is at least 0,018%; in cases of arbitration the content of soluble aluminium must be determined.

Page 18
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Elongation at fracture

Reduction of area at rupture

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Fatigue strength under reversed


bending stresses

Current

No.

Former

C35+QT
C35E+QT

1.0501
1.1181

C 35 V
Ck 35 V

Unalloyed
C45+QT
quenched and
C45E+QT
tempered steels

1.0503
1.1191

C 45 V
Ck 45 V

C55+QT
C55E+QT

1.0535
1.1203

C 55 V
Ck 55 V

C 75 *

1.0605

C 75

DIN EN
10083-1 and 2

Flamehardening steels

(flame and
inductionhardening
steels)
DIN 17212)

Brinell hardness G
(Guide values)

A5

KV

Rbw

HB

N/mm2

N/mm2

630 to
600 to
550 to
700 to
650 to
630 to
800 to
750 to
700 to

780
750
700
850
800
780
950
900
850

min.
17
19
20
14
16
17
12
14
15

min. min.
40 35
45 35
50 35
35 25
40 25
45 25
30
35
40
-

min.
320
370
390
-

420
360
320
480
410
370
510
430
400
700
600
450
400

620 to 760
580 to 730
540 to 690
700 to 840
660 to 800
620 to 760
740 to 880
690 to 830
640 to 780
900 to 1100
800 to 950
700 to 850
650 to 800

17
19
20
14
16
17
12
14
15
12
14
15
16

40
45
50
35
40
45
25
35
40
50
55
60
60

42
42
42
28
28
28
45
50
50
45

320
370
390
440
-

> 16
> 40
> 100

quenched
and
tempered

>
>
>
>

16
40
100
160

16
40
100
160
250

900 1000 to 1300


750 1000 to 1200
650 900 to 1100
550 800 to 950
500 750 to 900

10
11
12
13
14

40
45
50
50
55

30
35
35
35
35

530
-

quenched
and
tempered

>
>
>
>

16
40
100
160

16
40
100
160
250

900
780
700
650
550

1100 to 1300
1000 to 1200
900 to 1100
850 to 1000
800 to 950

9
10
12
13
13

40
45
50
50
50

30 *
30 *
30 *
30 *
30 *

570
-

>
>
>
>

16
40
100
160

>
>
>
>

16
40
100
160

16
40
100
160
250
16
40
100
160
250

1000
900
800
700
600
1050
1050
900
800
700

1200 to 1400
1100 to 1300
1000 to 1200
900 to 1100
800 to 950
1250 to 1450
1250 to 1450
1100 to 1300
1000 to 1200
900 to 1100

9
10
11
12
13
9
9
10
11
12

40
45
50
55
55
40
40
45
50
50

35
45
45
45
45
30
30
35
45
45

570
-

1.1193.05

Cf 45 V

Cf 53 V 10)

1.1213.05

Cf 55 V

25CrMo4+QT

1.7218

25 CrMo 4 V

quenched
and
tempered

42CrMo4+QT
(41 CrMo 4 V) 10)

1.7225
42 CrMo 4 V
(1.7223)

1.7228
50 CrMo 4 V
(1.7238)

quenched
and
tempered

> 16
> 40
> 16
> 40
> 16
> 40

34CrNiMo6+QT

1.6582

34 CrNiMo 6 V

quenched
and
tempered

30CrNiMo8+QT

1.6580

30 CrNiMo 8 V

quenched
and
tempered

For footnotes see page 9

> 16
> 40

min.
430
380
320
490
430
370
550
490
420

16
40
100
16
40
100
16
40
100
16
40
100
160

Cf 45 V 10)

* not according to standard

> 16
> 40

Cf 35 V

50CrMo4+QT
(49 CrMo 4 V) 10)

16
40
100
16
40
100
16
40
100

> 16
> 40

1.1183.05

DIN EN
10083-1
+

quenched
and
tempered

Cf 35 V 10)

DIN 17212

Alloyed
quenched and
tempered steels

mm

ReH /
Rp 0,2
N/mm2

max.

Conversion table for Brinell hardness (quenched and tempered) see DIN 50150, conversion not exact.

21)

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

Designation

Nominal thickness
(Heat
treatment
condition)

3)

Rm

Material

ype
and
standard

2)

Tensile strength

1)

Page 19
SN 359 : 2002-01

HRC HV1 Rht


min. min.
51+6 425

(mm)
2 to
4

2 to
55+6 500
4
57+6 525
-

51+6 425

2 to
4
2 to
4

2 to
55+6 500
4
57+6 525

54+6 475

Welding preheat temperature

Nitriding depth

In nitriding depth

On the surface

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

HV3 HV3 Nht


min. min.

(mm)

300
200
+50

0,5

360
+50

0,5

300

400
330
+50
-

300
200
+50
360
+50

0,5
0,5

300

0,5

2 to
4

400
330
+50

0,5

600
310
+100

0,6

2
to
6

500
310
+100

0,6

Si

Mn

%
max.

0,32
to
0,39
0,42
to
0,50
0,57
to
0,65
0,70
to
0,80
0,33
to
0,39
0,43
to
0,49
0,50
to
0,57

0,40
0,40
0,40
0,15
to
0,35
0,15
to
0,35
0,15
to
0,35
0,15
to
0,35

0,50
to
0,80
0,50
to
0,80
0,60
to
0,90
0,60
to
0,80
0,50
to
0,80
0,50
to
0,80
0,40
to
0,70

0,22
0,60
to 0,40 to
0,29
0,90

0,38
0,60
to 0,40 to
0,45
0,90

P u. S

Cr

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

%
max.

%
max.

(C)

0,035

0,40

0,10

0,40

max. each max.

0,035

0,40

0,10

0,40

Cr+
Mo+
Ni
max.
0,63

4
4

0,035

0,40

0,10

0,40

0,045

P: 0,025
S: 0,035

P: 0,025
S: 0,035

P: 0,025
S: 0,035

0,035

0,90
to
1,20

0,15
to
0,30

0,035

0,90
to
1,20

0,15
to
0,30

200
to
400
200
to
400

7)

Application
example

1,1

Material

6)

Machining

5)

Welding suitability

Relative cost
factor

Flame and
Nitration-hardened
induction-hardened

1,4

1,6

1,2

1,5

QT and flamehardening steels for


1,7
medium and high
loads

1,2

1,5

1,8

1,1

1,4

1,6

1,2

1,5

QT and flamehardening steels for


1,7
medium and high
loads

1,2

1,5

1,8

200
to
400

1,5

1,9

1,6

2,1

Bolts 8.8 up to 100mm


dia., nuts, piston rods,
drive shafts, universal
1,6
joint shafts, coupling
hubs, mill pinions,
gear wheels

200
to
400
200
to
400

300
to
350

1,7

56+6 500

2
to
6

500
310
+100

0,6

0,46
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,54
0,80

0,035

0,90
to
1,20

0,15
to
0,30

4 a)

350
to
400

1,7

2,2

52+6 450

2
to
6

600
330
+100

0,6

0,30
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,38
0,80

0,035

1,30
to
1,70

0,15
to
0,30

1,30
to
1,70

300
to
350

1,7

2,2

650
350
+100

0,6

0,26
0,30
to 0,40 to
0,34
0,60

0,035

1,80
to
2,20

0,30
to
0,50

1,80
to
2,20

300
to
350

1,7

2,2

a)

Forms Cr carbides, which are difficult to machine.

Steel strips

Trunnions, pressure
plates, piston rods

Bolts 8.8, dia. 100 to


160 mm, pressure
plates, piston rods,
1,6 pinch rolls, universal
joint shaft heads,
pinion shafts, bevel
gears
Universal joint shaft
heads, worm shafts,
2,9 pinion shafts, gear
racks, gearwheels,
mill pinions
Bolts 10.9 up to
2,9 dia. 100 mm, gear
wheels

Page 20
SN 359 : 2002-01

Case hardening
steels
DIN EN
10084

Current
16MnCr5+TH

No.

Former

1.7131 16 MnCr 5 BF

High
temperature
X22CrMoV12-1
steels
DIN EN 10269

X 22 CrMoV
1.4923 12 1

+QT

Steels for
forgings
X20CrMoV11-1
DIN EN 10222-2

X 20 CrMoV
1.4922 12 1

+QT

> 100
> 250

S235JRG2

1.0038 RSt 37-2

+N

> 100
> 250

S235J2G3

1.0116 St 37-3

+N

> 100
> 250

S355J2G3

1.0570 St 52-3

+N

> 100
> 250

C22

1.0402 C 22

+N

1.1133 20 Mn 5

Steels for
forgings
DIN EN
10250-2
s SEW 550
(for >500 mm)

C35E

C45E

C60E

1.1181 Ck 35

1.1191 Ck 45

1.1221 Ck 60

* Preliminary value,
** Only guide values,
DVM specimen longitudinal
For footnotes see page 9

Reduction of area at rupture

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

mm

For storage the


heat treatment
20MnCr5+TH
1.7147 20 MnCr 5 BF condition can be
indicated:
+ TH
18CrNiMo7-6+TH 1.6587 17 CrNiMo 6 BF

20Mn5

ReH /
Rp 0,2
N/mm2
min.

Elongation at fracture

Supplementary
symbol 20)

Designation

Rm

A5

KV

Rbw

N/mm2

%
%
J
min. min. min.

N/mm2

HB

min.

max.

720**

207

760**

217

800**

229

160

600

800 to 950

14

40

27

100
250
330

500

700 to 850

16

39
31
27

310

100
250
500
100
250
500
100
250
500

215
175
165
215
175
165
315
275
265

340
340
340
340
340
340
490
450
450

24
23
23
24
23
23
20
18
18

100

210

410

25

207

241

300
530
280
520
+N
260
500
250
490
400
550
+QT
> 70
300
500
> 160
300
500
270
520
> 100
245
500
+N
> 250
220
480
> 500
210
470
s >500
245 490 to 610
320
550
+QT
> 70
290
490
> 160
270
470
305
580
> 100
275
560
+N
> 250
240
540
> 500
230
530
s >500
295 590 to 720
370
630
+QT
> 70
340
590
> 160
320
540
340
670
> 100
310
650
+N
> 250
275
630
> 500
260
620
s >500
345 680 to 830
450
750
+QT
> 70
390
690
> 160
350
670
*** Notched bar impact bending tests at approx. 20C
> 100
> 250
> 500

3)

Tensile strength

Type
and
standard

Nominal thickness

Material

2)

Brinell hardness G
(Guide values)

Strength characteristics
1)

100
250
500
750
70
160
330
100
250
500
1000
1000
70
160
330
100
250
500
1000
1000
70
160
330
100
250
500
1000
1000
70
160
330

22
22
22
22
16
20
20
19
19
19
18
20
20
22
21
16
16
16
15
15
17
18
17
11
11
11
10
12
14
15
14

35
30
27
35 ***
30 ***
27 ***
35 ***
30 ***
27 ***
50
50
40
40
50
45
45
30
25
20
17
(31)
35
31
25
18
15
12
(24)
25
22
20
(-)
-

Page 21
SN 359 : 2002-01
Relative cost
factor

HRC HV1
(mm) (mm)

1,6
2,4
3,2
4,0

0,2
0,3
0,3
0,3

Eht

(mm)
min. min. max.

0,8 4)
57+5 550 1,2 4)
11)
1,6 4)
2,0 4)

1,0
1,1
1,2
1,4

Si

Mn

%
max.

P, S

Cr

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

(C)

max. each

0,14
1,00
0,035
to 0,40 to
0,19
1,30
0,17
1,10
0,035
to 0,40 to
0,22
1,40
0,15
0,50
0,035
to 0,40 to
0,015 d)
0,21
0,90

0,80
to
1,10
1,00
to
1,30
1,50 0,25 1,40
to
to
to
1,80 0,35 1,70

max. 0,55 max.


0,20
1,40

0,045

max. 0,55 max.


0,17
1,40

0,035

max.
max.
0,55
0,22
1,60

0,035

0,17
0,40
to 0,40 to
0,24
0,70

0,045

2 a)

V
0,20 to
0,35

V
0,25 to
0,35

0,18
0,40
11,00 0,80 0,30
to 0,50 to P: 0,025 to
to
to
S: 0,015
0,24
0,90
12,50 1,20 0,80
0,17
0,30
10,00 0,80 0,30
to 0,40 to P: 0,025 to
to
to
0,23
1,00 S: 0,015 12,50 1,20 0,80

0,17
1,00
to 0,40 to
0,23
1,50

0,32
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,39
0,80

0,30 max.
0,08 0,30

Al min.
0,020

0,30 max. 0,30


0,08
Cr+ Mo+
Ni max.
0,48
max.
0,30
0,30
0,08
Cr+Mo+
0,40 max.
0,10 0,40 Ni max.
0,63

7)

Application
example
Material

Machining

6)

Welding preheat
temperature

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

5)

Welding suitability

Relative cost factor for


hardening treatment

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Permissible deviation

Carburizing depth
C min.: 0,4%

Flame and induction-hardened

200 to
Pins, bushings, sliding
400 1,5 1,9 1,2 liners, eccentrics,
cylinders, worm shafts,
pinion shafts, bevel
200 to
1,5 1,9 1,2
gears, gearwheels
400
-

Gear components, ring


1,6 2,1 2,9 gears, drive pinions,
wear parts

350 to
4 450 b)

350 to
450 b)
150 to
4
280 c)

0,9 1,2

e)

e)

e)

e)

e)

1,0 1,3

e)

e)

1,0 1,3

Al min.
0,020

0,035

0,035

max. 0,40
Cr+Mo+
0,40 0,10
Ni max.
0,63

max.
0,40
0,40
0,10

e)

1
e)

e)

Coiler segments (hot


strip), table rollers
(covering), shafts for
mandrel extension

for low loads,


for general use

for medium loads,


for general use

1,3

1
e)

e)

1,1 1,4
1,3

0,42
0,50
to 0,40 to
0,50
0,80

0,035

Cr+Mo+
max.
0,40
0,40 Ni max.
0,10
0,63

1
e)

e)

1,2 1,5
1,3

0,57
0,60
to 0,40 to
0,65
0,90

0,035

0,40

max.
0,40
0,10

1
e)

e)

1,6 2,1
1,3

In non-hardened condition (otherwise 5: not weldable). b) Welding in the austenitic range.


d) Special requirement of SMS Demag.
Welding in the martensitic range.
e) Forgings weldable only under certain conditions, to be agreed upon with design department.
a)

c)

for medium loads,


for general use,
surface-hardening

Page 22
SN 359 : 2002-01

Type
and
standard

Steels for
forgings

20)

Designation
Current

No.

Former

Supplementary
symbols

25CrMo4

1.7218 25 CrMo 4

+QT

34CrMo4

1.7220 34 CrMo 4

+QT

42CrMo4

1.7225 42 CrMo 4

+QT

50CrMo4

1.7228 50 CrMo 4

+QT

30CrNiMo8

1.6580 30 CrNiMo 8

+QT

34CrNiMo6

1.6582 34 CrNiMo 6

+QT

33NiCrMoV14-5

1.6956 33 NiCrMoV 14 5

+QT

DIN EN
10250-3
SEW 550
(for > 500 mm)

X 20 Cr 13 V I

mm
70
> 70 160
> 160 330
70
> 70 160
> 160 330
160
> 160 330
> 330 500
> 500 750
160
> 160 330
> 330 500
> 500 750
160
> 160 330
> 330 660
> 500 1000
160
> 160 330
> 330 660
> 500 1000
70
> 70 160
> 160 330
1000
>1000 1500
>1500 2000

+QT 700

Rm
A5
Z
KV
Rbw HB
ReH /
Rp 0,2
N/mm2
%
%
J N/mm2
N/mm2
min.
min. min. min. min. max.
450
700
15
50
400
650
17
45
380
600
18
38
550
800
14
45
450
700
15
40
410
650
16
33
30
500
750
14
27
460
700
15
22
390
600
16
390
590 to 740
16
(38)
25
550
800
13
20
540
750
14
15
490
700
15
490
690 to 840
15
(31)
45
700
800
12
45
630
750
12
40
590
700
12
590
780 to 930
12
(45)
45
600
900
13
45
540
850
14
40
490
800
15
490
690 to 840
15
(41)
28
980
1100
10
48
820
1000
12
48
780
950
12
- (34)
785 930 to 1130 12
735 880 to 1080 13
(34)
685 830 to 980 14
(34)
500

700 to 850

13

25

370

160

X20Cr13

1.4021 X 20 Cr 13 V II

X 20 Cr 13
Steels for
forgings

X17CrNi16-2

X 17 CrNi 16 2 V
1.4057 X 17 CrNi 16 2 V
X 17 CrNi 16 2

DIN EN
10250-4

X4CrNi18-10

1.4301 X 5 CrNi 18 9

X6CrNiTi18-10

1.4541

X 10 CrNiTi
18 9

10 CrNiMoTi
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 1.4571 X
18 10
X4CrNiMo17-12-2

1.4401

X4CrNiMo16-5-1

1.4418

DVM specimen longitudinal


For footnotes see page 9

X 5 CrNiMo
17 12 2
-

+QT 800

+A

Brinell hardness G
(guide values)

3)

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Reduction of area at rupture

Elongation at fracture

Tensile strength

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

Nominal thickness

Material

2)

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Strength characteristics
1)

600

800 to 950

12

760

20

400

20
15
-

230

+QT 800
+QT 900
+A

250

600
700
-

800 to 900
900 to 1050
1000

250

190

500 to 700

35

100

450

190

500 to 700

30

100

450

200

500 to 700

30

100

250

200

500 to 700

30

100

550
700
-

760 to 960
900 to 1100
1100

90
80
-

+QT 760
+QT 900
+A

450

10
-

16
-

295

320

Page 23
SN 359 : 2002-01

Si

Mn

%
max.

0,22
to
0,29
0,30
to
0,37

0,40
0,40

0,60
to
0,90
0,60
to
0,90

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

(C)

0,90
to
1,20
0,90
to
1,20

0,15
to
0,30
0,15
to
0,30

a)

a)

1,5

1,9

1,6

a)

a)

max. each

0,035
0,035

0,40

0,60
to
0,90)

0,035

0,90
to
1,20

0,15
to
0,30

a)

a)

1,7

2,1

1,6

0,46
to
0,54

0,40

0,50
to
0,80

0,035

0,90
to
1,20

0,15
to
0,30

a)

a)

1,7

2,2

1,6

0,26
to
0,34

0,40

0,30
to
0,60

0,035

1,80
to
2,20

0,30
to
0,50

1,80
to
2,20

a)

a)

1,7

2,2

2,9

0,30
to
0,38

0,40

0,50
to
0,80

0,035

1,30
to
1,70

0,15
to
0,30

1,30
to
1,70

a)

a)

1,7

2,2

2,9

0,28
to
0,38

0,40

0,15
to
0,40

0,035

1,00
to
1,70

0,30
to
0,60

2,90
to
3,80

V: 0,08
to 0,25

a)

a)

1,00

max.
1,50

P: 0,040
S: 0,030

12,0
to
14,0

c)

Material

Cr

0,38
to
0,45

0,16
to
0,25

b)

Application
example

P, S

a)

7)

Machining

6)

Welding preheat
temperature

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

5)

Welding suitability

Relative cost
factor

0,12
to
0,22

max.
1,00

max.
1,50

max.
0,07

1,00

max.
2,00

max.
0,08

1,00

max.
2,00

max.
0,08

1,00

max.
2,00

max.
0,07

max.
1,00

max.
2,00

max.
0,06

max.
0,70

max.
1,50

P: 0,040 15,00
to
S: 0,030
17,00
17,0
P: 0,045
to
S: 0,030
19,5
P: 0,045 17,0
to
S: 0,030
19,0
16,50
P: 0,045
to
S: 0,030
18,50
P: 0,045 16,50
to
S: 0,030
18,50
15,00
P: 0,045
to
S: 0,030
17,00

2,00
to
2,50
2,00
to
2,50
0,80
to
1,50

1,50
to
2,50
8,00
to
10,50
9,00
to
12,00
10,50
to
13,50
10,00
to
13,00
4,00
to
6,00

350 to
450 b)
150 to
280 c)
350 to
450 b)
150 to
280 c)
350 to
450 b)
150 to
280 c)

1,1

1,1

1,7

N max.
0,11

1,5

1,9

3,8

1,6

2,0

5,0

6,5

N max.
0,11

Pressure rolls, mandrel bodies,


coilers for hot rolling mills

Reel shafts for cold rolling mill,


tie-rods, spindle shafts,
gear wheels

Big-diameter reel mandrels for


cold rolling mills,
spades, spindle shafts,
CVC blocks, pins,
push rods,
top clamp release cylinders

Ti
5x C,
to 0,70
Ti
5x C,
to 0,70

Pressure plates, coupling hubs,


drive shafts, bending blocks

Water boxes

N max.
0,020

Forgings weldable only under certain conditions, to be agreed upon with design department.
Welding in the austenitic range.
Welding in the martensitic range.

Discharge covers,
bottom clamp release cylinders

Page 24
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Tensile strength

Elongation at fracture

Reduction of area at rupture

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Brinell hardness G
(guide values)

Nominal thickness

Type of product *
20)

Designation
Current

No.

Former

Supplementary
symbol

X 20 Cr 13 VI

X20Cr13

1.4021 X 20 Cr 13 VII

X 20 Cr 13

mm

Rm

A5

KV

Rbw

HB

1.4057 X 17 CrNi 16 2

DIN 17440

X39CrMo17-1

700 to
850

13

25

370

+QT800

160

600

800 to
950

12

20

400

+A

max. 760

230

600

800 to
900

10

+QT900

X39 CrMo 17 1V

+QT

X39 CrMo 17 1

+A

X4CrNiMo17-12-2

1.4301 X 5 CrNi 18 9

1.4401

X 5 CrNiMo
17 12 2

N/mm2
min. max.

500

DIN EN
10088-1 to 3
X5CrNi18-10

J
min.

160

1.4122

and

%
%
min. min.

250

+A
Stainless steels

N/mm2

+QT700

+QT800
X17CrNi16-2

3)

ReH /
Rp 0,2
N/mm2
min.

Material

Type
and
standard

2)

Yield point or
0,2% proof stress

1)

quenched

solutionannealed

20

700

900 to
1050

1000

295

900

12

280

500 to
700

35

100

180
-

530 to
680

40 **
-

12

160
> 160 250

190

240

15

12

220

75

220

520 to
670

45 **

90

X6CrNiTi18-10

1.4541

X 10 CrNiTi
18 9

quenched

160
> 160 450

190

500 to
700

30

100

200

X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2

1.4571

X 10 CrNiMoTi
18 10

quenched

160
> 160 450

200

500 to
700

30

100

* C = cold-rolled strip; H = hot-rolled strip; P = hot-rolled plate;


** Thickness at least 3 mm

For footnotes see page 9

Page 25
SN 359 : 2002-01

(mm)

min. min.
-

(mm)

47
to
53

480
to
580

b)
c)

Si

Mn

%
max.

Mo

Ni

Others

TV

(C)

max. each

4
0,16
to
0,25

P: 0,040 12,0
max.
1,00
S: 0,015 to
1,50
a)
14,0

0,12
15,00
to max. max. P: 0,040 to
1,00
1,50
S:
0,030
0,22
17,00

0,33 max. max. P: 0,040 15,50


to 1,00 1,50 S: 0,015 to
17,50
0,45

0,80
to
1,30

P: 0,045
max. 1,00 max. S: 0,015 17,0
to
2,00
0,07
a)
19,5

16,50
max. max. max. P: 0,045 to
0,07 1,00 2,00 S: 0,015 18,50

P: 0,045 17,0
max. 1,00 max.
to
2,00 S: 0,015
0,08
a)
19,0

max. 1,00 max. P: 0,045 16,50


S: 0,015 to
0,08
2,00
a)
18,50

1,50
to
2,50

max.
1,00

350 to
450 b)
150 to
280 c)
350 to
450 b)
150 to
280 c)
350 to
450 b)
150 to
280 c)

8,00
to N 0,11 1
10,50

N max.
0,11

Pins, shafts, bushings,


pipe supports, oil
distributors, screws,
washers, semifinished products

Semi-finished
products

Cold and hot rolled


strip, hot rolled plate

9,00
Ti
to
5x C
12,00 to 0,70

2,00 10,50
Ti
to
to
5x C
2,50 13,50 to 0,70

In the case of bars, wires and forgings a max. content of 0.030 % S is applicable.
Welding in the austenitic range.
Welding in the martensitic range.

2,00 10,00
to
to
2,50 13,00

Application
example
Material

Welding preheat
temperature

Cr

7)

Machining

6)

P, S

a)

5)

Welding suitability

Nitriding depth

In nitriding depth

On the surface

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

HRC HV1 Rht HV3 HV3 Nht


min. min.

Relative cost
factor

Nitration-hardened

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Flame and
inductionhardened

Screws, washers,
flanges, vessels,
1,5 1,9 3,8 shapes, wires, chains,
semi-finished products

Anchor bolts, shim


packs, plates, stud
anchors, seals

Flanges, vessels, pipe


1,6 2,0 5,2 couplings, shapes,
semi-finished
products, seals
-

Flanges, pipes, pipe


couplings, semifinished products

Page 26
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Current
EN-GJL-200

Cast iron with


lamellar
graphite
EN-GJL-250 13)

No.

Former

Cast iron with


lamellar
GGL-320 MoCr 8
graphite

EN-GJS-400-18U

Spheroidal
graphite cast
iron
EN-GJS-500-7U

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

A5
%

Z
%

KV
J

Rbw
N/mm2

min.

min. min. min.

Brinell hardness G
(Guide values)

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Rm
N/mm2

HB

min.

10 20
- > 20 40
> 40 80

min. 180
min. 155
min. 130

0,8
to
0,3

90
-

EN-JL
1040

GG-25

10 20
- > 20 40
> 40 80

min. 225
min. 195
min. 170

0,8
to
0,3

120
-

EN-JL
1050

GG-30

10 20
- > 20 40
> 40 80

min. 270
min. 240
min. 210

0,8
to
0,3

140
-

min. 350

max.
280

EN-JS
1062

untreated or
annealed for stress relief

EN-JS
1072

30
- > 30 60
> 60 200

250
250
240

min. 400
min. 390
min. 370

18
15
12

130
to
180

30
- > 30 60
> 60 200

250
250
240

min. 400
min. 390
min. 370

15
14
11

130
to
180

EN-JS
1082

GGG-50

30
- > 30 60
> 60 200

320
300
290

min. 500
min. 450
min. 420

7
7
5

170
to
230

EN-GJS-600-3U

EN-JS
1092

GGG-60

30
- > 30 60
> 60 200

370
360
340

min. 600
min. 600
min. 550

3
2
1

190
to
270

EN-GJS-700-2U

EN-JS
1102

GGG-70

30
- > 30 60
> 60 200

420
400
380

min. 700
min. 700
min. 660

2
2
1

225
to
305

EN-JM
1020
EN-JM
1030

GTW-S 38-12 annealed for


decarburi- sation
GTW-40-05

190

360

220

400

1.0420

GS-38

normalized

30
> 30 100

200
200

1.0446

GS-45

normalized

30
> 30 100

GS-52

1.0552

GS-52

normalized

GS-60

1.0558

GS-60

normalized

1.1120

GS-20Mn5V

quenched
and
tempered

DIN EN 1563

Malleable cast EN-GJMW-360-12


iron
DIN EN 1562 EN-GJMW-400-5
GS-38
Generalpurpose cast GS-45
steel
DIN1681

Rp 0,2
N/mm2

GG-20

GGG-40
EN-GJS-400-15U 13)

mm

EN-JL
1030

DIN EN 1561
EN-GJL-300

Reduction of area at rupture

(Heat
treatment
condition) 21)

Elongation at fracture

Designation

Tensile strength

Type
and
standard

3)

Yield strength

Strength category

Material

2)

Nominal thickness

1)

15)

14)

Cast steel
(weldable,
GS-20Mn5V
strong, tough)
DIN 17182
Expected values in the casting
For footnotes see page 9

(A3,4)
5

min. 380
min. 380

25
25

40
40

35
35

160
-

230
230

min. 450
min. 450

22
22

31
31

27
27

190
-

30
- > 30 100

260
260

min. 520
min. 520

18
18

25
25

27
22

210
210

30
> 30 100

300
300

min. 600
min. 600

15
15

21
21

27
20

240
240

max.
200
max.
220
110
to
150
130
to
170
150
to
200
175
to
220

50
- > 50 100
> 100 160

360
300
280

500 to 650
500 to 650
500 to 650

24
24
22

70
50
40

sample
diameter: 12

Page 27
SN 359 : 2002-01

7,15

7,20

7,25

88
to
113

103
to
118

1,0 1,3 1,0 GG-25 suitable for


castings for hydraulic
systems 200 bar

at supplier's discretion 4

108
to
137

1,0 1,2 1,0 drawing indication:


casting for hydr. systems
test pressure e.g.: 300 bar

1,0 1,2 1,0 Housings, fittings, valves

3,0
to
3,4

1,6
to
2,4

1,0 1,2

To be used only in
exceptional cases upon
previous agreement.
Better wear resistance at
higher temperature.

Mill housings, gen. cast


0,9 1,1 1,0 machine components with
ductility requirement

GGG-40 suited for


castings for hydr. systems
0,9 1,1 1,0
200 bar
Chocks

High impact resistance,


1,0 1,3 1,1 bearing and gear
components

1,0 1,3 1,2

7,10 12,5 169

max. each

0,5
0,60
0,20 0,20
to P:
to
to
S: 0,12
1,0
0,40 1,00

7,10 12,5 169

7,10 12,5 169

2 to
7,20 12,5 174
4

2 to 7,20 12,5 176


4

7,30

7,85 11,1 211

7,85

TV

47+6 375

Material

Machining

Ni Others

Welding preheat
temperature

7,30

Mo

Application
example

Mn

Cr

7)

Si

P, S

6)

Relative cost
factor

47+6 372

Welding suitability

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

Modulus of elasticity

Coefficient of expansion

Density

5)

(C)

for repair welding only

min. min.

Rht
(mm) kg/ 10-6/ kN/
dm3 K mm2
10,0
10,0
10,0
at 100C to +20C

HRC HV1

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Flame and
Physical properties
induction-hardened

at supplier's discretion

Pistons, gearwheels,
wear parts
-

malleable cast iron specially developed for welding

cosmetic repairs only

0,15
to
0,18
0,18
to
0,23
0,28
to
0,35
0,40
to
0,44

0,30
to
0,50
0,30
to
0,50
0,30
to
0,50
0,30
to
0,50

0,60
to
0,80
0,60
to
0,80
0,60
to
0,80
0,70
to
0,90

max.
0,30

P: 0,020 max.
S: 0,015 0,30

0,025

0,025

max.
0,30

0,025

max.
0,30

approximate
analysis

0,17
1,00
max.
P: 0,020 max. max. max.
to
to
0,60
0,23
1,50 S: 0,015 0,30 0,15 0,40

3
4

1,3 1,6 1,2

Threaded fittings

1,0 1,3 1,0 For medium loads

from
30mm 1,1 1,3 1,0
150C
Cylinders, mill housings
150
1,2 1,4 1,0
to
200
200
1,2 1,5 1,0 Track rollers,
to
gear components
400
150
to
200

For welded highly loaded


1,2 1,4 1,0 machine components, mill
housings

Page 28
SN 359 : 2002-01

Former

GS-30 Mn 5 V

1.1165 GS-30 Mn 5 V

hardened
and
tempered

GS-25 CrMo 4 V

1.7218 GS-25
CrMo 4 V

hardened
and
tempered

I
II
I
II
I
II
I
II
I
I
II
I
II
I
I
II
I
I

Rp 0,2
N/mm2

Rm
N/mm2

A5
%

Z
%

250
400

min.
400
550
360
450
450
600
450
550
410
650
800
600
700
550
700
800
650
600

520 to 670
700 to 850
500 to 650
600 to 750
600 to 750
750 to 900
600 to 750
700 to 850
600 to 750
780 to 930
900 to 1100
800 to 950
850 to 1000
700 to 850
850 to 1000
900 to 1100
800 to 950
800 to 950

50

> 50

100
50

> 50

100

> 100

150
50

Brinell hardness G
(guide values)

mm

3)

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Reduction of area at rupture

No.

Elongation at fracture

Current

(Heat
treatment
condition) 21)

Tensile strength

Quenched and
tempered cast
steel

Designation

Yield strength

Type
and
standard

Nominal thickness

Strength category

Material

2)

Notch impact energy


ISO V-specimen, longitudinal

Strength characteristics
1)

KV
Rbw HB
J N/mm2

min. min. min.


14
50
10
35
12
35
10
27
18
50
10
35
14
40
10
32
12
32
14
35
10
27
12
30
10
27
10
27
12
45
10
35
12
30
10
27

min.
-

max.
-

1.7225 GS-42
CrMo 4 V

hardened
and
tempered

1.6582 GS-34
CrNiMo 6 V

hardened
and
tempered

Cast steel for G42CrMo4


flame and
induction
hardening

1.7231 G42CrMo4

quenched
and
tempered

150

470

min. 680

12

G50CrMo4

1.7232 G50CrMo4

quenched
and
tempered

150

520

min. 730

11

GP240GR+N

1.0621 GS-C 25 N

normalized
-

100

240 420 to 600


MPa
MPa

22

DIN 17205

GS-42 CrMo 4 V

GS-34 CrNiMo 6 V

SEW 835

100

> 100

150
100

> 100
> 250

27

GP240GH+QT

1.0619 GS-C 25 V

quenched
and
tempered

G20Mo5+QT

1.5419 GS-22 Mo 4 V

quenched
and
tempered

100

245 440 to 590


MPa
Mpa

22

27

1.7357 GS-17
CrMo 5 5 V

quenched
and
tempered

100

315 490 to 690


MPa
Mpa

20

27

1.7706 GS-17
CrMoV 5 11 V

quenched
and
tempered

150

440 590 to 780


Mpa
MPa

15

27

G-X22
GX23CrMoV12-1+QT 1.4931 CrMoV 12 1 V

quenched
and
tempered

150

540 740 to 880


MPa
Mpa

15

27

Cast steel for


service at
elevated
G17CrMo5-5+QT
temperatures
DIN EN
10213-2

> 50

G17CrMoV5-10+QT

40

1 MPa = 1 N/mm2
** The hardness values apply to the condition after stress-relieving at temperatures between 140 and 180C (see SEW 835; section 5.3)

For footnotes see page 9

Page 29
SN 359 : 2002-01
Relative cost
factor

HRC HV1 Rht


C
(mm) kg/ 10-6/ kN/ %
dm3 K mm2
min. min.
-

7,85

7,85 11,0 211

Si
%

Mn
%

P, S
%

7)

Application
example
Material

Machining

Welding suitability

Chemical composition
(ladle analysis)

6)

Welding preheat
temperature

5)

Modulus of elasticity

Coefficient of expansion

Density

Hardening depth

In hardening depth

On the surface

Flame and
Physical properties
induction-hardened

Cr
%

Mo
%

Ni
%

Others
%

TV
(C)

150
to
200

1,2

1,5

1,0 Bearing races, wheels

200
to
400

1,5

1,9

1,2

max. each

0,27
1,20
to max. to P: 0,020
0,60
S: 0,015
0,34
1,50

0,22 max. 0,50 P: 0,020 0,80 0,20


to
to
to to
0,60
S: 0,015
0,29
0,80
1,20 0,30

Wheels, pinions, bevel gears


-

0,38 max. 0,60 P: 0,020 0,80 0,20


to 0,60 to S: 0,015 to to
0,45
1,00
1,20 0,30

7,85

min. 7,85
5

54+6 475 26to 7,85

54 **

min. 7,85
6

57 **

300
to
350

1,6

2,0

1,2

0,30
0,60
1,40 0,20 1,40
to max. to P: 0,020 to to to
0,60
S: 0,015
0,37
1,00
1,70 0,30 1,70

300
to
350

1,9

2,4

construction, pinions,
1,3 Gear
wheels

0,38
0,60
0,80 0,20
to max. to P: 0,020 to to
0,45 0,60 1,00 S: 0,015 1,20 0,30

300
to
350

Toggle levers, crane wheels,


bevel gears

0,46 0,25 0,50


0,90 0,15
to to to P: 0,035 to to
S:
0,035
0,54 0,50 0,80
1,20 0,25

350
to
400

Parts subject to wear which


have high strength and good
depth hardening capacity

0,18
max.
to
1,20
0,25 max.
P: 0,030
0,18 0,60 0,50 S: 0,020
to
to
0,23
1,20

from
2 30 mm 1,2
150C

1,4

1,0 Housings, covers

7,85

7,85 12,2 211

0,15
0,50
to max. to P: 0,025
0,23 0,60 1,00 S: 0,020

0,40
to
0,60

200

1,2

1,5

1,1 Valves, elbows

7,85 12,2 211

0,15
0,50
1,00 0,45
max.
to 0,60 to 0,020 to to
0,20
1,00
1,50 0,65

250

1,3

1,6

1,2

300

1,5

1,8

good high-temperature
1,3 strength, see DIN EN 10213

400

1,5

1,9

1,7 Coiler segments

V
0,20
to
7,85 0,30
Sn max.
0,025
V
0,25
0,20
0,50 P: 0,030 11,30 1,00 max.
to
7,7 10,5 216 to 0,40 to
to to
S: 0,020
1,00 0,35
0,26
0,80
12,20 1,20
W max.
0,50
0,15
0,50
1,20 0,90
to max. to P: 0,020 to to
0,60
S: 0,015
0,20
0,90
1,50 1,10

for highly stressed machine


components

Page 30
SN 359 : 2002-01
Strength characteristics

Hardness data

Yield strength

Tensile strength

Elongation at fracture

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

3)

Rp 0,2
N/mm2

Rm
N/mm2

A5
%

Rbw
N/mm2

Material

Type
and
standard

Designation
Current
GK-CuSn10Zn *

No.
-

Former
GK-S1

min.
min. 160 min. 290 min. 20

Brinell hardness

HB 10/1000 at
20C 150C 200C 250C
min.
min.
min.
min.
85

60

70

Copper-tin-zinc cast
alloys (red brass)

CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GS

CC493K-GS G-CuSn7ZnPb
(Rg 7)

min. 120 min. 230 min. 15

DIN EN 1982

CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ

GZ-CuSn7ZnPb
CC493K-GZ (GZ-Rg 7)

min. 120 min. 260 min. 12

CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GC

CC493K-GC

GC-CuSn7ZnPb
(GC-Rg 7)

min. 120 min. 260 min. 12

70

CuSn12-C-GS

CC483K-GS

G-CuSn12

min. 140 min. 260 min. 7

80

CuSn12-C-GZ

CC483K-GZ

GZ-CuSn12

CuSn12-C-GC

CC483K-GC

GC-CuSn12

CuSn12Ni2-C-GS

CC484K-GS

G-CuSn12Ni

CuSn12Ni2-C-GZ

CC484K-GZ

GZ-CuSn12Ni

CuSn12Ni2-C-GC

CC484K-GC

GC-CuSn12Ni

CuSn11Pb2-C-GS

CC482K-GS

G-CuSn12Pb

CuSn11Pb2-C-GZ

CC482K-GZ

GZ-CuSn12Pb

CuSn11Pb2-C-GC

CC482K-GC

GC-CuSn12Pb

Copper-tin-lead cast
alloys (cast tin-leadbronze)

CuSn10Pb10-C-GS

CC495K-GS

G-CuPb10Sn

min. 80 min. 180 min. 8

70

60

DIN EN 1982

CuSn10Pb10-C-GZ

CC495K-GZ

GZ-CuPb10Sn

min. 110 min. 220 min. 6

(80)

70

CuAl10Fe5Ni5-C-GS

CC333G-GS

G-CuAl10Ni

min. 250 min. 600 min. 13

185

140

CuAl10Fe5Ni5-C-GZ

CC333G-GZ

GZ-CuAl10Ni

min. 280 min. 650 min. 13 (185)

150

AMPCO 18-23 **
AMPCO 18-23 (GZ) **

min. 365 min. 724 min. 14


(185)
min. 386 min. 758 min. 16

202
207

MAIN-METALL **

220 to
300

280 to
320

5 to
15

Alzen 305 **

5 to
8
12 to
20

290 to
390
290 to
390

Alzen 305 K **

215 to
275
215 to
265

Copper-tin cast alloys


(tin bronze)
DIN EN 1982

Copper-aluminium cast
alloys (cast aluminiumbronze)
DIN EN 1982

White bronze

GS = sand casting, GZ = centrifugal casting, GC = continuously cast material


* Not according to standard
** Not according to standard, CuAl alloy with special guaranteed values.
*** Upon request also < 80 HB
For footnotes see page 9

min. 150

min. 280 min. 5

110

90

min. 300 min. 6

min. 160 min. 280 min. 12


min. 180 min. 300

min. 8

85
140

min. 10

min. 130 min. 240


min. 150 min. 280

90

95
80

min. 5

130

90

85 to
125 ***
90

40
35

Page 31
SN 359 : 2002-01

Modulus of elasticity

Coefficient of expansion

Density

Physical
properties

kg/ 10-6/ kN/


dm3 K mm2
-

8,8

Chemical analysis
(main alloying constituents)

Cu
%

Sn
%

Zn
%

86,0 9,0 1,0


to to to
89,0 11,0 3,0

98 81,0 6,0
18,5 to
to to
115 85,0 8,0

2,0
to
5,0

Pb
%

Ni
%

Fe
%

P, S
%

Al
%

Si
%

Sb
%

5,0
max. max. max. max.
to max. max.
2,0 0,2 0,10 0,01 0,01 0,3
8,0

Properties

Application
example

from Purchase Dept. upon


request

Resistance to rolling emulsion


in aluminium stands

seawater-resistant, good
metal-working and emergency running properties,
sensitive to edge loading,
cost 30% lower as compared
with CuSn12-C-GS, not
weldable

Mn Others
%
%

P: max.
0,60
max. max. max.
max. max. max. max.
0,7 2,0 0,20 S: max. 0,01 0,01 0,15 0,20
0,05

P: 0,05
to
1,5
84,5
11,0
90
0,40
max.
max.
max.
max. max. max. max.
to
to to
17,5 to
0,4 0,3 2,5 0,20
0,01 0,01 0,1 0,20
110 87,5 13,0
S: max.
0,05

P: max.
0,40 max. max. max. max.
S: max. 0,01 0,01 0,20 0,20
0,08

85,0 11,0
to to
88,5 13,0

18,5
8,6

0,7
83,5 10,5
to to max. to max. max.
87,0 12,5 2,0 2,5 2,0 0,20

8,7 18,5

9,0 18,7

75
to
83

78,0 9,0
8,0
max. max. max. max. max. max. max.
to to max.
2,0 to 2,0 0,25 0,10 0,01 0,01 0,5 0,2
82,0 11,0
11,0

7,6

17
to
19

100 76,0 max. max. max. 4,0


to
to 0,1 0,50 0,03 to
128 83,0
6,0

4,0
to
5,5

7,45

16

112 85,5

4,4

24

1,0
to
5,0

4,8

26

3,0
to
5,0

Including nickel

remnant

75

8,5 max.
to 0,1
10,5

Cr max.
0,05;
max. Mg max.
3,0 0,05;
Bi max.
0,01

3,5

10,5

0,5

35,0
to
40,0

30,0
to
35,0

Slide plates, high-load


bearings,
operating temperature
max. 150 C

seawater-resistant, high
wear resistance,
good impact and fatigue
strength, sensitive to
edge pressure.
CuSn12Ni with increased
strength and resistance to
wear.

Sliding liners, highly stressed


sliding blocks, spindle nuts
moving under load, highly
stressed and fast-running
worm gears, very well suited
as bearing material with high
surface quality and hardened
shaft material, operating
temperature max. 250 C

highly corrosion and wearresistant, good sliding


properties, very good
emergency running
properties, insensitive to
edge pressure

Bearing material for roll


bearings and rotary shears.
Superior to tin bronze and red
brass in the case of journals
without surface hardening.

high resistance to wear and


heat, acid-proof, poor
emergency running
properties.

Bearing material for roll


bearings and rotary shears.
Superior to tin bronze and red
brass in the case of journals
without surface hardening.
Resistant to rolling emulsion in
aluminium stands

good metal-working and


emergency running properties, very long life, high
load-bearing capacity, less
costly than CuSn12-C-GS.

Heavily loaded wear strips and


bearings, worm gears up to
medium load.
Operating temperature
max. 120 C

Page 32
SN 359 : 2002-01

Designation

Type
and
standard

Current
CuZn35Mn2Al1Fe1-

No.

Former

G-CuZn35Al1
GS CC765S-GS (G-SoMsF
45)
GZ CC765S-GZ GZ-CuZn35Al1
(GZ-SoMsF 45)

Copper-zinc cast alloys CuZn34Mn3Al2Fe1-C(cast special brass)

DIN EN 1982

G-CuZn34Al2
GS CC764S-GS (G-SoMsF
60)
GZ-CuZn34Al2
GZ CC764S-GZ (GZ-SoMsF
60)
G-CuZn25Al5
GS CC762S-GS (G-SoMsF
75)

CuZn25Al5Mn4Fe3-CGZ CC762S-GZ GZ-CuZn25Al5


Copper-zinc alloy
(Special brass)

CuZn37Mn3Al2PbSi-R540

DIN EN 12164
Tin cast alloy for
multilayer plain bearings
(babbitt metal)

SnSb8Cu4

LgSn 89

Fatigue strength under


reversed bending stresses

Rp 0,2 Rm A5 Rbw
N/mm2 N/mm2 dm3 N/mm2
min.
min. min. min.
170 450 20
min. min. min.
200 500 18
min. min. min.
250 600 15
min. min. min.
260 620 14
min.
450
min.
480

CW713R- CuZn40Al2F5416) ca.


(SoMs 58 Al 2 F 55) 280
R540

2.3791

47

min.
750

min.
8

metal

120

140

150

180

min. min.
540 15

ca.
150

31

60 to 90 to 5 to
100 120 8

H CuSn8613/8-1

H CuSn8613/8p-1

H CuSn8613/10p-1T1

H CuSnPb8313/8p-2Mo

H FeCu9404/10pf-2MoT5

BM11 CuSnPb8213/8E

300 **

500
to
700 **

BM11 CuSnPb8213/10pfE

300 **

500
to
700 **

BM11 CuSn8713/6E

300 **

500
to
700 **

min.
50
min.
85
min.
65
min.
85
min.
60

2
2
2
2
-

19

95
to
110

20

90
to
98

8,2

18

105
to
115

8,1

20

105

8,6

22
17
11
8
at
at
at
at
7,3 23,9 57
20C 50C 120C 150C
25 to
45

6,8

40

6,8

65

6,6

40

6,4

65

6,6

140

5,7

6,3

6,4 17,5 210**

6,5

18

45
50

18

53
46
51

13

45

Compressive strength:
300 N / mm2

Maintenance-free sliding materials

DEVATM

190

17)

110

Compressive strength:
250to 300 N / mm2

Microdistributed
solid lubricant *

Sintered bronze B 50

HB 10/1000 at
20C 150C 200C 250C kg/ 10-6/ kN/
min. min. min. min. dm3 K mm

min.
5

DIN ISO 4381


Sintered bronze
oil-impregnated

Brinell hardness
Density

Tensile strength

Yield strength

Material

Elongation at fracture

3)

Modulus of elasticity

Physical
properties

Hardness data

Coefficient of expansion

Strength characteristics

40

Macrodistributed
solid lubricant *

dg02(2.1061) + C

2.1061.01

140

min.
260

10

90

80

8,7 18,5 100

devagleitTM

dg03(2.0975) + C

2.0975.03

300

min.
700

13

185

160

7,6

Microdistributed
solid lubricant *
DEVATM
strip metal

GS = sand casting, GZ = centrifugal casting, GC = continuously cast material


* not according to standard
** carrier material
For footnotes see page 9

17

130

Page 33
SN 359 : 2002-01

Chemical analysis
(main alloying constituents)

Dimensions
(commercial)

Properties

Application example

Cu 57,0 to 65,0; Al 0,5 to 2,5;


Fe 0,5 to 2,0; Mn 0,5 to 3,0;
Sb max. 0,08; Ni max. 6,0;
Pb max. 0,5; Sn max. 1,0;
Cu 55,0 to 66,0; Al 1,0 to 3,0;
Fe 0,5 to 2,5; Mn 1,0 to 4,0;
Sb max. 0,05; Ni max. 3,0;
Pb max. & Sn max. each 0,3;
Cu 60,0 to 67,0; Al 3,0 to 7,0;
Fe 1,5 to 4,0; Mn 2,5 to 5,0;
Sb max.0,03; Ni max. 3,0;
Pb max. & Sn max. each 0,2;

P max. 0,03; Si max. 0,1; balance: Zn

Cu 57,0 to 59,0; Al 1,3 to 2,3;


Mn 1,5 to 3,0; Pb 0,2 to 0,8;
Si 0,3 to 1,3; Sn max. 0,4;
Fe max. and Ni max. each 1,0;
balance: Zn
Sn 87,2 to 89,2; Sb 7,0 to 8,0;
Cu 3,0 to 4,0; As and Fe each 0,1;
Al and Zn each 0,01; Pb 0,35; Bi
0,08;
Others in total 0,2
Cu 89,0 to
Sn 9,0 to

91,0;
11,0

C 8,0 (% of weight)
C 8,0 (% of weight)
C 10,0 (% of weight)

Forcing nuts

Cu 86,0; Pb 2,0; Sn 13,0;


C 8,0 (% of weight)
Fe 94,0; Cu 4,0; Mo 2,0; S 2,0;
C 8,0 (% of weight)
Steel back: stainless steel
Slide layer: Cu 82,0; Pb 5,0;
Sn 13,0; C 8,0 (% of weight)
Steel back: Niro steel
Slide layer: Cu 82,0; Pb 5,0;
Sn 13,0; C 10,0 (% of weight)
Steel back: Niro steel
Slide layer: Cu 87,0;
Sn 13,0; C 6,0 (% of weight)
Cu 85,0 to 88,0; Sn 10,0 to 12,0;
Pb 1,0 to 1,5; Ni 0,8 to 1,5

high strength even at higher operating


temperatures
moderate sliding and emergency
running properties

20 to 280
20/40 to 550/600
84 x 254
90 x 350
116 x 268
126 x 227
spherical plain bearing
(as floating or locating
bearing)
Thin-walled high perWall
formance material
thickness
10 < D1 < 18 mm
1 mm
20 < D1 < 28 mm
1,5 mm
28 < D1 < 46 mm
2 mm
45 < D1 < 75 mm
2,5 mm
75 < D1 < 246 mm
3 mm
> 250 mm
5 mm
rolled plain bearings up to 1000 mm
> 1000 mm in segment arrangement

high deformability
very good antiseizure performance,
insensitive to edge pressure

For highly stressed rolling mill bearings, Morgoil bearings

excellent antiseizure performance,


no maintenance, sensitive to edge
pressure and shock loading.
self-lubricating sliding materials:
load carrying capacity:
static loads up to 200 N/mm
dynamic loads up to 100 N/mm

For bearings under low load


8 to 5 N/mm at low speeds
(0.5 to 1.0 m /s)

Self-lubricating sliding materials made


by the powder-metallurgical process,
for use at temperatures up to 200 C, extremely high-compressed,
through heat treatment up to 350 C, corrosion-resistant, suitable for high
temperatures.
to be specified in the order.
for use at temperatures up to 600 C

load carrying capacity:


Self-lubricating compound sliding ma
static loads up to 320 N/mm
terial, consisting of steel back with
dynamic loads up to 120 N/mm
at temperat. from 150 C to +280 C DEVA slide layer made by the rollingsintering process, for extremely high
loads, particularly cost-efficient due
rolled bearings usable up to 280 C. to thin walls, corrosion-resistant.
plates usable up to 350 C.

Self-lubricating sliding material, loadCylindrical plain bearings, spherical


capable up to 60 N/mm and 250 C
plain bearings, thrust bearings, thrust
faces, collar sleeves in nearly all
Cu min.78,0; Mn max. 3,5; Fe 3,0 to 5,0 dimensions
Self-lubricating sliding material, loadAl 10,0 to 11,5; Ni 3,0 to 5,5;
capable up to 150 N/mm and 250 C

including nickel

Statically very high loaded construc


tional parts, such as bearings under
high load and at low number of
revolutions,
highly stressed, slow-running worm
gear wheels, internal parts of highpressure fittings
Slide liners, shafts, washers, rings

Bushes up to 100 mm dia.


Cu 86,0;
Mo 2,0;
S 1,0;
Sn 13,0;

Forcing nuts under peak stress,


piston rings, sliding blocks

Devagleit enables maintenance-free


use of bronze plain bearings so far
with lubrication requirement, recommended for big dimensions, corrosionresistant.

January 2002

Drilling and thread depths

SN 480

Thread selection series and undercuts


Dimensions in mm
Maximum drilling depths

or

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

t1 for bits of normal lengths


t2 for overlength bits and
for drilling tools (twist,
single-lip and ejector drills)

d1

t1

d1

t1

t2

d1

t1

1,2

16

94

125

24

56

12

101

250

26

165

1500

50

220

321

26,5

165

214

52

225

1500

2,5

30

62

12,5

101

33

160

13,5

108

700

28

170

600

53

225

28,5

175

54

230

3,3

36

69

14

108

1500

29,5

175

56

235

3,5

39

180

14,5

114

43

190

15,25

120

230

30

175

1100

57

235

30,5

180

58

235

4,2

43

78

15,5

120

32

185

500

60

235

4,5

47

200

16

52

250

16,5

120

315

33

185

1500

61

240

125

230

33,5

185

62

240

600

5,3

52

5,5

57

250

17

125

315

34

190

340

66

245

17,5

130

700

35

190

68

250

57

900

18

130

1500

36

195

267

70

250

6,6

63

6,8

69

155

18,5

135

37,5

195

267

76

260

19

135

310

38

200

78

260

69

1200

19,5

140

260

38,5

200

75

8,5

75

265

20

140

500

39

200

1500

265

20,5

145

39,5

200

360

8,8

81

115

21

145

400

40

200

277

81

900

22

150

1500

42

205

9,5

81

280

22,5

155

43

210

10

87

500

23

155

198

43,5

210

10,2

87

185

23,5

155

345

44

210

750

10,5

87

185

24,5

160

290

45

210

1500

11

94

1500

25

160

1500

48

220

320

t2

11,8

t1

d1

t2

t2

In the d1 range from 45 mm


to 186 mm holes in 1 mm
dia. steps and drilling
depths of 6 x d1 can be
made with drilling tools.

Maximum drilling depths for multi-diameter and single-diameter holes


Drilling depth
Max. depth

Core hole dia.


d1

t1

d2

t2

Threaded connection
b
min.
8
G 1/8

1200

8,8

115

1200

1500

11,8

125

11

1500

12

G 1/4

1500

15,25

230

14

1500

12

G 3/8

1500

19

310

18

1500

14

G 1/2

1500

24,5

290

22

1500

16

G 3/4

1500

30,5

180

26

1500

18

G1

It is also possible to make single-diameter holes instead of multi-diameter holes. If no definite diameter is
required for the hole (d2), a diameter range, e.g. d2 = 11 mm to 22 mm, should be indicated to enable optimum
and cost-effective manufacture of the hole. The drawing indication of multi-diameter and single-diameter holes is
as follows:
e.g.

All holes having bigger depths than those stated in the above tables must be approved by the Operations Scheduling Dept.
Continued on pages 2 to 7

Page 2
SN 480 : 2002-01
Drilling and thread depths

For pipe threads as in DIN ISO 228

b = useful thread length

Drawing indication

e.g.

d
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

Outside dia.
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4

1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6

1/4
1/2
3/4
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2

Core dia.

9,728
13,157
16,662
20,955
26,441
33,249
41,91
47,803
53,746
59,614
75,184
87,884
100,33
113,03
125,73
138,43
151,13
163,83

b min.

13

12

18

14
16
18
20
22

22
24
28
30
32

24

34

30

40

35

45

40

50

45

55

8,8
11,8
15,25
19
24,5
30,5
39,5
45
51
57
72,5
85,5
97,5
110,5
123
136
148,5
161

For metric thread as in DIN 13

Drilling and thread depths


d

Core dia.

b 1)

3,3

11

10

4,2

6,5

14

12

8,5

7,5

10

16

14

10,2

11

6,8

10

13

20

17

11,9

17

M 10

8,5

12

15

23

20

14,1

22

M 12

10,2

15

18

27

24

17,6

27

M 16

14

20

24

34

30

22

39

M 20

17,5

25

29

41

36

28

50

M 24

21

30

34

48

43

32

61

e.g.

M 30

26,5

38

42

58

52

37,6

78

For metric thread as in DIN 13

M 36

32

45

49

66

60

43

96

M 42

37,5

52

56

75

50

114

M 48

43

60

65

86

58

115

M 56

50,5

70

75

100

66

131

M 64

58

80

86

110

M 72 x 6

66

90

95

119

M 80 x 6

74

100

106

130

M 90 x 6

84

112

118

142

M 100 x 6

94

125

132

156

M 110 x 6

104

137

143

167

M 125 x 6

119

156

162

186

M 140 x 6

134

175

182

206

M 160 x 6

154

200

206

230

b = useful thread length

Drawing indication:

Drawing indication:

e.g.

t normal case

t short 2)

d1

+1

t 1 = 3)

Important!
t1 sinking
depth to be
chosen as
small as possible.

The manufacturing shop is free to choose a thread runout or undercut provided that the useful thread length is
observed.
1)
2)

3)

Guidance values for length of thread engagement 1,25 d.


To be used only in exceptional cases. The values for b can be attained only by manual recutting of the
threads.
Bigger depths only upon agreement with the Operations Scheduling Dept.

Page 3
SN 480 : 2002-01

Thread runout / thread undercut per DIN 76-1


Thread runout
x 1 normal case
x 2 short

Thread pitch
P

Thread undercut
a 1 normal case
a 2 short
a 3 long

Nominal thread
diameter (coarse
pitch thread)
d

0,7
0,8
1
1,25
1,5
1,75
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
5,5
6

4
5
6; 7
8
10
12
14; 16
18; 20; 22
24; 27
30; 33
36; 39
42; 45
48; 52
56; 60
64; 68

Type A normal case


Type B short

Thread runout
x1
x2
max.
normal
1,75
2
2,5
3,2
3,8
4,3
5
6,3
7,5
9
10
11
12,5
14
15

short
0,9
1
1,25
1,6
1,9
2,2
2,5
3,2
3,8
4,5
5
5,5
6,3
7
7,5

a1

Clearance
a2
max.

a3

dg

Thread undercut

normal
2,1
2,4
3
3,75
4,5
5,25
6
7,5
9
10,5
12
13,5
15
16,5
18

short
1,4
1,6
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

long
3,2
4
5
6
7
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24

h13
d - 1,1
d - 1,3
d - 1,6
d-2
d - 2,3
d - 2,6
d-3
d - 3,6
d - 4,4
d-5
d - 5,7
d - 6,4
d-7
d - 7,7
d - 8,3

g1
min.
A
normal
1,5
1,7
2,1
2,7
3,2
3,9
4,5
5,6
6,7
7,7
9
10,5
11,5
12,5
14

g2
max.
B
short
0,8
0,9
1,1
1,5
1,8
2,1
2,5
3,2
3,7
4,7
5
5,5
6,5
7,5
8

Thread runout

Thread undercut

e 1 normal case
e 2 short
e 3 long

Type A normal case


Type B short

A
normal
2,45
2,8
3,5
4,4
5,2
6,1
7
8,7
10,5
12
14
16
17,5
19
21

B
short
1,75
2
2,5
3,2
3,8
4,3
5
6,3
7,5
9
10
11
12,5
14
15

0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,6
2
2,5
3,2

Other dimensions as for thread runout


Gewindesteigung

P
0,7
0,8
1
1,25
1,5
1,75
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
5,5
6

Nominal thread diameter


(coarse pitch thread)

d
4
5
6; 7
8
10
12
14; 16
18; 20; 22
24; 27
30; 33
36; 39
42; 45
48; 52
56; 60
64; 68

Thread runout
(incl. excess length of pocket
hole)
e1
e2
e3
Guidance values
normal
3,8
4,2
5,1
6,2
7,3
8,3
9,3
11,2
13,1
15,2
16,8
18,4
20,8
22,4
24

short
2,4
2,7
3,2
3,9
4,6
5,2
5,8
7
8,2
9,5
10,5
11,5
13
14
15

long
6,1
6,8
8,2
10
11,6
13,3
14,8
17,9
21
24,3
26,9
29,4
33,3
35,8
38,4

Thread undercut
dg
H13
d + 0,3

d + 0,5

g1
min.

C
normal
2,8
3,2
4
5
6
7
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24

D
short
1,75
2
2,5
3,2
3,8
4,3
5
6,3
7,5
9
10
11
12,5
14
15

g2
max.

C
normal
3,8
4,2
5,2
6,7
7,8
9,1
10,3
13
15,2
17,7
20
23
26
28
30

r
D
short
2,75
3
3,7
4,9
5,6
6,4
7,3
9,3
10,7
12,7
14
16
18,5
20
21

0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,6
2
2,5
3,2

Page 4
SN 480 : 2002-01

Thread runout / thread undercut as in DIN 76-2


Thread runout

Thread undercut

x 1 normal case
x 2 short

a 1 normal case
a 2 short
a 3 long

Thread
runout
x1
x2
max.

Threads
DIN ISO 228-1

Pitch

P
0,907
1,337
1,814
2,309

d
G 1/8A
G 1/4A
G 1/2A
G1 A

to
to
to

G 3/8
G 7/8
G6

normal
2,3
3,3
4,5
5,8

short
1,3
1,7
2,3
2,9

Type A2 normal case


Type B2 short

Clearance

Thread undercut

a1

a2
max.

a3

dg

normal
3
4
5,5
7

short
2
2,7
3,6
4,6

long
4
5,4
7,2
9,2

h13
d-2
d - 2,5
d-3
d-4

g1
min.
A2
normal
1,5
2,5
3,8
4,6

g2
max.
B2
short
0,6
1,1
2
2,3

A2
normal
3,2
4,7
6,3
8,1

Thread runout

Thread undercut

e 1 normal case
e 2 short

Type C2 normal case


Type D2 short

B2
short
2,3
3,3
4,5
5,8

0,45
0,7
0,9
1,2

Other dimensions as for thread runout


b = useful thread length
Excess length of
pocket hole
e1
e2

Threads
DIN ISO 228-1
Pitch
P
0,907
1,337
1,814
2,309

1)
2)

d
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 1/2
G1

to
to
to

G 3/8
G 7/8
G6

normal
4,5
6,5
8,5
10

short
3
4
5,5
6,5

Thread undercut
dg
H13
d + 0,5

Recommended permissible deviation from the calculated dimension t =


d a min. = 1 d
d a max. = 1,05 d

C2
normal
3,8
5,3
7,2
9,2

+0,5
0

g1
min.

D2
short
2,3
3,3
4,5
5,8

The normal case applies every time no other indications are made on the drawings.

C2
normal
4,7
6,1
8
10,1

g2
max.

r
D2
short
3,2
4,4
5,6
6,7

0,45
0,7
0,9
1,2

Page 5
SN 480 : 2002-01
Thread selection series
Metric thread as in DIN 13 (SN 152)
Core hole
Shaded background = coarse pitch thread
Through-hole
Pitch
1,25 1,5 1,75
2
2,5
3
3,5
0,5 0,7 0,75 0,8
1
M 4
4,5
3,5 3,3
M 5
5,5
4,5
4,2
M 6
6,6
5,25 5,2
5
M 8
9
7,25 7,2
7
6,8
M 10
11
9,25
9
8,75 8,5
M 12
13,5
11 10,75 10,5 10,2
(M 14)
15,5
13
12,5
12
M 16
17,5
15
14,5
14
(M 18)
20
17
16,5
16 15,5
M 20
22
19
18,5
18 17,5
(M 22)
24
21
20,5
20 19,5
M 24
26
23
22,5
22
21
(M 27)
30
25,5
25
24
M 30
33
28,5
28
26,5
(M 33)
36
31,5
31
29,5
M 36
39
34,5
34
33
(M 39)
42
37
36
M 42
45
40,5
40
39
(M 45)
48
43,5
43
42
M 48
52
46,5
46
45
(M 52)
56
50,5
50
49
M 56
62
54,5
54
53
(M 60)
66
58,5
58
57
M 64
70
62
61
(M 68)
74
66
65
M 72 x 6
78
70
69
M 80 x 6
86
78
M 90 x 6
96
88
M100 x 6
107
98
M110 x 6
117
108
M125 x 6
132
123
M140 x 6
147
138
M160 x 6
168
157
M180 x 6
188
177
M200 x 6
208
197
M220 x 6
228
217
M250 x 6
258
247
M280 x 6
288
277
Sizes in brackets are used only in special cases.
Thread
designation

UNF thread
Heavy-gauge conduit thread (Pg)
SN 452
DIN 40430
Outside Core hole
Outside Core hole
2)
Designation
Designation
dia.
dia.
dia.
dia. *)
1/4
1/4 - 28 UNF
6,35
5,5
Pg 7
12,5
11,4
3/8
3/8 - 24 UNF
9,525
8,5
Pg 9
15,2
14
1/2
1/2 - 20 UNF 12,7
11,5
Pg 11
18,6
17,5
5/8
5/8 - 18 UNF 15,875
14,5
Pg 13,5
20,4
19,1
3/4
3/4 - 16 UNF 19,05
17,5
Pg 16
22,5
21,3
7/8
7/8 - 14 UNF 22,225
20,5
Pg 21
28,3
27
1
1
- 12 UNF 25,4
23,5
Pg 29
37
35,5
1 1/8 1 1/8 - 12 UNF 28,575
26,5
Pg 36
47
45,5
1 1/4 1 1/4 - 12 UNF 31,75
29,5
Pg 42
54
52,5
1 1/2 1 1/2 - 12 UNF 38,1
36
Pg 48
59,3
58
*) defined specifically for SMS Demag purposes
Size
in
inches

1)
2)

3)

4,5

5,5

32
35
52
56
60
64
68
76
86
96
106
121
136
246
276

37,5
40,5
-

43
47
-

50,5
54,5
-

58
62
66
74
84
94
104
119
134
154
174
194
214
244
274

Seating threads for thread inserts as in DIN 8140-1


Designation
EG M 5
EG M 6
EG M 8
EG M 10
EG M 12
EG M 16
EG M 20
EG M 24
EG M 30
EG M 36

5
6
8
10
12
16
20
24
30
36

Length
L 1 3)
to
12,5
to
15
to
20
to
25
to
30
to
40
to
40
to
48
to
60
to
72

Designation of female thread; for designation of male thread, add "A" for tolerance class A (e.g. G 1A).
Add tolerance class 2A for male threads and tolerance class 2B for female threads to the designation
(e.g. 1-8 UNC-2A or 1-8 UNC 2B).
L1 = nominal length of threaded insert (calculation value).

Core hole
dia.
5,2
6,3
8,4
10,5
12,5
16,5
20,75
24,75
31
37

Page 6
SN 480 : 2002-01

Designation 2)

1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 3/4
2
2 1/4
2 1/2
2 3/4
3
3 1/2
4

- 20 UNC
- 16 UNC
- 13 UNC
- 11 UNC
- 10 UNC
- 9 UNC
- 8 UNC
- 7 UNC
- 7 UNC
- 6 UNC
- 5 UNC
- 4,5 UNC
- 4,5 UNC
- 4 UNC
- 4 UNC
- 4 UNC
- 4 UNC
- 4 UNC

NPT

- 27
- 27
- 18
- 18
- 14
- 14
- 11

SN 453
6,25
8,5
11,1
14,7
18
23,25
29,25

1 1/4

- 11

38

1 1/2

- 11

44,25

2
2 1/2
3
3 1/2
4

- 11
- 8
- 8
- 8
- 8

56,25
67
83
95,5
108

1/16
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4

1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8

d1

Thread
Nomnial size and
number of threads

Predrill cylindrical hole without


use of an expanding reamer

UNC thread
SN 451
Outside dia.

Core hole dia. *)

6,35
9,525
12,7
15,875
19,05
22,225
25,4
28,575
31,75
38,1
44,45
50,8
57,15
63,5
69,85
76,2
88,9
101,6

5,2
8
10,8
13,5
16,5
19,5
22,1
25
28,2
34
39,6
45
51,5
57
63
69,5
82,5
95

For thread depths exceeding 1,5-fold dia., the operations scheduling


dept. must be consulted.
Hole depths analogous to metric threads
*)

For footnotes see page 5

defined specifically for SMS Demag purposes

NPTF

t1

6,15
8,4
11
14,5
17,75
23
29
37,5
(37,75)
44
(43,75)
56
66,5
82,5
-

12
12
17,5
17,6
22,9
23
27,4
28,1
28,4
28,4
40,8
43
44,7
45,6

Page 7
SN 480 : 2002-01

Simplified representation in drawings

All holes with a common center must be dimensioned from the top edge of the mounting plate.
Exceptions are as follows:
Thread and core-hole depths commencing centrically or non-centrically in a centering area and holes
commencing non-centrically in a centering area. In these cases dimensioning is from the lower surface. If
the simplified representation is not clear enough, a sectional view of the situation is required.

Holes commencing
noncentrically in a
centering area.

Holes and countersinks/counterbores with a common center

Thread and
core-hole depths.

Top edge
Mounting plate = datum surface

Core hole also serving as


hydraulic bore

January 2002

Curves, diagonals, undercuts

SN 481

Overview
Dimensions in mm
Curves and diagonals on turned parts

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Table 1 for turned parts


(for manufacturing reasons, use the same sizes on one workpiece whenever possible)
r 1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8
1
1,2 1,6
2
2,5
3
4
5
6
8
10 12,5
f1
2
3
4
4,5
6
7,5 9,5 11,2 13 15 22,5 26 30
37 52
60
f2
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5 4,5
5
6
7
11
12 14
17 24
28
f 3 0,5 0,8
1
1,2 1,6
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
6
7
8
10 14
16
Chamfers of 15 have to be used with preference on shafts and holes when the installation
shaft seals, wipers, guide strips etc. is intended.

16
20
25
32
40
75
93 120 150 187
35
43
55
69
87
20
25
32
40
50
of bearings, bushes, rotary

Curves and diagonals on milled parts

to be used with preference

Table 2 for milled parts


(for manufacturing reasons, use the same sizes on one workpiece whenever possible.)
Current sizes are shown in shaded boxes.
0,16 0,25 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,6 2 2,5 3
4
5
6
8
r2
permissible
- 0,08 - 0,09 - 0,15 - 0,2 - 0,2 - 0,3 - 0,3 - 0,4 - 0,4 - 0,5 - 0,5 - 2 - 2 - 2 - 5
deviation
f4
0,8
1 1,2 2
2 2,5 3 3,5 4
6
7
8 10
0,4
0,5
If required for reasons of function, the curves r2 are stated with the permissible deviation.

10

12,5

16

20

-5

-5

- 10 - 10 - 10

14

16

20

25

25

32

Otherwise, the general tolerances as in SN 200 are applicable.

Undercuts on grooved holes


For manufacturing reasons, grooved holes must be provided with undercuts. The type of execution is selected from Figs. 1 to
3. The dimensioning of the undercut depends upon the type of key (SN 708) used; the normal case is a depth t2 of 20 mm. If a
dimension t2 of less than 20 mm is required for reasons of design, then t2 min must not be smaller than 10 mm.
Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 481 : 2002-01
Undercuts and curves on antifriction-bearing seats
(for antifriction bearings as in DIN 5418)
Important: Use type F for antifriction bearings combined with Nilos rings as in DIN 509.
Curves
Fig. 1: Housing

Fig. 2: Shaft

Fig. 3: Shaft with undercut - DIN 509, type E

rs = edge clearance on antifriction bearing


ras = groove radius on shaft
rbs = groove radius on housing
Table 3

r as / r bs
permissible
deviation
r
t 1 + 0,1
f

0,6
0,4

1
0,8

1,1
0,8

1,5
1,3

Curves of the antifriction bearings (edge clearance) rs min


2
2,1
3
4
5
6
1,8
1,9
2,3
2,5
3,5
4,5

0,2
0,6
0,2
2

7,5
5

0,5
1,6
0,3
4

2,5
0,4
5

9,5
7

12
9

15
11

1
4
0,5
7

For the designation and graphical representation of an undercut according to DIN 509 see next page.

Undercuts on shafts with constant nominal dimensions


When shafts have constant nominal dimensions but differing tolerance fields, the respective areas have to be separated by an
undercut. This undercut is then assigned to the smaller tolerance field and included in its length.

Table 4
r3

t2

f5

+ 0,1

0,6
0,6
1
1
1,6
2,5
4

0,2
0,3
0,4
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5

2
2,5
4
2,5
4
5
7

Recommended assignment to nominal diameter


at increased resistance to
at normal load
alternating stresses
> 10 18
> 18 80
> 80
> 18 50
> 50 80
> 80 125
> 125

January 2002

Undercuts
Dimensions in mm

SN 695
DIN 509 abridged and enlarged

Undercuts according to DIN 509


The dimensions stated in the tables refer to the finished part. The figures show external undercuts on turned parts.

Type E undercut for further machining

Type F undercut for further machining of

of a cylindrical surface
z = machining allowance
d 1 = diameter of workpiece

cylindrical and end faces

Designation of an undercut of type E with radius r1 = 0,6 mm and depth t1 = 0,2 mm:

Undercut DIN 509 - E 0,6 x 0,2

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Table 1
r

t1
f
g
t2
Recommended assignment to diameter d 1 1) for workpieces
+0,1
+0,2
+0,05
at increased resistance to
at normal load
0,1
0
0
0
alternating stresses
0,6
0,2
2
(1,4)
0,1
> 10 18
0,6
0,3
2,5
(2,1)
0,2
> 18 80
1
0,4
4
(3,2)
0,3
> 80
1
0,2
2,5
(1,8)
0,1
> 18 50
1,6
0,3
4
(3,1)
0,2
> 50 80
2,5
0,4
5
(4,8)
0,3
> 80 125
4
0,5
7
(6,4)
0,3
> 125
Surface quality Ra = 3,2, other qualities must be expressly stated in the designation, e.g.
Designation of an undercut of type E with radius r = 0,6 mm, depth t1 = 0,2 mm
and surface roughness Ra = 1,6:

Undercut DIN 509 - E 0,6 x 0,2 Ra 1,6


1)

The assignment to the diameter range does not apply to short projections and thin-walled parts.
When a workpiece has different diameters, it is practical, for reasons of manufacture, to use several undercuts
of the same type and size.

Depression on the counterpart

Table 2
Undercut
Size
rxt1
0,6 x 0,2
0,6 x 0,3
1 x 0,2
1 x 0,4
1,6 x 0,3
2,5 x 0,4
4 x 0,5

a
Minimum dimension
Type
E
0,8
0,6
1,6
1,2
2,6
4,0
7,0

Representation and indications of undercuts in drawings


In drawings undercuts are shown in a simplified way with their respective designations.
Example: Undercut type F
with radius r = 1 mm and a
depth t 1 = 0,2 mm

Example: Undercut type E


with radius r = 1 mm and a
depth t 1 = 0,2 mm

F
0,2
0
0,8
0
1,1
1,7
4,0

January 2002

Permissible bolt loads


SN 403

for bolts of strength category 8.8


Operating loads, pretensioning forces, tightening torques,
pretensioning units

This guideline is intended to enable rapid determination of bolt sizes of the strength category 8.81) and of the minimum space
requirement for the associated pretensioning units. The guideline does not apply to bolts with fine threads and to neckeddown bolts. In the hydraulic systems department special computer programs are available for the calculation of bolts for
pipeline flanges.

The operating loads stated in the table refer to purely axial loading and centric load introduction in the case of bolts with
metric ISO threads at a permissible temperature range from -50 C to +300 C. The calculation is based on a fatigue loading
of 40 N/mm for bolts < M 20 and of 33 N/mm for bolts M 20. The controlled tightening of the bolts using the specified
torques and pretensioning forces is an essential precondition for the durability of the bolted joints. Fine threads have
different permissible tightening torques, operating and pretensioning forces; tools for tightening by stretching, however, are
not available at SMS Demag. To avoid excess interfacial pressure under bolt head and nut and the resulting loss in tension,
washers according to SN 808 must be used. The strength categories 10.9 and 12.9 should be used only in exceptional cases.
Bolted joints which need controlled pretensioning must be specially marked in the drawing. This marking must be in the form
of a drawing sticker (F0403).

[mm]
M 6
M 8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M 20
M 24
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 72 x 6
M 80 x 6
M 90 x 6
M100 x 6
M110 x 6
M125 x 6
M140 x 6
M160 x 6

1
1,25
1,5
1,75
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
5,5
6

>6

>6

Fv [kN]

[Nm]

Fv [kN]

20,1
36,6
58
84,3
157
245
353
561
817
1121
1473
2030
2676
3463
4344
5590
7000
8560
11800
14200
18700

3
7
11
16
27
36
52
85
124
175
231
299
384
486
600
782
983
1153
1410
1749
2346

3
7
11
17
32
42
61
100
146
206
273
354
454
575
708
924
1161
1363
1666
2067
2773

3
7
11
17
33
49
71
115
168
237
314
408
583
663
817
1065
1334
1573
1926
2390
3205

3
7
11
16
32
51
73
118
173
239
315
440
586
768
972
1260
1586
1957
2477
3078
4122

3
7
11
16
32
50
72
116
170
235
310
432
574
752
952
1233
1553
1915
2534
3233
4268

52
85
124
175
231
299
384
486
599
782
983
1153
1409
1749
2346

61
100
146
206
273
354
454
575
708
924
1161
1363
1666
2067
2773

71
115
168
237
314
408
523
663
817
1065
1339
1573
1926
2391
3205

90
146
214
300
398
519
667
846
1045
1359
1708
2013
2477
3079
4122

99
157
230
315
415
576
762
991
1247
1605
2011
2469
3079
3832
5184

7
13
20
29
55
86
124
199
291
401
529
732
969
1265
1597
2069
2605
3198
4205
5352
7073

7
18
35
61
149
290
500
1004
1749
2806
4236
6791
10147
14689
20368
29492
41122
54799
80284
113326
171027

158
251
366
502
660
909
1199
1551
1946
2504
3136
3835
5018
6362
8378

Grip ratio Ik / d for up to 3 joints

For footnotes see page 2

Units available at
SMS Demag

[mm] 2

As

Units available at
SMS Demag

Stretching 3)
Pretensioning force 5)

Turning 2)
Tightening torque
M A ( = 0,125)

Tightening method
Pretensioning force 4)

Bolt size

d1

Permissible axial operating load FA [kN]


Tightening method
Turning
Stretching

Stressed cross-section

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

The permissible axial operating loads FA stated in the table take account of the fatigue strength of a
bolted joint. If these operating loads are exceeded, there is no guarantee against fatigue fracture. In this
case a recalculation of the bolted joint according to VDI 2230 is required. A computer program for this
purpose is available in the development department.

Continued on pages 2 to 7

Page 2
SN 403 : 2002-01
Minimum depths of engagement
Recommended depths of engagement for the strength categories
8.8
8.8
10.9
10.9
12.9
Thread fineness d/p
Hard aluminium alloy AlCuMg 1
Grey cast iron GG 25, GGG 40
Steel St37, C15N
Steel St50, C35N
Steel, heat-treated, Rm > 800 N/mm2

<9
1,1 x d
1,0 x d
1,0 x d
0,9 x d
0,8 x d

9
<9
1,4 x d
1,25 x d
1,25 x d
1,0 x d
0,9 x d

<9
1,4 x d
1,4 x d
1,2 x d
1,0 x d

In the usual case the necessary pretensioning of the bolted joint is performed with the tools for pretensioning by turning or
stretching, which are available in the SMS Demag workshop. In some cases these tools cannot be used due to lack of space.
Therefore it is necessary to indicate the tightening angle with pretensioning torque (MV = 0,1 MA) in addition to the necessary
pretensioning forces. These tightening angles cannot be represented in the form of a table. The tightening angles for bolts are
calculated with the following equation:
Meaning of the variables:
P
FV
E
Asch
lK
dw
a
DA
dh

= pitch of the bolt thread

= pretensioning force in kN (see table)

1
= modulus of elasticity (210 kN/mm)
= 360 F V lk 1 1 +

P
E A sch
2
= cross-section of shaft body = core section Ad3

lK

d w + dh
= length of grip

4
a

= outside diameter of head or nut contact face

2)
= 10 for plates having a radial expansion of DA 3 dw
(VDI 2230)
= outside diameter of a clamped sleeve (VDI 2230)
= hole diameter of secured components = inside diameter of replacement cylinder (VDI 2230)

Note: Further information on the pretensioning units can be obtained from the Workshop Assembly Dept.
2)

correction of the equation

1)

When other bolt materials are used, the pretensioning forces, oil pressures and tightening torques are converted with the
following factors:
For bolt material
5.6: 0,47;
10.9: 1,41;
12.9: 1,69;
A2-70: 0,71;
A2-80: 0,94.
These factors cannot be used for converting the permissible axial operating loads. Recalculation according to VDI 2230
is required.
Tightening of the bolt is accompanied by torsional and frictional moments and by friction losses occurring in addition to the
axial tensile forces due to the thread pitch and the lubrication and surface conditions. The stated pretensioning forces and
tightening torques take account of these factors for a 70 % use of the yield strength of bolt material 8.8. The effective
pretensioning force after settling is between 50 % and 60 % of the yield strength force.
The stated pretensioning forces take account of a 70 % use of the yield strength of bolt material 8.8 during tensioning. The
removal of the hydraulic pressure reduces, after manual retightening of the nut, the pretensioning force applied down to
appr. 60 % of the yield strength force due to settling taking place in the turns of the thread and on the contact surface of the
nut.

2)

3)

4)

Tightening factor A 1,4

5)

Tightening factor A 1,2


Size of the required end face

6)

Page 3
SN 403 : 2002-01

Tools available at SMS Demag for controlled pretensioning of bolts


Tightening by turning
(without gear)

Input e

Tightening
torque 1)

d1

Nm ( = 0,125)

M 6
M 8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M 20

7
18
35
61
149
290

d2

d3

M 6
M 8
M 10
M 12

15
18
24
26

20
26
33
36

63
65
66
67

M 16
M 20

35
43

43
56

125
133

Input e

Gear
Output a

Bolt
size

Tightening
torque 1)
Nm
( = 0,125)

d1

Output

M 24
M 30
M 36
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 72x6

h1
Hexagon
Hexagon
socket
bolt

d1
Output a

Tightening by turning
(with gear)

for hexagon bolt


nut
Input
Output
e
a
10
13
1/2" (12)
17
19
24
3/4" (19)
30

500
1004
1749
1749
2806
4236
6791
4236
6791
10147
14689

for hexagon socket


bolt
Input
Output
e
a
5
6
1/2" (12)
8
10
14
3/4" (19)
17

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm

Bolt
size

Washer SN 808

Opening of impact socket wrench

Bolt
size

x
l1

92
93
94
95

25

9
11,5
13,5
16

153
153

35

21
30

Hexagon
socket
bolt

Hexagon

72
77
80
83

104
108
112
117

146
163

170
175

Opening of impact socket wrench


for hexagon bolt
nut

Gear
Input
e

Output
a

Input
e

3/4"
(19)

1"
(25)

1"
(25)

3/4"
(19)

1 1/2"
(38)

1 1/2"
(38)

3/4"
(19)

Profile
toothing

for hexagon socket


bolt

Output
a
36
46
55
55
65
75
85
75
85
95
105

Input
e
36
36
36
36
50
60
60
50
50
-

Output
a
19
22
27
27
32
36
41
36
41
-

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm


Bolt
size

Output a

Washer SN 808

For footnotes see page 2

h1
Hex.
Hex.
sock.
d1
d2 d3 d4
bolt
M 24
57 62
310 360
M 30
70 78 80 325 375
M 36
88 90
340 390
M 36
88 90
350 400
M 42
100 107
405 455
174
M 48
113 125
425 475
M 56
136 140
450 500
M 48
120 125
450 500
M 56
132 140
460 510
200
M 64
145 156
468
M 72x6 158 177
475
-

h2
Hex.
Hex.
sock.
bolt
h3
200 250
215 265 66
230 280
275 325
285 335
105
305 355
320 370
365 415
375 425
146
385
395
-

x
Hex.
sock.bolt
340 390
362 412
404 454
394 444
456 506
483 533
517 567
508 558
527 577
542
557
-

Hex.
l1

l2

l3

l4

v
30
45 60 45 130 37
44
44
51
90 90 70 200
58
67
58
67
105 140 90 335
74
82

Page 4
SN 403 : 2002-01
Tightening by turning
(sockets with hydraulic cylinder and
ratchet)

Bolt
size
d1

Input e

M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48

Tightening
torque 1)
Nm
( = 0,125)
1004
1749
2806
4236

Opening
of impact
socket wrench
Input
e
1 1/2"
(38)

Output
a
46
55
65
75

Width across flats


of insert socket
Input
e
50

Output
a
22
27
32
36

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm


h 1 min.*)
Hex.
Hex.
sock.
d1
d2 d3 A B C E F G
bolt
l1 l2
M 30
70 78
180
40
130
M 36
82 90
190
50
192 88 41 32 45 120
120
M 42 100 107
192 136 60
M 48 110 125
202 134 65
*) space requirement with handle: plus 80 mm.

Max.
torque
for
insert socket
Nm

5000

Bolt
size

Output a
Washer SN 808

Tool weights:
Type LT 50 MS = 14
pertaining hydraulic unit

= 50

kg
kg

Tightening by turning
(wrench with hydraulic cylinder)

Bolt
size
d1

With reaction arm applied

Washer
SN 808

Tool weights:
Type HPR 1000 = 20 kg
Type HPR 2500 = 25 kg
pertaining hydraulic units = 71 kg

For footnotes see page 2

v
37
44
51
58

x
Hex.
Hex.
sock.
bolt
220 170
240 180
250 190
265 200

M 24
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 72
M 80

Tightening
torque 1)

Opening of
impact
socket wrench

Nm
( = 0,125)
500
1004
1749
2806
4236
6791
10147
2806
4236
6791
10147
14689
20368

Input e /
Output a
36
46
55
65
75
85
95
65
75
85
95
105
115

Bolt
size
d1
M 24
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 72
M 80

d2
63
75
87
99
112
124
138
109
122
134
147
159
172

d3
62
78
90
107
125
140
156
112
125
140
156
177
177

Width across
flats of
insert socket
Input
e
36
50
50
-

Max.
torque
for
insert socket

Output
a
19
22
27
32
36
41
32
36
41

1450
2200
3500
6800
8950
8950
6800
9700
14300

25000

Nm

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm


h1
X
Hex.
Hex.
Hex. sock.
Hex. sock.
bolt
h2 l1
l2
l3 V
bolt
25
75
33
30 55 105
25
75
40
37 62 112
30
80
48
44 74 124
40
90 320 55 222 430 51 91 141
65
58 103 153
45
95
70
67 112 162
50
80
74 124
40
90
60
51 100 150
65
58 115 165
45
95
75
67 125 175
365
300 545
50
100
80
74 135 185
55
105
85
80 145 195
60
90
88 160
-

Page 5
SN 403 : 2002-01
Tightening method
hydraulic turning

Opening of
impact
socket wrench

M 24

Nm
( = 0,125)
500

Output
a
36

M 30

1004

46

78

M 24

500

36

62

M 30

1004

46

78

M 36

1749

55

90

66 70 44

110

M 42

2806

65

107

51

117

M 48

4236

75

125 228 180 58,5

58

124

M 48

4236

75

125

M 56

6791

85

140 300 203 75

M 64

10147

95

156

=
=
=

1,45 kg
3,25 kg
4,4 kg

d1

Tool weights:
Type HSX
246 F
Type HSX
575 W
Type HSX 12100 F
Output a

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm

Tightening
torque 1)

Bolt
size

h1
d3
62

173 143 38

230 175 60

Hexagon
bolt
h2
43,75

l1

53 45

57,95

67,5

Hexagon
bolt

30

83

37

90

30

96

37

103

58

142

84 87 67

151

74

158

Washer SN 808

Tightening by turning
Bolt
size

Width across
flats of insert
socket

Max.
torque
for
insert socket

Output a

Output a

Nm

65

32

6020

75

36

9700

85

41

12750

Opening
of impact
socket wrench

Tightening
torque 1)

M 42

Nm
( = 0,125)
2806

M 48

4236

M 56

6791

M 64

10147

95

46

M 72x6

14689

105

55

d1

Input e

1 1/2

15500

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm


Bolt
size

Output a

Washer SN 808

Tool weight:
Type MSX/T155 TS = 14,1 kg

For footnotes see page 2

l1

d3

M 42

100

107

260

176

55

51

M 48

112

125

242

175

62

58

M 56

126

140

70

67

M 64

137

156

263

75

74

M 72x6

150

177

260

82

82

275

49

*) space requirement with handle: plus 60 mm.

237

180
183

Hex.
sock.
bolt

Hex.

d2

191

d1

230

h 1 min. *)
Hex.
Hex.
sock.
bolt

320
340
370

260
280
290

Page 6
SN 403 : 2002-01
Tightening by stretching
(hydraulic pretensioning tool)
Note:
Given the narrow supporting surfaces
of the hydraulic pretensioning units
as from M 80 x 6, the pretensioning
forces may cause indentations on the
component.

Unit shown:
type SKFHTS

Nut

Washer
SN 808

Pay attention to welds

Bolt size

Pretensioning force
Fv
d1
s
d2
d3
kN
M 24
158
36
45
78
M 30
251
46
55
M 36
366
55
65
102
M 42
502
65
75
M 48
660
75
90
145
M 56
909
85
100
M 64
1199
95
110
M 64
1199
95
110
M 72 x 6
1551
105
120
180
M 80 x 6 *)
1946
115
140
M 80 x 6 *)
1946
115
140
M 90 x 6 *)
2504
130
160
280
M100 x 6 *)
3136
145
175
M110 x 6 *)
3835
150
185
M125 x 6 *)
5018
180
220
364
M140 x 6 *)
6362
200
240
M160 x 6 *)
8378
230
270
*) to be used only in exceptional cases, use ITH units instead.

Tool weights:
Type 02.382
Type 02.383
Type 2.83
Type 2.135
Type 2.250
Type 3722

= 7 kg
= 15 kg
= 38 kg
= 70 kg
= 270 kg
= 480 kg

pertaining hydraulic units = 71 kg

For footnotes see page 2

Tool dimensions, space requirement in mm


d 4 6)

h1

l1

84

250

45

108

320

55

157

370

79

192

500

96

264

710

145

356

710

190

l2
64
70
97
93
121
128
133
153
158
165
215
225
233
238
295
305
320

v +10
0
50
60
80
90
100
120
130
130
150
160
160
180
200
220
250
280
320

X
300
310
395
405
470
485
500
630
645
660
870
890
910
925
970
990
1030

Page 7
SN 403 : 2002-01
Tightening by stretching
Bolt
size

Pretensioning
force

d1
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56

F v [kN]
251
366
502
660
909

Tool dimensions,
space requirement in mm
s
46
55
65
75
85

d2
55
65
75
90
100

d3
107
107
150
169
190

d4
h1
l1
95
119 60
105
125 137 80
140 145 90
168 153,5 102

+10

v 0
63
75
90
100
120

X
200
215
250
270
300

Tool weights (heads and bridges):


Type Flexitallic M30 = 3,46 kg
Type Flexitallic M36 = 3,42 kg
Type Flexitallic M42 = 6,9 kg
Type Flexitallic M48 = 8,05 kg
Type Flexitallic M56 = 10,67 kg

Pay attention to
transition areas
(radii, weld seams, etc.)

Washer SN 808

Nut
s

Tightening by stretching

Bolt
size
d1
M 80x6
M 90x6
M100x6
M110x6
M120x6
M125x6
M125x6
M140x6
M160x6

Pretensioning
force
F v [kN]
1946
2504
3136
3835
4614
5018
5018
6362
8378
Nut
s

Pay attention to
transition areas
(radii, weld seams,
etc.)

For footnotes see page 2

Washer SN 808

Tool dimensions,
space requirement in mm
s
115
130
145
155
170
180
180
200
230

+10

d2 d3 d4 h1 l1
l2 v 0 X
140
200 160 462
160 225 237 302 125 210 180 482
175
220 200 502
185
240 220 590
210 280 292 370 153 255 235 605
220
260 250 620
220
300 250 678
240 358 370 428 195 310 280 708
270
320 320 748

Tool weights:
Type ITH M 80 / M 90 / M100 x 6 = 68 kg
Type ITH M110 / M120 / M125 x 6 = 122 kg
Type ITH M125 / M140 / M160 x 6 = 224 kg

January 2002

Design instructions on fasteners


Screws and bolts, nuts, washers in conjunction
with countersinks/counterbores and/or holes

SN 351

Selection
Dimensions in mm
Plug screws
up to G2: DIN 908
above G2: SN 595

Countersinks
as in
DIN 3852-2

SN 870
Type VSTI

For plug screws as in DIN 908, SN 595, SN 870; pipe couplings as in SN 456; venting
valves as in SN 501, and screw joints as in SN 834, SN 839.

Thread dia. DIN ISO 228


d1
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 3/4
G1
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
G2
G 2 1/2
G3

d1
i

Laid down
specifically for
Pertaining sealing rings
SMS Demag
type A as per
The profile packing is
purposes
for
DIN 7603
part of the coupling
for DIN 908; SN 456; SN 501
(Perbunan or Viton) SN 595; SN 870 SN 834; SN 839
Material: Cu
d2
14
19
22
27
32
40
50
55
68
84
100

c
4
5
5
5
5
6,5
6,5
6,5
5
8
8

i
8
12
12
14
16
16
16
16
20
26
26

d2
14
19
22
27
32
40
50
55
-

l
12
17
17
19
21
22,5
22,5
22,5
-

i
8
12
12
14
16
16
16
16
-

a
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
12
17

a 1 max.
1
1,5
2
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
3
-

Minor dia. of bolt thread


(max. dim.)

Core section

Lead
P
1
1,25
1,5
1,75
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5

4,77
6,47
8,16
9,85
13,55
16,93
20,32
25,71
31,09
36,48
41,87

mm
17,9
32,8
52,3
76,2
144,1
225,2
324,3
519
759,3
1045
1377

k
4,5
5,5
7
8
10,5
13
15
19
23
26
30

n
6
8
10
12
16
20
24
30
36
42
48

d7
9,8
13,2
16,7
21
26,5
33,3
42
47,9
59,7
-

permiss.
dev.
+0,2
0

+0,3
0
-

Laid down
specifically
for SMS
Demag
purposes
t1
13
18
18
22
24
28
30
32
34
40
40

W
0,1

0,2
-

T-slots
DIN 649

DIN 186

d1
M 6
M 8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M 20
M 24
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48

b 1 min. d 4 min.
8
19
12
25
12
28
14
34
16
42
18
47
20
58
22
65
24
76
30
85
30
102

T-head bolts

Metric
ISO thread

Thread dia. DIN 13

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

d2

b = useful
thread length

for T-head bolts per DIN 186

m
16
18
21
26
30
36
43
54
66
80
88

a
7
10
12
14,5
18,5
24
28
35
42
48
56

b
19
22
26
31
36
44
52
65
80
95
105

permissible
deviation
-1
-1
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
-4
-4
-5
-5

h min.
GG
15
17
25
31
38
44
51
63
75
89
102

GG; St
c
r
15
8
0,6
17
9
0,6
21
11
0,6
25
12
0,6
30
15
0,6
34
17
0,6
39
19
0,6
48
24
1
57
28
1,6
67
32
1,6
76
36
1,6
Continued on pages 2 to 5

Page 2
SN 351 : 2002-01
Hexagon fit bolts

Studs

DIN EN ISO 4014


DIN EN ISO 4017

DIN 609
SN 550

DIN 939
SN 343

DIN EN 20273 coarse


for steel contruction

Through-hole

Minor dia. of bolt thread

DIN EN 20273 medium


for mechanical engineering

(Max. dim)

Dia. of core hole bit:

DIN 13 Part 28

DIN 336
Lead

d1

Hexagon head bolts

DIN EN ISO
4032

DIN EN ISO
4032

Core section

DIN 13
Thread dia.

Metric
ISO thread

mm

d 3 medium d 3 coarse

DIN EN ISO
4032

v min.

ds

k6

d4

v min.

v min.

M 4

0,7

3,3

3,14

7,8

4,5

4,8

2,8

4,5

11

11

4,5

M 5

0,8

4,2

4,02

12,7

5,5

5,8

3,5

6,5

6,5

14

6,5

14

6,5

M 6

4,77

17,9

6,6

7,5

10

16

7,5

10

16

M 8

1,25

6,8

6,47

32,8

10

5,3

9,5

10

13

20

10

5,3

9,5

10

13

20

9,5

M 10

1,5

8,5

8,16

52,3 11

12

6,4

11,5

12

15

23

11

13

6,4

11,5

12

15

23

11,5

M 12

1,75 10,2

9,85

76,3 13,5

14,5

7,5

14,5

15

18

27

13

15

7,5

14,5

15

18

27

14,5

M 16

14

13,55

144,1 17,5

18,5

10

19

20

24

34

17

19

10

19

20

24

34

19

M 20

2,5

17,5

16,93

225,2 22

24

12,5

23

25

29

41

21

23

12,5

23

25

29

41

23

M 24

21

20,32

324,3 26

28

15

27,5

30

34

48

25

28

15

27,5

30

34

48

27,5

M 30

3,5

26,5

25,71

519

33

35

18,7

32,5

38

42

58

32

34

19

32,5

38

42

58

32,5

M 36

32

31,09

759,3 39

42

22,5

39

45

49

66

38

40

22

39

45

49

66

39

M 42

4,5

37,5

36,48 1045

45

48

26

43

52

56

75

44

46

26

43

52

56

75

43

M 48

43

41,87 1377

52

56

30

48

60

65

86

50

54

30

48

60

65

86

48

M 56

5,5

50,5

49,25 1905

62

66

35

56

70

75

100

58

63

35

56

70

75

100

56

M 64

58

56,64 2520

70

74

40

63

80

86

110

65

70

40

63

80

86

110

63

M 72 x 6

66

64,64 3287

78

82

45

70

90

95

119

75

80

45

70

90

95

119

70

M 80 x 6

74

72,64 4144

86

91

50

76

100

106

130

82

87

50

76

100

106

130

76

M 90 x 6

84

82,64 5364

96

101

57

84

112

118

142

112

118

142

84

M100 x 6

94

92,64 6740

107

112

63

92

125

132

156

125

132

156

92

M110 x 6

104

102,64 8273

117

122

69

100

137

143

167

137

143

167

100

M125 x 6

119

117,64 10869

132

137

79

112

156

162

186

156

162

186

112

M140 x 6

134

132,64 13818

147

155

88

124

175

182

206

175

182

206

124

M160 x 6

154

152,64 18299

168

175

100

140

200

206

230

200

206

230

140

According to DIN EN ISO 4014, DIN EN ISO 4017 and DIN EN ISO 4032 hexagon bolts and nuts are standardised only up to size M 64.
For bigger thread diameters the invalid standards DIN 931 and DIN 934 must be used.

Page 3
SN 351 : 2002-01
Widths across flats

Hexagon nuts

Hexagon nuts,
self-locking

Castle nuts

for bolts and nuts as


in:

for hexagon
and socket head for bolts and
bolts, hexagon
nuts
nuts

DIN 935
Cotter pins
DIN EN ISO 4032

DIN EN ISO
7042

Washers

DIN EN ISO 1234

SN 778

Washers
for high-strength
pretensioned
bolted joints

DIN EN ISO
7089

SN 808

Thread dia.

DIN 13

DIN 609, DIN 561,


DIN 935,
DIN EN ISO 4014,
(DIN 931),
DIN EN ISO 4017,
DIN EN ISO 4032,
(DIN 934)

Lockwashers

m max.

v min.

h max.

v min.

m max. v min.

n min.

Cotter pin
xl

d2

d2

d2

d1

0,8

M 4

M 5

3,2

6,5

1,2

1 x 10

0,5

8,79

4,7

11

5,1

7,5

1,4

1 x 12

10

11,05

10

5,2

13

7,5

10

1,8 x 14 10

12

1,6

11

M 6

14,38

13

6,8

16

12

9,5

12

2,5

2,3 x 16 13

1,2

16

1,6

16

2,5

M 8

17,77

16

8,4

20

10

15

12

15

2,8

2,3 x 20 16

1,5

20

20

2,5

M 10

20,03

18

10,8

25

12

17

15

19

3,5

2,9 x 22 18

1,5

24

2,5

24

M 12

26,75

24

14,8

34

16,4

22

19

23

4,5

3,7 x 28 24

30

30

M 16

33,53

30

18

41

20,3

28

22

27

4,5

3,7 x 36 30

37

35

4,5

M 20

39,98

36

21,5

49

23,9

33

27

33

5,5

4,6 x 40 36

2,5

44

45

M 24

50,85

46

25,6

58

30

41

33

40

5,9 x 50 45

2,5

56

55

M 30

60,79

55

31

70

36

48

38

46

5,9 x 63

66

65

M 36

71,3

65

34

77

46

55

7,5 x 71

78

75

M 42

82,6

75

38

86

50

60

7,5 x 80

92

90

10

M 48

93,56

85

45

101

57

68

7,5 x 100

105

10

100

11

M 56

104,86

95

51

114

66

78

11

9,5 x 100

115

10

110

11

M 64

116,16

105

58

128

73

85

11

9,5 x 112

120

12

M 72 x 6

127,46

115

64

140

79

91

11

9,5 x 140

140

14

M 80 x 6

144,08

130

72

156

92

104

14

12,4 x 140

160

16

M 90 x 6

161,02

145

80

172

100

112

14

12,4 x 160

175

16

M100 x 6

172,32

155

88

188

185

16

M110 x 6

200,57

180

100

212

220

22

M125 x 6

220,8

200

112

236

240

22

M140 x 6

254,7

230

128

268

270

22

M160 x 6

DIN EN ISO 4032

7,66

DIN 934

DIN 931, DIN 934

DIN EN ISO 4014, DIN EN ISO 4017, DIN EN ISO 4032

e min.

The necessary washers, spring washers and locking washers must be included in the grip length.
Length of engagement at 1.25 d1.
3) Bolt length (minimum length) = grip length + projection length. This minimum length must be rounded off to the next bigger bolt length stated in the relevant
standards.
1)
2)

Page 4
SN 351 : 2002-01
Socket head bolts

Counterbores for socket head bolts


DIN 974-1

DIN EN ISO DIN EN ISO


4762,
1207
DIN 912

DIN
7984
with lockwasher as in SN 778 up
to strength grade 8.8

with lockwasher as in SN 778 up


to strength grade 8.8

DIN EN ISO 1207

dk

l g max.

dk

a max.

M 4

4,5

2,1

2,1

2,8

1,4

2,6

4,6

3,4

4,5

3,2

M 5

5,5

8,5

2,4

8,5

2,4

3,5

8,5

1,6

3,3

10

5,7

6,5 4,2

5,5

M 6

6,6

10

10

10

3,9

11

6,8

7,5 4,8

6,5

4,7

M 8

13

3,75

13

3,75

13

2,5

15

M 10

11

16

4,5

10

16

4,5

16

18

11

12,5 7,5

9,5

8,5

M 12

13,5

18

5,25

12

18

5,25

20

13

14,5 8,5 11

9,5

M 16

17,5

24

16

24

26

17,5 19

11,5 15

10,5

12

M 20

22

30

7,5

20

30

7,5

11

33

21,5 23

13,5 17,5

12,5

14

M 24

26

36

24

36

13

40

25,5 27,5 15,5 20,5

M 30

33

45

10,5

30

50

32

34

19,5 25,5

M 36

39

54

12

36

58

38

23,5 29,5

M 42

45

63

13,5

42

69

44

M 48

52

72

15

48

78

50

M 56

62

84

16,5

56

93

58

M 64

70

96

18

64

107

66

M 72 x 6

78

108

18

72

118

74

M 80 x 6

86

120

18

80

132

82

M 90 x 6

96

135

18

90

145

92

M100 x 6

107

150

18

100

160

102

M110 x 6

117

M125 x 6

132

M140 x 6

147

M160 x 6

168

DIN EN ISO 4762


DIN 912

d2

H13

10

without washer

l g max.

with washer

dk

For sizes above M 64:


DIN 912
(all sizes with
fine threads as in DIN 912)

without washer

d3

without washer

d1

DIN 13

Through hole per


DIN EN 20 273 medium

DIN 7984

Thread dia.

DIN EN ISO 4762

5,5

14,5 16,5

Short designation (d 3 / d 2 x t)

Page 5
SN 351 : 2002-01
Counterbores

Counterbores

Counterbores

DIN 974-2
for
hexagon head
screws,
hexagon nuts,
lockwashers
SN 778
and washers
DIN EN ISO 7089,
DIN EN ISO 7090,
SN 808

for
socket wrenches,
box wrenches and
striking-face box
spanners

Countersunk head
screws as in
DIN EN ISO 10642

for
eye bolts
DIN 580
and eye nuts
DIN 582

Countersinks
as in DIN 74-1
for countersunk
head screws as in
DIN EN ISO 10642
Type F

faced

= 90 +2
d2

d2

d4

10

18

11

18

13

= 90 1

k max.

d4

7,53

2,48

10

M 4

9,43

3,1

12,5

M 5

20

11,34

3,72

14,5

M 6

18

26

24

15,24

4,96

19

11

M 8

22

33

30

19,22

6,2

23,5

13

M 10

26

36

36

23,12

7,44

28

15

M 12

33

43

40

29,01

8,8

35

19

M 16

40

56

46

36,05

10,16

41,5

24

M 20

48

62

57

M 24

61

78

71

M 30

71

90

82

M 36

82

107

92

M 42

98

125

112

M 48

112

140

118

M 56

125

156

132

M 64

132

177

162

M 72 x 6

150

177

180

M 80 x 6

170

208

M 90 x 6

190

236

200

M100 x 6

200

264

M110 x 6

240

380

M125 x 6

260

380

M140 x 6

290

380

M160 x 6

H13

dk

Thread dia.

DIN 13

for wear plates

min.

H13

s min.

d1

Foundation
Dimensions in mm
Through-hole

Threaded pin

Stone bolt

T-head bolt

Adhesive anchor

SN 172

DIN 529

SN 425

SN 705

DIN 24536

Grout
and shrouder
pipe
sealing

Grout

T-head bolt

Anchor plate

Graphic symbol. Example: M 30

Stone bolt

Adhesive
anchor
Threaded
pin

Shank type A
Note:
Observe SN 559 and
other standards.

Note:
Always combined with
anchor plate or
double anchor plate

for 1000 mm
length

per 10 mm
length

M 10
M 12
M 16
M 20
M 24
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 72x6
M 80x6
M 90x6
M100x6
M110x6
M125x6
M140x6
M160x6

Weight
in kg

12

200 100

45

0,34 0,006

16

250 100

55

0,5 0,009

15

110 0,113 0,009

20

320 100

70

0,92 0,016

20

125 0,205 0,016

25

400 100

85

1,49 0,025

25

170 0,336 0,025

27

54

28

24

100

3,55 500 100 100

2,22 0,036 500

3,66 0,036 30

210 0,505 0,036

34

68

35

30

120

5,55 600 100 120

3,63 0,055 600

5,77 0,055 36

280 0,857 0,055

40

82

40

36

160

5,51 0,08

8,36 0,08

300 1,32 0,08

47

94

48

42

180

10,87 800 100 160

7,83 0,109 800 11,48 0,109 48

350 1,94 0,109

53

102

54

48

210

14,2 1000 100 180 10,65 0,142 1000 15,09 0,142 55

400 2,76 0,142

62

116

62

56

10

250

19,33 1100 100 210 15,27 0,193 1100 20,71 0,193 62

500 3,87 0,193

70

128

70

64

10

280

25,25 1300 100 250 21,09 0,253 1300 27,31 0,253 72

600 5,1

78

142

80

72

10

300

31,96 1400 100 290 27,81 0,32 1400 34,87 0,32

87

154

90

80

15

320

39,46

1600 43,36 0,395

97

170 100

90

15

360

49,94

1800 55,33 0,499

107

185 110 100

15

400

61,65

2000 69,07 0,617

118

205 120 110

15

440

74,6

2200 84,52 0,746

133

230 135 125

15

500

96,33

2500 111,2

0,963

148

255 150 140

15

560

120,8

2800 141,2

1,208

168

290 170

3200 189,1

1,578

T-head
e1

+2
0

e2

+2
0

d3 d2

+2
0

f x 30

L2

Weight in
kg / m

d1

Weight
in kg

for 500 mm
length
per 10 mm
length

For
thread
size

Bolt

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Weight
in kg

t1

t2
e

700 100 140

700

d2

42

t
-

for 100 mm
length
per 10 mm
length

Graphical
symbol 1)

0,252

The graphic symbols must always be drawn with axes of coordinates (see Figs. 1 and 2). The positions of the stone bolts or T-head
bolts. In the case of graphic symbols for T-head bolts with double anchor plates the T-head bolt clearance (k) is stated as specified in

1)

2)

The graphical symbols are standardised in DIN 24536 up to size M100 x 6. For M110 x 6 and above the symbols have been defined
specifically for SMS Demag purposes.
v-dimensions are based on washer thicknesses per SN 220 or SN 808 + 1 x nut height per ISO 4032/DIN 934 + 1 x d 1 for the
application of hydraulic pretensioning units as in SN 403.

January 2002

anchoring elements

SN 372

Dimensions in mm
Projection

Rectangular washer

Round washer

SN 220

SN 808

Nut
up to M64:
DIN EN ISO
4032

Anchor plate

Shrouder pipe

SN 227-1

DIN 2458

above M64:
DIN 934

[Double anchor plate


SN 227-2]

b1

t1

a
Graphic symbol
with T-head bolt
e.g. for M30:

Single:

di

da

b1

t1

8,4 0,012

da

di

Weight in
kg / m

Weight in
kg/unit

SN 808 SN 220

also
SN220

Weight in
kg/unit

di
as for washer
as in SN 808

2)

Weight in
kg/unit

+10

v 0

Weight in
kg/unit

Double:

25

10,5

20

2,5 0,005

30

13

24

0,008

10,8 0,017

35

17

30

0,015

14,8 0,033

40

21

35

4,5 0,026

18

50

60

50

80

10

0,28

25

45

0,04

21,5 0,11

180 20

75

7,5 114,3 109,1 2,6

7,16

60

75

60

90

15

0,55

31

55

0,08

25,6 0,223 210 25

90

11,5 114,3 109,1 2,6

7,16

80

90

70 100

20

0,94

37

65

0,129

31

0,393 240 30 110

17

8,79

0,064

139,7 134,5 2,6

90

105

80 115

25

1,49

43

75

0,209

34

0,652 270 30 120

22

139,7 134,5 2,6

100

120

90 130

30

2,28

50

90

10

0,368

38

0,977 300 35 140

30

168,3 162,5 2,9

11,8

120

135

100 145

30

2,83

58

100

11

0,52

45

1,42

330 35 150

36

168,3 162,5 2,9

11,8

130

155

110 160

35

3,93

66

110

11

0,601

51

1,98

370 40 175

50

193,7 187,9 2,9

13,6

150

170

120 180

35

4,79

74

120

12

0,751

58

2,67

410 40 190

62,5 219,1 212,7 3,2

17

160

190

130 200

40

6,52

82

140

14

1,111

64

3,44

450 40 205

74,5 219,1 212,7 3,2

17

180

220

145 220

50

9,9

93

160

16

1,672

72

4,93

500 50 235 108,5 244,5 238,1 3,2

19

200

240

160 240

50

11,8

104

175

16

1,954

80

6,82

550 50 255 129

266,6 3,2

21,3

220

265

180 260

60

17,3

114

185

16

2,094

88

8,2

600 60 285 182

323,9 317,5 3,2

25,3

250

305

205 290

70

25,5

129

220

22

4,308 100

13

660 60 315 220

323,9 317,5 3,2

25,3

280

340

230 320

80

36,1

144

240

22

4,995 112

17,5

750 80 355 366

355,6 349,2 3,2

27,8

320

395

260 350 100

54,9

164

270

22

6,24

26,5

850 80 365 466

406,4 399,2 3,6

35,8

128

273

8,79

For
thread size
d1

M 10
M 12
M 16
M 20
M 24
M 30
M 36
M 42
M 48
M 56
M 64
M 72x6
M 80x6
M 90x6
M100x6
M110x6
M125x6
M140x6
M160x6

with anchor plates are determined by dimensioning the axes of coordinates.


SN 227-2 (see Figs. 1 and 2). The graphic symbols themselves need not be drawn to scale.

Stud anchors see SN 854


Shrouder pipe sealing for T-head bolts, threaded pins and rectangular shrouder pipes
see SN 207-1 to 3
Fig. 1

Fig. 2

January 2002

Mechanical fasteners
Screws, bolts and nuts

SN 485

Selection
d

Hexagon head bolt

1)

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

DIN EN ISO 4014

Ordering example:
ISO 4014 M 20 x 80 8.8
Note:
For sizes above M 64 please refer to
DIN 931-2.

Hexagon head cap screw


DIN 931-2

DIN 931 M 80 x 6 x 300 8.8


Note:
For sizes up to M 64 please refer to
DIN EN ISO 4014.

2)
3)

d a max.
e min.
k
s
l
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
360

M4 M5
14
16
20
22
33
35
4,7 5,7
7,66 8,79
2,8 3,5
7
8

M36
84
97
39,4
60,79
22,5
55

M42 M48 M56 M64


96 108
109 121 137 153
45,6 52,6 63
71
71,3 82,6 93,56 104,86
26
30
35
40
65
75
85
95

Weight (7,85 kg/dm) in kg per 1000 pieces


3,12
3,61
4,04
4,53

4,86
5,64 8,06
6,42 9,13
7,2 10,2
7,98 11,3
8,76 12,3
13,4
14,4

20,3
22,2
24,2
25,8
27,8
29,8
31,8
35,7

38
41,1
43,8
46,9
50
53,1
59,3
65,5
71,7

58,1
62,6
67
70,3
74,7
83,6
92,4
101
109
118

3)

d a max.
e min.
k
s
l

131
139
155
171
186
202
218
230
246
262
278

255
279
303
327
351
374
398
422
446
494
544

125 mm

2)

200 mm

M 72 x 6
156
169
79
116,16
45
105

2)

For lengths in shaded area refer to


ISO 4017

1)

For lengths
l
For lengths 125 mm < l
3)
For lengths
l

d
b

Dimensions in mm
M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30
18
22
26
30
38
46
54
66
24
28
32
36
44
52
60
72
37
41
45
49
57
65
73
85
6,8 9,2 11,2 13,7 17,7 22,4 26,4 33,4
11,05 14,38 17,77 20,03 26,75 33,53 39,98 50,85
4
5,3 6,4 7,5 10 12,5 15 18,7
10
13
16
18
24
30
36
46

M 80 x 6
172
185
87
127,46
50
115

M 90 x 6
192
205
97
144,08
57
130

428
464
500
535
560
595
630
665
735
805
870
935

823
880
920
975
1030
1085
1200
1310
1420
1530
1640
1750
1860

> 200 mm

M 100 x 6
225
107
161,02
63
145

M 110 x 6
245
117
172,32
69
155

1470
1550
1630
1790
1950
2110
2270
2430
2590
2750
2910
3070
3230

2310
2520
2740
2960
3180
3400
3520
3640
3860
4080
4300

M 125 x 6
275
132
200,57
79
180

3440
3720
4010
4290
4570
4850
5130
5410
5690
5970

5660
6030
6410
6800
7190
7580
7970
8350

8600
9100
9600
10100
10600
11100

M 140 x 6 M 160 x 6
305
345
147
167
220,8
254,7
88
100
200
230

Weight (7,85 kg/dm) in kg per 1000 pieces

200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
360
380
400
420
440
460
480
500

9,36
9,9
10,5
11,1
11,7
12,4
13
13,7
14,3
15
15,6

2)
3)

12,6
13,3
14,1
14,9
15,6
16,4
17,2
18
18,8
19,6
20,4
21,2
22

17,6
18,5
19,5
20,5
21,5
22,5
23,5
24,5
25,5
26,5
27,5
28,5
29,5
30,5

24,2
25,3
26,5
27,7
28,9
30,1
31,3
32,5
33,8
35
36,2
37,4
38,6

31
32,5
34
35,4
36,8
38,2
39,6
41
42,5
44
45,5
47

45,8
47,7
49,6
51,5
53,5
55,4
57,3
59,2
61,1
63

61,7
64
66,4
68,8
71,2
73,6
76
78,4
80,8

92,1
95,3
98,4
101,5
104,7
107,9
111,1

For lengths 125 mm < l 200 mm


For lengths
l > 200 mm
Continued on pages 2 to 7

Page 2
SN 485 : 2002-01
Hexagon head screw
with coarse-pitch thread
DIN EN ISO 4017

M4

M5

2,1
2,41
2,8
3,19
3,75
3,96

3,37 5,11
3,87 5,8
4,49 6,65
5,11 7,51
5,73 8,37
6,35 9,23
6,99 10,1
7,59 11

55
60
65
70

Note:
Fine-pitch threads only according to
DIN EN ISO 8676. Table values acc.
to DIN EN ISO 4017 do not match for
fine-pitch threads.

Hexagon socket countersunk


head screws
DIN EN ISO 10642

The following applies to screws


over - - - : b = l l g max.
The following applies to screws
below - - - : l g max. = l b
Ordering example:
ISO 10642 M 12 x 40 8.8

M8

a max. 2,1 2,4


3
4
d a max. 4,7 5,7 6,8 9,2
e min. 7,66 8,79 11,05 14,38
k
2,8 3,5
4
5,3
s
7
8
10
13
l
12
1,8 2,87 4,42
16
20
25
30
35
40
45
50

Ordering example:
ISO 4017 M12 x 30 8.8

M6

80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
180
200
d
P
b

11,9
12,7

M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56 M64
4,5
11,2
17,77
6,4
16

5,3
6
7,5
9
10,5 12 13,5 15 16,5 18
13,7 17,7 22,4 26,4 33,4 39,4 45,6 52,6 63
71
20,03 26,75 33,53 39,98 50,85 60,79 71,3 82,6 93,56 104,86
7,5
10 12,5 15 18,7 22,5 26
30
35
40
18
24
30
36
46
55
65
75
85
95

Weight (7,85 kg/dm 3) in kg per 1000 pieces

11,1
12,3
13,9
15,5
17,1
18,7
20,3
21,8

21,2
23,7
26,2
28,7
31,2
33,7
36,2

34,1
37,7 76,9
41,3 83,5
44,9 90,2 155
48,5 97,1 165
52 103 176

274

23,4
25
26,6
28,2

38,7
41,3
43,8
46,3

55,6
58,2
62,8
66,4

110
117
123
130

186
196
207
217

289
304
319
334

31,4 51,3 73,6 144


56,3 80,8 157
61,3 88 170
95,2 184
102 197
210
For lengths in the shaded area
224
refer to ISO 4014
237

238
258
279
300
320
340
361
381

363
393
423
453
483
513
543
572

(SMS Demag determination)

M4
0,7
20
8,96
2,48
4,58
2,5

M5
0,8
22
11,2
3,1
5,5
3

M6
1
24
13,44
3,72
6,72
4

543
566
590

910

637
685
732
779
827
874
921
969
1010
1110
1210

990
1060
1140
1200
1260
1330
1400
1470
1540
1680
1810

1460
1550
1650
1740
1840
1930
2020
2120
2210
2400
2590

2320
2450
2570
2690
2820
2940
3060
3310
3560

3410
3580
3750
3920
4080
4250
4590
4920

4900
5120
5340
5560
5780
6230
6670

M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
1,25
1,5
1,75
2
2,5
28
32
36
44
52
d k max.
17,92
22,4
26,88
33,6
40,32
k max.
4,96
6,2
7,44
8,8
10,16
l g max. *)
8,71
10,7
12,69
14,8
17,66
s
5
6
8
10
12
a
90 to 92
l
Weight (7,85 kg/dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
8
0,92
1,6
2,35
10
1,07
1,85
2,7
5,47
12
1,23
2,1
3,05
6,1
10,1
16
1,53
2,59
3,76
7,35
12,1
20
1,84
3,09
4,46
8,6
14,1
21,2
25
2,23
3,71
5,34
10,2
16,6
24,8
30
2,9
4,33
6,22
11,7
19,1
28,5
51,8
35
3,4
5,43
7,1
13,3
21,6
32,1
58,4
91,4
40
3,9
6,2
8,83
14,8
24,1
35,7
65,1
102
45
7
9,9
17,3
27,1
39,3
71,7
112
50
7,74
11
19,9
30,1
43
78,4
123
55
12,1
22,3
32,9
48,5
85
133
60
13,2
24,8
35,7
54
91,7
143
65
27,3
38,5
59,5
98,4
153
70
29,8
41,2
62,9
111
164
80
32,3
44
67,4
127
200
90
46,8
71,9
143
226
100
49,6
76,4
159
253
*) Lengths indicated above the dashed stepped line have threads up to the screw head within a distance of 3P.
This leads to the equation l g max. = k max. + 3P

Page 3
SN 485 : 2002-01
d
Hexagon fitting bolt
with long threaded portion
DIN 609

DIN 609 M 12 x 50 8.8

Hexagon head screw with full dog


point and small hexagon
DIN 561

Material acc. to DIN ISO 898-5


DIN 561 - M 16 x 70 - 14H

1)

2)
3)

d s k6
e min.
k
s max.
l
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200

M8
14,5
16,5
21,5
9
14,38
5,3
13

M10
17,5
19,5
24,5
11
17,77
6,4
16

22
24,5
27
29,5
32
34,5
37
39,5
42
44,5

35,5
39,2
42,9
46,7
49,9
53,6
57,4
61,1
64,8
68,6
76
83,5

1)
2)
3)

d
a 1 max.
d a max.
dp
e min.
k
s max.
z 2 min.
l

M6
3
6,8
4
8,79
5
8
3

12
16
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300

4,26
4,95
5,65
6,53
7,38

M12
20,5
22,5
27,5
13
19,85
7,5
18

M16
M20
M24
M30
25
28,5
27
30,5
36,5
43
32
35,5
41,5
48
17
21
25
32
26,17
32,95
39,55
50,85
10
12,5
15
19
24
30
36
46
Weight (7,85 kg/dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

48,6
53,8
59
64,2
68,7
73,9
79,2
84,4
89,6
94,8
105
115
126
136

104
112
121
130
139
148
157
166
175
193
211
228
246
264
282
300

195
203
215
229
242
256
269
283
310
338
365
392
419
446
474

310
339
358
378
397
416
455
493
532
570
609
647
686

For lengths
l 50 mm
For lengths 50 mm < l 150 mm
For lengths
l > 150 mm

M8
3,75
9,2
5,5
11,05
6
10
4

8,66
9,94
11,4
13
14,6
16,1

M10
4,5
11,2
7
14,38
7
13
5

17
19,5
22
24,4
26,9
29,4
31,9

630
661
693
724
787
850
914
977
1050
1110
1170
1230
1290
1350
1420
1480

M36
49
54
38
60,79
22
55

M42
56
61
44
71,3
26
65

M48
63
68
50
82,6
30
75

1020
1070
1110
1200
1290
1380
1470
1560
1650
1740
1810
1900
1990
2080
2170

1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
2320
2440
2540
2660
2780
2900
3020

2410
2570
2720
2870
3020
3180
3330
3470
3630
3780
3940
4090

M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
5,25
6
7,5
9
10,5
12
13,7
17,7
22,4
26,4
33,4
39,4
8,5
12
15
18
23
28
17,77 19,92 26,75 33,53 39,98 51,28
9
11
14
17
21
25
16
18
24
30
36
46
6
8
10
12
15
18
Weight (7,85 kg/dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

34,1
37,7
41,2
44,8
48,4
52
59,2
66,4

62,6
69,1
75,7
82,3
88,9
102
115
128
142

132
143
154
176
198
220
242
264

233
249
281
313
345
377
409
473

446
493
540
587
634
727
821
914

876
944
1010
1150
1280
1420
1560
1690

M42
13,5
45,6
32
61,31
30
55
21

1320
1410
1510
1700
1890
2080
2270
2460
2650
2840
3030

M48
15
52,6
38
72,61
34
65
24

M56
16,5
63
45
83,91
40
75
28

2040
2160
2410
2660
2910
3160
3410
3660
3910
4160
4410
4660

3120
3450
3780
4110
4440
4770
5100
5430
5760
6090
6420

Page 4
SN 485 : 2002-01
Hexagon socket head bolt
with coarse-pitch thread

d
b

M4 M5 M6 M8
20
22
24
28
4,7 5,7 6,8 9,2
7
8,5 10
13
4
5
6
8
2,1 2,4 3
3,75
3
4
5
6

M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36


32 36
44
52
60 72
84
11,2 13,7 17,7 22,4 26,4 33,4 39,4
16 18
24
30
36 45
54
10 12
16
20
24 30
36
4,5 5,25 6
7,5 9 10,5 12
8 10
14
17
19 22
27
Weight (7,85 kg/dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

M42
96
45,6
63
42
13,5
32

M48
108
52,6
72
48
15
36

M56
124
63
84
56
16,5
41

M64
140
71
96
64
18
46

d a max.
d k max.
DIN EN ISO 4762
k max.
l g max. *)
s
l
12
1,95 2,95 5,07 10,9
16
2,25 3,45 5,75 12,1 20,9
20
2,65 4,01 6,53 13,4 22,9 32,1
25
3,15 4,78 7,59 15
25,4 35,7 71,3
30
3,65 5,55 8,3 16,9 27,9 39,3 77,8 128
35
4,15 6,32 9,91 18,9 30,4 42,9 84,4 139
40
4,65 7,09 11
20,9 32,9 46,5 91 150 270
45
7,86 12,1 22,9 36,1 50,1 97,6 161 285 500
50
8,63 13,2 24,9 39,3 54,5 106 172 300 527
55
14,3 26,9 42,5 58,9 114 183 316 554 870
60
15,4 28,9 45,7 63,4 122 194 330 581 910 1370
65
31
48,9 67,8 130
205 345 608 950 1420
70
33
52,1
71,3
138
216 363 635 990 1470 2040
The following applies to screws
over - - - : b = l l g max.
80
37
58,5 80,2 154 241 399 690 1070 1580 2180 3340
90
64,9 89,1 170 266 435 745 1150 1680 2320 3530 5220
The following applies to screws
100
71,2 98 186 291 471 800 1230 1790 2460 3720 5470
below - - - : l g max. = l b
110
107 202 316 507 855 1310 1890 2600 3920 5730
120
116 218 341 543 910 1390 2000 2740 4110 5980
130
234 366 579 965 1470 2100 2880 4300 6230
140
250 391 615 1020 1550 2210 3020 4490 6490
Ordering example:
150
266 416 651 1080 1630 2320 3160 4680 6740
ISO 4762 M 12 x 50 - 8.8
160
282 441 687 1130 1710 2420 3300 4880 6900
180
491 759 1240 1870 2640 3590 5270 7250
200
541 831 1350 2030 2860 3870 5650 7750
220
903 1460 2190 3080 4150 6040 8250
Note:
240
975 1570 2250 3300 4430 6420 8750
Both in case of the hexagon socket
260
1680 2410 3520 4710 6810 9260
head bolts with fine-pitch threads and
280
1790 2570 3740 4990 7200 9760
those with coarse-pitch threads
1900 2730 3960 5270 7580 10300
above M 64 reference must be made 300
to DIN 912.
*) Lengths indicated above the dashed stepped line in bolt type have threads up to the screw head within a
distance of 3P. This leads to the equation l g max. = 3P
Hexagon socket head bolt
with low head
DIN 7984

The following applies to screws


over - - - : l g max. = 3 P
The following applies to screws
below - - - : l g max. = l b
DIN 7984 M 12 x 60 - 8.8

d
b 2)
dk
da

max.

k
l g max.
s
l
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100

M4
14
7
4,7
2,8
2,1
2,5

M5
16
8,5
5,7
3,5
2,4
3

0,96
1,12
1,28
1,44
1,76
2,15
2,64

2,26
2,5
2,74
3,22
3,77
4,54
5,31

2)

M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
18
22
26
30
38
10
13
16
18
24
6,8
9,2
11,2
13,7
17,7
4
5
6
7
9
3
3,75
4,5
5,25
6
4
5
7
8
12
Weight (7,85 kg/dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

3,59
3,94
4,64
5,34
6,45
7,56
8,67
9,78

For lengths l 125 mm

8,05
9,25
10,5
12
14
16
18
20
22
26

14,4
16,4
19
21,6
24,7
27,8
30,9
34
40,2
46,4

24,1
27,7
31,3
34,9
39,3
43,7
48,1
56,9
65,8
74,7

62,1
68,8
75,5
82,2
89,6
104
119
134

M20
46
30
22,4
11
7,5
14

M24
54
36
26,4
13
9
17

130
140
150
172
197
222
247
272

223
253
288
324
359
395

Page 5
SN 485 : 2002-01
Hexagon socket pipe plug
DIN 906

t
b
DIN 906 R 1/2 St

R 1/8

t min.

R 1/4

R 3/8

R 1/2

R 3/4

10
7

R1

R 1 1/4

R 1 1/2

18

20

22

24

12

10

12

17
6

11,5

SMS Demag manufacturing instruction:


When a plug screw with tapered thread, e.g. R , must be flush with the surface after insertion in a cylindrical hole,
e.g. G or Rp , the first turns of the female thread must be removed.
d
G 1/8
G 1/4
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 3/4
G1
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
Counterbore
2
3
4
5
6
depth
If possible this counterbore depth must be specified in the drawing and taken into account during assembly.
Weight
3,38
7
12,2
19
40,2
57,5
135
214
kg/1000 pcs.

Hexagon socket plug


with parallel thread

G 1/8 A

SN 869

t min.

G 1/4 A

G 3/8 A

G 1/2 A

G 3/4 A

10
7

G1A
12

10

12

17

G 1 1/4A

G 1 1/2A

G2A

18

20

22

22

24

32

11,5

13

Use only for closing holes without pressure.


SN 869 G1A St

Plug screw with collar,


hexagon socket and
parallel thread
(metric and inch threads)
up to G 2 A or M64
DIN 908
above G 2 A
SN 595

DIN 908 G 1 A St,


DIN 908 M30 x 2 St
SN 595 G 3 A St

Weight
kg/1000 pcs.

3,38

12,2

19

40

57,5

135

214

350

d1
DIN 908
SN 595
Sizes in
G1/8A G1/4A G3/8A G1/2A G3/4A G1A G1 1/4A G1 1/2A G2A G2 1/2A G3A
inches
c + 0,5
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
5
8
8
d 2 h14
14
18
22
26
32
39
49
55
68
84
100
i 0,2
8
12
12
14
16
16
16
16
20
26
26
11
15
15
18
20
21
21
21
25
34
34
l
s D12
5
6
8
10
12
17
22
24
32
30
30
t min.
5
7
7,5
7,5
9
9
10,5
10,5
14
20
20
Weight
6,34
14,6
21,4
40,8
73,5
111
187
246
445
1110
1530
kg/1000 pcs
Pertaining sealing rings of type A as per DIN 7603
Material: Cu
Inside dia.
10
14
17
21
27
33
42
48
60
75
90
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
outside dia. 13,5
18
21
26
32
39
49
55
68
84
100
M10x1 M12x1,5 M16x1,5 M20x1,5 M24x1,5 M30x1,5 M36x1,5 M42x1,5 M48x1,5
d1
Metric
M30x2 M36x2 M42x2 M48x2 M56x2 M64x2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
c + 0,5
14
17
21
25
29
36
42
49
55
64
72
d 2 h14
8
12
12
14
14
16
16
16
16
20
20
i 0,2
11
15
15
18
18
20
21
21
21
25
25
l
5
6
8
10
12
17
19
22
24
32
32
s D12
5
7
7,5
7,5
7,5
9
10,5
10,5
10,5
14
14
t min.
Weight
6,34
11,3
19
37,5
53,5
84
134
187
246
386
530
kg/1000 pcs
Pertaining sealing rings of type A as per DIN 7603
Material: Cu
Inside dia.
10
12
17
21
25
32
38
44
50
58
65
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
outside dia. 13,5
16
21
26
30
38
44
51
57
66
74

Page 6
SN 485 : 2002-01
1/8

1/4

3/8

1/2

3/4

G 1/8 A

G 1/4 A

G 3/8 A

G 1/2 A

G 3/4 A

G1A

d2

14

19

22

27

32

40

12

14

12

17

19

21

10

12

17

22

24

Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.

20

25

51

79

130

198

263

M12

M16

M20

Hexagon nut with


coarse-pitch thread
DIN EN ISO 4032
or
Hexagon nut
with fine-pitch thread
DIN EN ISO 8673

ISO 4032

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M8 x 1

M10 x 1

e min.

7,66

8,79

11,05

14,38

17,77

3,2

4,7

10

0,81

1,23

2,5

24

M30

M24 x 2

M12 x 1,5 M16 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5


20,03
10,8

14,8

18

18

24

30

5,2

11,6

17,3

33,3

64,4

M36

M42

M48

M56

M64

M30 x 2

M36 x 3

M42 x 3

M48 x 3

M56 x 4

M64 x 4

50,85

60,79

71,3

82,6

93,56

25,6

31

34

38

45

51

36

46

55

65

75

85

95

977

1420

1980

e min.
m
s
Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.
d
d e max.
e min.
m
n min.
s
w max.
Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.
Pert. cotter pin
ISO 1234
d
d e max.
e min.
m
n min.
s

32,95

16

13

8,4

26,75

21,5

DIN 935 M 30 8

22,5

39,55

Hexagon nut
DIN 934 (coarse-pitch thread)

DIN 935-1

55

m
s
Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.

Castle nut with


coarse or fine-pitch thread

6,8

50

e min.
Ordering examples:
ISO 4032 M 30 8
ISO 8673 M 30 x 2 8

DIN 934 M 90 x 6 8

5,2

G 1 1/4 A G 1 1/2 A

16

ISO 8673

s
Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.
ISO 4032
d
ISO 8673

1 1/2

104,86

Use DIN 934 for size


M 64 and above

SN 870 VSTI 1 - ED - St

1 1/4

110

223

393

652

Please use ISO 4032 for sizes up


to M64.

Plug screw
SN 870

M 72 x 6

M 80 x 6

M 90 x 6

116,16

127,46

144,08

161,02

172,32

200,58

220,8

58

64

72

80

88

100

112

105

115

130

145

155

180

200

2670

3440

4930

6820

8200

13000

17500

M100 x 6 M110 x 6 M125 x 6 M140 x 6

M4
7,66
5
1,2
7
3,2

M5
8,79
6
1,4
8
4

M6
11,05
7,5
2
10
5

M8
14,38
9,5
2,5
13
6,5

M10
17,77
12
2,8
16
8

M12
16
20,03
15
3,5
18
10

M16
22
26,75
19
4,5
24
13

M20
28
32,95
22
4,5
30
16

M24
34
39,55
27
5,5
36
19

M30
42
50,85
33
7
46
24

1,12

2,3

3,16

7,35

15,8

20

38,9

75,2

131

264

1 x 10 1,2 x 12 1,6 x 14 2 x 16 2,5 x 20 3,2 x 22 4 x 28


M72x6
95

M42
58

M48
65

M56
75

60,79
38
7
55

71,3
46
9
65

82,6
50
9
75

93,56
57
9
85

38

45

51

58

64

72

80

1060

1500

2150

2900

3700

5450

7600

104,86 116,16
66
73
11
11
95
105

M80x6
105

5 x 40 6,3 x 50

M36
50

w max.
29
34
Weight
447
710
kg / 1000 pcs.
Pert. cotter pin
6,3 x 63 8 x 71
ISO 1234

M64
85

4 x 36

M90x6 M100x6
120
130

127,46 144,08 161,02


79
92
100
11
14
14
115
130
145

8 x 80 8 x 100 10 x 100 10 x 112 10 x 140 13 x 140 13 x 160

Page 7
SN 485 : 2002-01
Hexagon nut with
clamping section

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

M 30

M36

DIN EN ISO 7042

e min.

8,79

11,05

14,38

17,77

20,03

26,75

32,95

39,55

50,85

60,79

h max.

5,1

10

12

16,4

20,3

23,9

30

36

s max.

10

13

16

18

24

30

36

46

55

Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.

1,23

2,5

5,2

11,6

17,3

33,3

64,4

110

223

393

d1

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

Ordering example:
ISO 7042 M 30 8

Wing nut,
round wing shape
DIN 315

DIN 315 M 10 St

Hexagon cap nut,


low shape and
coarse-pitch thread (series 1)
DIN 917

d2

max.

11

13

16

20

23

29

35

44

max.

4,6

6,5

10

12

14

17

21

25

max.

20

26

33

39

51

65

73

90

110

h max.

10,5

13

17

20

25

33,5

37,5

46,5

56,5

Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.

17

35

60

90

180

260

d
Acc. to series 1

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

M30

M 36

M 42

M 48

t min.

9,21

10,65

13,15

16,65

20,58

23,58

27,58

35,5

41,5

47,5

g 2 max. *)
Acc. to series 1

6,4

7,3

9,3

10,7

12,7

14

16

18,5

h max.

12

14

16

20

25

30

34

44

52

58

s max.

13

16

18

24

30

36

46

55

65

75

e min.

14,38

17,77

20,03

26,75

32,95

39,55

50,85

60,79

72,02

82,60

Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.

9,5

19,3

25,5

48,1

94,1

165

310

577

958

1410

DIN 917 M 30 8
*)

> M10 thread undercut g 2

max. (type

D, short) acc. to DIN 76-1

January 2002

Mechanical fasteners
Setscrews, pins, studs, other screws/bolts

SN 486

Selection

DIN EN ISO 1207

d
a max.

M6

M8

M10

1,4

1,6

2,5

6,8

9,2

11,2

da

max.

4,7

5,7

dk

max.

8,5

2,6

3,3

k max.
l

Ordering example:
ISO 1207 M10 x 20 4.8

2,55

3,92

7,85

12

1,63

2,8

4,27

8,49

14,6

16

1,95

3,3

4,98

9,77

16,6

20

2,25

3,78

5,69

11

18,6

25

2,64

4,4

6,56

12,6

21,1

30

3,02

5,02

7,45

14,2

23,6

35

3,41

5,62

8,25

15,8

26,1

40

3,8

6,25

17,4

28,6

45

6,88

10

18,9

31,1

50

7,5

10,9

20,6

33,6

9,2

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

0,6

0,8

1,2

1,6

t min.

1,12

1,28

1,6

2,4

2,8

0,4

0,5

1,5

2,5

dt

max.

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3 ) in kg per 1000 pieces

0,36

0,51

0,77

1,04

10

0,66

1,02

1,44

2,65

12

0,82

1,27

1,84

3,25

4,6

16

1,12

1,76

2,64

4,45

6,6

9,5

20

1,42

2,25

3,44

5,65

8,6

11,8

2,88

4,44

7,15

11,1

14,7

5,44

8,65

13,6

17,6

16,1

20,4

25
30

Hexagon socket setscrew


with cone point

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

2,5

2,5

3,5

1,5

2,5

t min.
dt

10,2

max.

M20

M24

10

12

10

12

15

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3 ) in kg per 1000 pieces

12

0,79

1,21

1,74

2,98

4,42

16

1,09

1,69

2,44

4,24

6,42

8,9

20

1,39

2,17

3,14

5,5

8,4

11,7

20,1

2,77

4,02

7,09

10,8

15,3

26,6

40,7

8,68

25
30

4,9

35

5,78

40
DIN 914 M 12 x 40 45H

16

1,47

35

DIN 914

13

Weight (7,85 kg/dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

Ordering example:
ISO 7434 M 10 x 30 14H

3,9

10

Slotted setscrew
with cone point
DIN EN 27434

10

13,3

18,9

33,2

51

68,7

10,3

15,8

22,5

39,7

61,3

83,2

11,9

18,3

26,1

46,3

71,6

98,2

45

81,9

113

50

92,2

128

Continued on pages 2 to 6

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Slotted cheese head screws

Dimensions in mm
M4
M5

Page 2
SN 486 : 2002-01
d

Hexagon socket setscrew


with dog point

dp

M4

max.

DIN 915

t min.
short full
dog point
long full
dog point

z min.

M5

M6

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

2,5

3,5

5,5

8,5

12

15

18

2,5

10

12

2,5

3,5

10

12

15

1,25

1,5

2,5

2,5

10

12

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3 ) in kg per 1000 pieces

12

0,742

1,19

1,63

2,68

16

1,04

1,67

2,34

3,94

6,05

20

1,34

2,15

3,04

5,2

8,02

2,75

3,92

6,79

10,5

14,6

25,1

30

4,8

8,38

13

18,2

31,9

45,5

35

5,68

9,97

15,5

21,8

38,2

55,8

78,4

18

25,4

44,9

66,1

93,4

25

40
DIN 915 M12 x 40 45H

M8

11,6

11

50

86,7

123

60
M6

Stud
DIN 939

153

b1

7,5

M8

M10

M16

M20

M24

M30

M36

M30x2
-

M36x3
-

M42

M48

M42x3 M48x3
-

10

12

15

20

25

30

38

45

52

60

18

22

26

30

38

46

54

66

78

90

102

24

28

32

36

44

52

60

72

84

96

108

45

49

57

65

73

85

97

109

121

x1

2,5

3,2

3,8

4,3

6,3

7,5

10

11

x2

1,25

1,6

1,9

2,2

2,5

3,2

3,8

4,5

4)

b2

1)
2)
3)

u (incomplete thread): max. 1,5 P

M12

M8x1 M10x1,25 M12x1,25 M16x1,5 M20x1,5 M24x2


M12x1,5
-

5,5

12,5
6,3

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

50

11,4

21

33,3

49,9

55

12,5

22,9

36,4

54,3

103

60

13,6

24,9

39,5

58,8

111

180

65

26,9

42,6

63,2

119

192

70

28,9

45,7

67,6

126

205

305

75

30,8

48,8

72,1

134

217

323

80

32,8

51,8

76,5

142

229

341

58

85,4

158

254

376

619

64,2

94,3

174

279

412

674

1011

90
100

94,9

110

103

190

303

447

730

1091

120

112

205

328

483

785

1171

1647

DIN 939 M12 x 80 8.8


(only coarse-pitch thread)

130

221

353

518

841

1251

1756

2364

140

237

377

554

896

1331

1865

2506

or

150

253

402

589

952

1411

1973

2648

160

269

427

625

1007

1490

2082

2790

DIN 939 M12Fo 5) x 80 8.8


Fo = male thread without force fit
or
DIN 939 M12 M12 x 1,25 x 80 8.8
(coarse and fine-pitch threads)

170

451

660

1062

1570

2191

2932

180

1)

For lengths

l 125 mm

476

696

1118

1650

2300

3074

190

2)

For lengths 125 mm < l 200 mm

501

731

1173

1730

2408

3216

200

3)

For lengths 200 mm < l

525

767

1229

1810

2517

3358

220

4)

at 10.9: b1 = 1,5 x d

1340

1970

2735

3642

240

5)

Drawing indication: secure with Loctite 242 acc. to SN 507

1450

2130

2952

3927

Page 3
SN 486 : 2002-01
d

T-head bolt
with square neck

l g max.

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

10

13

16

19

Masonry / foundation bolt


DIN 529, type A

M36

M42

M48

25

31

37

43

55

54

72

4,5

5,5

10,5

13

15

19

23

26

30

10

12

16

20

24

30

36

42

48

16

18

21

26

30

36

43

54

66

80

88

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

50

14,3

24,2

40,6

62,3

117

60

16,5

28,2

46,8

71,1

130

220

70

32,2

53

78,9

145

240

377

80

36,2

59,2

88,7

161

262

407

90

65,4

97,6

177

287

437

727

100

71,6

106

193

302

467

773

124

225

351

538

874

1380

140

257

401

618

985

1530

2220

160

289

450

689

1090

1690

2420

3300

M20
2,5
65

M24
3
80

M30
3,5
100

M36
4
120

M42
4,5
140

M48
5
160

M56
5,5
185

120

d1
P
a max.
+2 P

DIN 529 AM 20 x 500 5.6

M30

DIN 186 BM 20 x 100 5.6


Type B with long thread

M24

DIN 186

DIN 186 AM 20 x 100 5.6


Type A with shank

M20

b 0
c max.
l
160
200
250
320
400
500
630
800
1000

M8
1,25
25

M10
1,5
32

M12
1,75
40

M16
2
55

20

25

30

40

50

60

75

90

105

120

140

55

55

70

90

110

130

160

190

230

260

290

1277
1517
1802

2135
2525

8
9,5

13,8
16,3
19,4

20,5
24,1
28,5
34,7

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 100 pieces


39,2
45,4
76
53,5
88
136
64,5 106
160
270
77,2 126
189
314
477
93
150
225
370
557
798
182
270
441
660
939
224
331
536
796
1124
401
648
955
1344

Selection of bolt materials and possible treatments for surface refinement


Bolt material as in DIN EN ISO 898-1
3.6
4.6
4.8
5.6
5.8
8.8
10.9
12.9
14H
22H

Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm
Rm

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

300 N/mm 2,
2
400 N/mm ,
2
400 N/mm ,
500 N/mm 2,
500 N/mm 2,
2
800 N/mm ,
1000 N/mm 2,
2
1200 N/mm ,

R eL
R eL
R eL
R eL
R eL
R p0,2
R p0,2
R p0,2

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

180 N/mm2
2
240 N/mm
2
320 N/mm
300 N/mm2
400 N/mm2
2
640 N/mm
900 N/mm2
2
1080 N/mm

see DIN EN ISO 898-5

Surface refinement as in DIN EN ISO 4042


A2E
tZn

zinc coat applied by electroplating (A), layer thickness 5 m (2), degree of lustre: bright, no colour (E).
zinc coat applied by hot galvanizing, layer thickness 40 m.

SMS Demag determination


OV5

Surface refinement, layer thickness min. 5 m, but not above permissible thread tolerance on the basis of
zinc, nickel and/or chromium (DNC, DAC, Delta-Tone), salt spray testing as in DIN 50021, min. 240 h.

Stainless and acid-resistant steels


2
A270
R m = 700 N/mm , austenitic steel, strain hardened
A470
R m = 700 N/mm 2, austenitic steel, strain hardened
2
C3
R m = 800 N/mm , martensitic steel, quenched and tempered

1.4541
1.4571
1.4057

Page 4
SN 486 : 2002-01
d1

Lifting eye bolt


DIN 580

surfaced

M64

d2

20

25

30

35

40

50

65

75

85

100

110

120

d3

36

45

54

63

72

90

108

126

144

166

184

206

d4

20

25

30

35

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

36

45

53

62

71

90

109

128

147

168

187

208

13

17

20,5

27

30

36

45

54

63

68

78

90

d5

24

30

36

40

46

57

71

82

92

112

118

132

16

20

23

30

33

39

48

57

66

71

81

93

24

29

33

41

46

54

65

76

87

94

107

121

0,06

0,11

0,18

0,28

0,45

0,74

1,66

2,65

4,03

6,38

8,8

12,4

SMS Demagspecific
determination
DIN 580 M 20 C 15
Lifting eye nut see DIN 582

M 8 2) M10 2) M12 2) M16 2) M20 2) M24 2) M30 2) M36 2) M42 2) M48 2) M56

Weight
kg / piece

Max. permissible load from suspended part, in kg


using one bolt

140

230

340

700

1200 1800 3600 5100 7000 8600 11500 16000

using two bolts,


in total

95

170

240

500

830

Direction of pull

1)

2)

1270 2600 3700 5000 6100 8300 11000

judging from experience the indication of a permissible angle deviation between tap hole and supporting face is not required,
provided both are made in one set-up of the same workpiece.
available from stock
Button-head lubricating nipple
DIN 3404

Type

d1

G 1/4 A
G 1/4 A
G 3/8 A

d3
h12
16

b
0,1
6,5

22

8,5

e
min.
19,3

h
max.
17,6

k
j16
4,5

l
- 0,5
5,5

s
h13
17

Weight
kg / 1000 pcs.
18

25

23,1

5,5

7,5

22

34

Minimum space requirement for

DIN 3404 - A G 1/4 A 22 St-A3F

Parallel pin with internal thread,


unhardened
DIN EN ISO 8733

c2

c1
l

Ordering example:
ISO 8733 6 x 30 St

grease gun connection

socket wrench

d 1 m6 1)
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
c1
0,8
1
1,2
1,6
2
2,5
3
4
1,2
1,6
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
5
c 2
3
l
Weight (7,85 kg / dm ) in kg per 1000 pieces
16
2,79
20
3,67
6,4
24
4,55
7,98 12,2
28
5,43
9,56 14,7
19,5
32
6,31 10,3
17,2
23,1
39,4
40
8,07 13,5
22,2
30,3
52
80,2
50
10,3
17,5
28,4
39,9
67,8 105
150
60
12,5
21,5
34,6
49,5
82,8 130
188
265
70
25,5
40,8
59,1
98,5 155
226
320
80
29,5
47
68,7 115
180
264
376
90
53,2
78,3 131
205
303
431
100
59,4
87,9 147
230
341
487
120
107
180
280
418
598
1) other tolerances upon agreement.

40
5
6,3

680
754
852
1050

50
6,3
8

1360
1720

Page 5
SN 486 : 2002-01
d 1 m6
Parallel pin
with internal thread, hardened
DIN EN ISO 8735

Ordering example:
ISO 8735 6 x 30 A St

30

40

50

0,8
1
1,2
1,6
2
2,5
3
4
a
c
2,1
2,6
3
3,8
4,6
6
6
7
3
l
Weight (7,85 kg / dm ) in kg per 1000 pieces
16
2,79
20
3,67
6,4
24
4,55
7,98 12,2
28
5,43
9,56 14,7
19,5
32
6,31 10,3
17,2
23,1
39,4
40
8,07 13,5
22,2
30,3
52
80,2
50
10,3
17,5
28,4
39,9
67,8 105
150
60
12,5
21,5
34,6
49,5
82,8 130
188
265
70
25,5
40,8
59,1
98,5 155
226
320
80
29,5
47
68,7 115
180
264
376
90
53,2
78,3 131
205
303
431
100
59,4
87,9 147
230
341
487
120
107
180
280
418
598
1) other tolerances upon agreement.

5
8

6,3
10

d h10 1)

Taper pin,
unhardened

Ordering example:
ISO 2339 A - 6 x 30 St

10

12

16

1)

20

25

1360
1720

30

40

50

5,58 7,88 13,7

21

35

1,19 2,42 4,08

6,18 8,7

15

23,1 32,9

40

2,85 4,77

7,19 10,1

17,4

26,7 37,9 66,3

50

6,24

9,33 13

22,3

34

60

11,6 16,1

27,4

41,6 58,7 102

157

242

346

610

70

19,4

32,7

49,4 69,6 120

185

285

407

715 1109

80

22,8

38,2

57,5 80,8 139

213

328

468

821 1273

90

26,4

44

65,9 92,3 158

242

372

530

928 1438

100

49,9

74,6 104

178

272

417

592 1036 1604

120

62,6

92,8 129

219

333

508

720 1256 1939

261

395

602

851 1479 2280

112

29,9

48,2 83,9 130

155

200

other tolerances upon agreement.

40

10

12

16

20

25

30

40

50

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces


9,13

15,5

23,2

30,3

51,1

78

45

10,5

17,9

26,8

35,4

59,9

91

55

13,5

22,9

34,2

45,8

77,7

118

165

60

15,1

25,5

38,1

51,1

86,8

132

186

246

36,3

54

73,2

124

188

272

368

708

90

62,4

84,7

143

217

316

430

815

100

71,1

96,4

163

247

361

492

923

1396

204

308

452

620

1143

1731

140

246

370

546

751

1366

2072

160

291

435

642

885

1594

2419

572

843

1163

2062

3126

80

120

200
1)

16

680
754
852
1050

1,06 2,17 3,68

Ordering example:
ISO 8736 A - 6 x 30 St

12

25

32

d 1 h10 1)

DIN EN 28736

10

20

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

140

Taper pin
with internal thread, unhardened

Note:
Type A (ground):
surface roughness R a = 0,8 m
Type B (turned):
surface roughness R a = 3,2 m

DIN EN 22339

Note:
Type A (ground):
surface roughness R a = 0,8 m
Type B (turned)
surface roughness R a = 3,2 m

1)

other tolerances upon agreement.

121

Page 6
SN 486 : 2002-01
d1

Spring-type straight pin,


slotted, heavy duty

DIN EN ISO 8752

Weight (7,85 kg /

20

25

30

40

50

in kg per 1000 pieces

1,66 2,66 4,43 6,66 9,35 11

18,4

14

0,475 0,836 1,32

1,94 3,13 5,17 7,78 10,9

12,9

21,4 33,4 48,5

16

0,543 0,955 1,51

2,21 3,58 5,9

8,89 12,5

14,7

24,5 38,2 55,4

20

0,679 1,19 1,88

2,77 4,48 7,38 11,1 15,6

18,4

30,6 47,8 69,2 117

186

22

0,746 1,31 2,07

3,04 4,92 8,12 12,2 17,1

20,2

33,6 52,5 76,2 129

205

24

0,814 1,43 2,26

3,32 5,37 8,86 13,3 18,7

22

36,7 57,3 83,1 141

223

28

0,95 1,67 2,64

3,87 6,26 10,3 15,6 21,8

25,7

42,8 66,8 96,9 164

261

30

1,02 1,79 2,83

4,15 6,71 11,1 16,7 23,4

27,6

45,9 71,6 104

176

279

32

1,09 1,91 3,02

4,43 7,16 11,8 17,8 24,9

29,4

48,9 76,4 111

188

298

35

1,22 2,18 3,39

4,98 8,06 13,3 20

28,1

33,1

55,1 85,9 125

211

326

40

1,36 2,39 3,77

5,54 8,95 14,8 22,2 31,2

36,7

61,2 95,5 138

235

372

45

2,68 4,24

6,23 10,1 16,6 25

41,3

68,8 107

156

264

419

50

2,98 4,71

6,92 11,2 18,4 27,8 39

45,9

76,5 119

173

293

465

55

5,18

7,61 12,3 20,3 30,5 42,9

50,5

84,1 131

190

323

512

60

5,65

8,3 13,4 22,1 33,3 46,8

55,1

91,8 143

208

352

558

65

6,12

8,99 14,5 24

59,7

99,4 155

225

382

605

70

6,59

9,69 15,7 25,8 38,9 54,6

64,3 107

167

242

411

651

75

7,06 10,4 16,8 27,7 41,7 58,5

68,9 115

179

260

440

698

80

7,54 11,1 18

73,5 122

191

277

470

745

70,2

82,7 138

215

312

528

838

13,8 22,4 36,9 55,5 77,9

91,9 153

239

346

587

931

286

415

704 1120

35,1

36,1 50,1

29,5 44,4 62,4

12,5 20,1 33,2 50

9,19 15,3

26,8 44,3 66,6 93,5 110

184

d1

1,6

3,2

6,3

10

13

16

b
Hole dia.

3,2

6,4

10

12,6

16

20

26

32

1,2 1)

1,6

3,2

6,3

10

13

16

30,5
33,9
38
41,8
46,2
51,2
56,7
62,2
66
75,9
84,2
96,2

83,4
91,8
101
111
122
134
148
177

188
206
228
256

l
12
16
20
25
32

*)

16

0,407 0,716 1,13

H14

Ordering example:
ISO 1234 5 x 50 St

14

dm3)

12

120

DIN EN ISO 1234

12

0,34 0,597 0,942 1,38 2,24 3,69 5,55 7,8

100

Split pin

10

10

90

Ordering example:
ISO 8752 6 x 30 A FSt 55Si7

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces


0,06
0,08
0,1

0,14
0,18
0,22
0,27
0,34

0,28
0,34
0,4
0,47
0,56

36
0,61
40
0,66
45
50
56
63
71
80
90
100
112
125
140
160
SMS Demag-specific determination

0,87
1,09
1,31
1,64
1,8
2
2,17
2,43
2,7
3,02

2,16
2,52
3,07
3,39
3,71
4,11
4,51
5
5,55
6,2
6,91

4
5
5,49
6
6,61
7,24
8
8,67
9,86
11
12,2
13,5

8,9
9,76
10,6
11,7
12,8
14
15,6
17,3
19,2
21,3
23,5
26,1
28,9

17,2
18,9
20,6
22,6
25
27,7
30,7
34,1
37,5
41,5
45,9
51
58,3

January 2002

Mechanical fasteners
Washers and retaining elements

SN 487

Selection
Dimensions in mm
Lock washer
SN 778

Screw dia.
= nom. size

10

12

16

20

24

30

d1

H14

4,3

5,3

6,4

8,4

10,5

13

17

21

25,6

31,6

d2

H14

10

13

16

18

24

30

36

45

0,5

1,2

1,5

1,5

2,5

2,5

5,38

9,48

15,2

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces


SN 778 6

SN 808

0,29

0,33

d 1=
nom. size
d2

31

37

43

50

35

45

55

65

75

90 100 110 120 140 160 175 185 220 240 270

58

66

DIN 1441

74

82

93

104 114 129 144 164

23

27

34

40

46

53

4,5

10

64

72
11

80

88

12

14

98

108 118 133 148 168


16

min. 900 N/mm

22
min. 700 N/mm

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces


26

40

80 129 209 368 520 601 751 1111 1670 1950 2090 4300 5000 6240

for screws

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

nom. size

10

12

16

20

d1

4,3

5,3

6,4

8,4

10,5

13

17

21

d2

10

12

16

20

24

30

37

0,8

1,6

1,6

2,5

Weight (7,85 kg /

Washer,
coarse type, for bolts

3,36

25

d3

SN 808 21 St

Ordering example:
ISO 7089 16 200HV

1,34

21

Rm

DIN EN ISO 7089 up to M64


DIN 125 above M64

1,26

for screws M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56 M64 M72 M80 M90 M100 M110 M125 M140 M160

Tensile
strength

Plain washer
Normal series

0,67

dm3)

in kg per 1000 pieces

0,308

0,443

1,02

1,83

3,57

6,27

11,3

17,2

for screws

M24

M30

M36

M42

M48

M56

M64

nom. size

24

30

36

42

48

56

64

d1

25

31

37

45

52

62

70

d2

44

56

66

78

92

105

115

10

10

547

Weight (7,85 kg /
32,3
For
bolt dia.
d 1=
nom. size
d2
s

For bolt dia.


d 1=
nom. size
d2
s

53,6

92,1

dm3)

209

in kg per 1000 pieces


284

472

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

25

28

30

32
33

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

26

29

31

34

16
2

20
2,5

25
3

42
5

45
5

50
5

2,16
35
36

4,3

8,43

28,5

32,8

43,5

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

90

100

37

41

46

51

56

62

68

72

78

82

92

102

52
6

58
6

62
7

110
12

115
12

125
14

49,4

59,2

70,6

298

352

451

DIN 1441 19 St

28
28
30
32
34
40
3
3
4
4
4
4
Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
10,3 9,16 13,3 14,4 15,5 22,8

68
75
80
90
95
100
8
9
9
9
10
10
Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
94,7 138 142 193 237 241

Continued on pages 2 and 3

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Washer for prestressed high-strength


screw connection

0,09

Page 2
SN 487 : 2002-01
Washer,
square, wedgeshaped, for
U-beams

inclination 8%

DIN 434

for screws

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

d = nom. size

11

14

18

22

26

22

22

26

32

40

56

22

22

30

36

44

56

3,8

3,8

4,9

5,9

8,5

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces


DIN 434 14 St

inclination 14 %

Washer,
square, wedgeshaped, for
I-beams
DIN 435

9,57

8,85

18,2

31,4

56,9

128

for screws

M8

M10

M12

M16

M20

M24

d = nom. size

11

13,5

17,5

22

26

22

22

26

32

40

56

22

22

30

36

44

56

4,6

4,6

6,2

7,5

9,2

10,8

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces


DIN 435 14 St

Circlip (retaining ring)


for shafts
Normal type
DIN 471

10,2
nom. size
d1
s
d2

12

15

9,6
perm. dev. - 0,06
m1)
n min.
0,6

11,5

1 -0,06
14,3

0,34

0,5

28

30

nom. size
d1
s
d2
perm. dev.

m1)
n min.

nom. size
d1
s
d2

10

9,4

0,8

3,31

65

70

32

67

16

17

18

20

22

24

15,2
- 0,11

16,2

17

19

1,2 -0,06
21
22,9
- 0,13

35

38

40

42

45

50

143
25

26

23,9
- 0,21

24,9

1,7
1,9

1,96

55

60

1,75 -0,06
2 -0,07
37,5 39,5 42,5
47
52
57
- 0,25
- 0,3
1,85 +0,14
2,15 +0,14
3
3,8
4,5
Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
3,54
4
5,62 6,03
6,5
7,5
10,2 11,4 12,9
75

2,5 -0,07
67
72
- 0,3
2,65 +0,14
4,5

33

36

80

85

90

95

100

110

115

120

18,2

22

3 -0,08
4 -0,1
86,5 91,5 96,5
106
111
116
- 0,35
- 0,54
3,15 +0,18
4,15 +0,18
5,3
6
Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
24,6 27,3 36,4 44,5
49
53,7
82
84
86

130

140

150

126

136

145
- 0,63

62

perm. dev.

m1)
n min.

nom. size
d1
s
d2

35,6

1,1 +0,14
1,3 +0,14
1,1
1,2
1,5
Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
0,67
0,7
0,82 1,11
1,3
1,5
1,77

1,5 -0,06
26,6 28,6 30,3
- 0,21
1,6 +0,14
2,1
2,6
2,92

20,1

perm. dev.

m1)
n min.

DIN 471 40 x 1,75 - FSt


100

110

76,5

81,5

160

180

4 -0,1
155

175

190

200

220

240

260

300

5 -0,12
234
252
292
- 0,81
4,15 +0,18
5,15 +0,18
7,5
9
12
Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces
120
150
190
210
230
265
310
355
44
185

195
214
- 0,72

Page 3
SN 487 : 2002-01
Circlip (retaining ring)
for bores
Normal type
DIN 472

nom. size
d1
s
d2

25

28

35

1,2 -0,06
26,2

perm. dev.

32

29,4

33,7

37

1,8

d2

42,5

44,5

2,1

1,6 +0,14
2,6

2 -0,07

47,5

49,5

53

55

58

+ 0,3
1,85 +0,14

2,15 +0,14

3,8

4,5

3
dm3)

in kg per 1000 pieces

3,54

4,7

5,4

6,1

7,3

8,2

8,3

60

62

72

80

85

90

95

100

110

115

120

2 0,07

2,5 -0,07
65

75

83,5

3 -0,08
88,5

93,5

+ 0,30

n min.

+0,14

4 -0,1

98,5

103,5

114

+ 0,35
2,65

3,15

+0,14

4,5

119

dm3)

124

+ 0,54

+ 0,63

4,15

+0,18

5,3
Weight (7,85 kg /

+0,18

in kg per 1000 pieces

11,1

11,2

18,1

22

25,3

31

35

38

64,5

74,5

77

130

140

145

150

160

180

200

210

240

280

300

4 -0,1
134

144

149

155

5 -0,12
165

185

+ 0,63

perm. dev.

m1)

205

216

246

288

+ 0,72

308

+ 0,81

4,15 +0,18

n min.

5,15 +0,18

7,5

12

Weight (7,85 kg / dm3) in kg per 1000 pieces

DIN 472 50 x 2 FSt


82

1)

55

2,21

2,15

d2

52

1,8

perm. dev.

nom. size
d1
s

50

1,5

63

m1)

47

1,75 -0,06

Weight (7,85 kg /
nom. size
d1
s

45

+ 0,25

1,3 +,14

n min.

42

1,5 -0,06

+ 0,21

m1)

40

87,5

93

105

110

165

195

270

345

400

435

As a rule, tolerance range H13 applies to the groove width m. In case of one-side force transmission the grooves can
be widened and/or bevelled towards the force-relieved side. The width of the groove has no effect on the load bearing
capacity of the retaining-ring joint.

Mechanical fasteners

SN 489

Locknuts, safety plates

Part 1

In all cases the latest German-language version


of this standard shall be taken as authoritative

Selection from DIN


Dimensions in mm

General
Before using the fasteners of Part 1 or Part 2, it has always to be checked which system is reasonable with regard to
replaceability and facilitation of installation.
Part 1: Locknuts, safety plates; selection from DIN
Part 2: Spieth locknuts; selection from Spieth catalogue

Locknut

Short
designati
on

d1

DIN 981

KM 5

M25x1,5

d2

d3

h13

h13

h13

JS14

H17 *)

38

32

Weight
kg/pc.
0,025

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

No guarantee can be given in respect of this translation

June 2003

KM 6

M30x1,5

45

38

KM 7

M35x1,5

52

44

0,053

KM 8

M40x1,5

58

50

0,085

KM 9

M45x1,5

65

56

10

KM10

M50x1,5

70

61

KM 11

M55x2

75

67

KM 12

M60x2

80

73

KM 13

M65x2

85

79

2,5

0,043

0,119
0,148

11

0,158
7

0,174
0,203

12
KM 14

M70x2

92

85

KM 16

M80x2

105

95

KM 17

M85x2

110

102

0,242
15

3,5

0,397
0,451

16
KM 18

M90x2

120

108

0,556

KM 19

M95x2

125

113

17

KM 20

M100x2

130

120

18

KM 22

M110x2

145

133

10

0,658
0,698
0,965

19
KM 23

M115x2

150

137

KM 24

M120x2

155

138

KM 25

M125x2

160

148

1,01
20

12

1,08
1,19

21
KM 26

M130x2

165

149

KM 27

M135x2

175

160

1,25
1,55
22
14

KM 28

M140x2

180

160

KM 30

M150x2

195

171

24

KM 32

M160x3

210

182

25

M170x3

220

193

26

KM 36

M180x3

230

203

27

2,59

M190x3

240

214

28

7
2,80
3,07

18
KM 38

1,56
2,03

16
KM 34

8
3,39

DIN 981 KM 17 - St
*) Applies only to t > 3 mm.

Applies to t up to 2 mm: 0 mm;


-0,5

t above 2 up to 3 mm: +0,9 mm


0

Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 489 Part 1: 2003-06
Slot
Lockwasher
(safety plate)

Short
designati
on

d1

d2

d3

s
b3

c11

js17

h13

a15

c11

min

+0,5

Weight
kg/pc.

For
locknut
DIN 981..

0,006

KM 5

0,008

KM 6

0,010

KM 7

0,012

KM 8

0,015

KM 9

=
H11

DIN 5406

MB 5

25

42

32

23

MB 6

30

49

38

27,5

MB 7

35

57

44

32,5
1,25

MB 8

40

62

50

37,5
6

MB 9

45

69

56

7
42,5
4

MB 10

50

74

61

47,5

0,016

KM 10

MB 11

55

81

67

52,5

0,020

KM11

MB 12

60

86

73

0,025

KM 12

57,5
8

1,5

MB 13

65

92

79

62,5

0,029

KM 13

MB 14

70

98

85

66,5

0,033

KM 14

MB 16

80

112

95

76,5

0,046

KM 16

MB 17

85

119

102

0,052

KM 17

0, 062

KM 18

81,5
10

MB 18

90

126

108

11

86,5
1,75

MB 19

95

133

113

91,5

0,067

KM19

MB 20

100

142

120

96,5

0,077

KM 20

MB 22

110

154

133

0,094

KM 22

12

14

105,5

6
MB 23

115

159

137

110,5

0,108

KM 23

MB 24

120

164

138

115

0,105

KM 24

MB 25

125

170

148

0,118

KM 25

0,113

KM 26

0,144

KM 27

0,142

KM 28

0,155

KM 30

0,229

KM 32

0,247

KM 34

0,268

KM 36

0,278

KM 38

120
14

MB 26

130

175

149

16
125

2
7

MB 27

135

185

160

MB 28

140

192

160

130
135
16

MB 30

150

205

171

MB 32

160

217

182

18
145
154

18
MB 34

170

232

193

20
164
2,5

DIN 5406 - MB 17 - St

MB 36

180

242

203

174
20

MB 38

190

252

214

The safety plate must not be located within the clearance cut.
Provide spacer ring if necessary,
or secure using a lock nut without safety plate,
or fix using bonding agent SN 507 - Loctite 675.

8
22

184

Mechanical fasteners

SN 489

Spieth locknuts

Part 2

In all cases the latest German-language version


of this standard shall be taken as authoritative

Selection from Spieth catalogue


Dimensions in mm

General
Before using the fasteners of Part 1 or Part 2, it has always to be checked which system is reasonable with regard to
replaceability and facilitation of installation.
Part 1: Locknuts, safety plates; selection from DIN
Part 2: Spieth locknuts; selection from Spieth catalogue

Fields of application
Locknuts of the series MSR and MSA are precision nuts whose system-specific benefits can be profitably used in every sector
of mechanical engineering. In the case of high-speed and/or dynamically loaded spindles the precision, axial rigidity and high
level of dynamic safety of the locknuts lead to optimal results of the entire bearing system.Repeated precision adjustments
can be carried out usnig the locknut on the same spindle. The locknut can simply and precisely assume the function of shaft
collar or contact surface. These locknuts can even be applied in cases in which a union is expected to comply to only the
most stringent demands.

Example of application: MSR - M24 - 1,5 - St


Series MSR

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

No guarantee can be given in respect of this translation

June 2003

The permissible operating loads stated in the table are


guidance values calculated with a working error margin of 1.6
- under static stress relative to the minimum yield point,
- under dynamic stress relative to the minimum alternate
strength.
Subject to changes.
Special versions:
On request, upon provision of an explanatory sketch.
Short
designation

MSR

16-1,5
17-1
18-1,5
20-1
20-1,5
22-1,5
24-1,5
25-1,5
26-1,5
28-1,5
30-1,5
32-1,5
35-1,5
40-1,5
42-1,5
45-1,5
48-1,5
50-1,5
52-1,5
55-1,5
55-2
58-1,5
60-1,5
115-2
120-2
125-2

Dimensions in mm

d2

h11
34
35
36
40
40
40
42
45
45
46
48
50
53
58
60
68
68
70
72
75
75
82
84
145
155
160

d3

H11
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8

d4

24,5
25,5
26,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
32,5
36,5
36,5
38,5
40,5
42,5
45,5
50,5
52,5
58
59,5
61,5
63,5
66,5
66,5
72,5
74,5
133
140
148

d5

4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
4,3
5,3
5,3
6,4
6,4
6,4

Clamping screws

18
18
18
18
18
18
18
20
20
20
20
22
22
22
22
22
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
36
36
36

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
7
7
7
7
6,5
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
13
13
13

ISO
4762

M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6

MA

Nm
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
6
6
10
10
10

Calculation
factor
A

Locknut-specific
allowance
B

Admissible axial
operating stress

Mass
moment of
inertia

Quantity

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

mm
1,112
1,108
1,228
1,281
1,344
1,459
1,575
1,633
1,690
1,805
1,921
2,037
2,210
2,500
2,617
2,789
2,962
3,079
3,196
3,369
3,430
3,541
3,655
6,900
7,193
7,474

N
3962
3947
3931
3900
3900
3869
3838
3822
3806
3775
3744
3713
3666
3588
3557
5265
5195
5148
5101
5031
5031
8077
8001
8370
8100
7830

dyn.

stat.

kN
17
19
19
22
18
23
25
33
34
36
38
44
47
49
49
53
70
71
72
72
78
103
105
248
272
281

kN
22
25
25
29
28
32
35
47
49
53
57
64
66
66
66
84
94
94
96
96
96
161
163
329
408
412

kg cm2
0,147
0,164
0,183
0.283
0,283
0,270
0,323
0,488
0,479
0,504
0,588
0,743
0,914
1,254
1,412
2,494
2,631
2,909
3,207
3,690
3,690
5,811
6,317
64,164
89,668
99,722

Continued on pages 2 to 3

Page 2
SN 489-2: 2003-06
The locknuts stated here are special versions and are manufactured only upon special request. The manufacture of the nut
threads in quality ISO-5 H requires the corresponding limit screw plugs (Go side and Not Go side) whose procurement will
have to be clarified in case of need.
Hook wrenches with pins for screwing on and pretightening of the locknuts are covered in DIN 1810-B up to and including a
nut outside diameter of 270 mm. Hook wrenches for bigger diameters can be obtained as special versions through specialised
dealers.
Designation of a locknut of d1 = M 260 x 3 ISO 5H

Locknut MSR 260 x 3


Short
name

MSR

Dimensions in mm

d2

metr.
ISO-5H

h11

210x3

270

220x3

282

230x3

295

240x3

d3

d4

dm

kN

kN

338

598

354

626

371

664

387

703

403

752

419

800

430

849

0,26

242

260

218,051

0,039

0,25

252

270

228,051

0,038

0,24

308

262

280

238,051

0,037

0,23

250x3

322

272

290

248,051

0,036

0,22

260x3

336

282

300

258,051

0,035

0,21

270x3

350

292

310

268,051

0,034

0,20

280x3

364

302

320

278,051

0,033

0,20

446

897

290x3

376

312

330

288,051

0,032

0,19

462

925

300x3

390

322

340

298,051

0,031

0,18

479

973

310x4

400

337

360

320x4

412

347

370

330x4

424

357

380

340x4

436

367

390

350x4

450

377

400

360x4

466

387

410

370x4

478

397

420

380x4

490

407

430

12

12

14

14

14

44

44

54

54

54

13

13

16

16

16

27

27

32

32

32

307,402

0,030

0,24

317,402

0,029

0,23

327,402

0,028

0,22

337,402

0,027

0,22

347,402

0,026

0,21

357,402

0,025

0,20

367,402

0,024

0,20

377,402

0,023

0,19

M8x30

25

8
-

M8x30

10

M8x30

stat.

0,040

Nm

dyn.

208,051
27

Quantity

F8

250
13

ISO 4017

MAS

232

44

ISO 4014

5H

12

Degrees

Dimensions

Admissible
axial operating
stress

H11

Series MSA

H11

d5

Clamping screws

132000

132000
25

165000

25

165000

49

262000

10
M10x40

M10x40

10

49

12
M10x40

12

262000

314400
49

314400

579

1098

598

1130

610

1163

629

1194

647

1253

665

1333

684

1366

703

1399

Page 3
SN 489 Part 2: 2003-06

The permissible operating loads stated in the table are guidance values calculated with a working error margin of 1.6
- under static stress relative to the minimum yield point,
- under dynamic stress relative to the minimum alternate strength.

The locknuts of series MSA with reduced contact surface and in some cases smaller outside diameters relative to the MSR
series are particularly suited for the installation of angular-contact ball bearings and cylindrical roller bearings of ISO diameter
series 9.

Special versions:
On request, upon provision of an explanatory sketch.
Short
designat
ion

MSA

Dimensions in mm

d2

d3

d4

d5

d6

Clamping screws

ISO
4762

MA

h11

H11

20-1

35

27,5

3,2

31

17

M3

25-1,5

40

32,5

3,2

36

19

6,5

M3

30-1,5

45

37,5

3,2

41

19

6,5

35-1,5

53

45,5

4,3

48

22

40-1,5

58

50,5

4,3

54

45-1,5

64

54

4,3

50-1,5

69

59

55-1,5

73

60-1,5

78

Calculation
factor
A

Locknutspecific
allowance
B

Quantity

Nm

zul. Admissible
axial
operating stress

dyn.

stat.

Mass
moment of
inertia

mm

kN

kN

kg cm2

1,281

3938

23

31

0,142

1,633

3859

35

49

0,265

M3

1,921

3780

39

56

0,400

M4

2,9

2,210

3666

47

66

0,904

22

M4

2,9

2,500

3588

50

68

1,242

59

23

M4

2,9

2,789

4388

58

78

1,888

4,3

64

24

M4

2,9

3,079

5148

63

85

2,563

64

4,3

69

24

M4

2,9

3,369

5031

59

79

3,001

69

4,3

74

24

M4

2,9

3,3655

4914

61

81

3,758

January 2002

Fitting keys, taper keys

SN 708

Selection from DIN standards


Dimensions in mm

Parallel keys as in DIN 6885


Type B1)
Type D1)2)

Type F3)
Surfaces for keyways
without drawing indication
(see SN 200).

Example:

functional dimension
hub
Example:

Example of designation: Parallel key DIN 6885 B 12 x 8 x 80 C45+C


above
up to

for shaft dia. d 1

Parallel key

d2=d1+
Width b1 h9
Height h h11
Length l
Bevel or
curve
Thread
Countersink

Shaft keyseat
Hub keyway

t1
perm. dev.
Width
r2
perm. dev.
Position tolerance
Depth
t2
perm. dev.
Width
r2
Curve
perm. dev.
Position tolerance
d6
Thread
t3
t4
Curve

Screw

10
12
4
4
4

12 17 22 30 38 44 50 58 65 75 85 95 110 130 150 170


17 22 30 38 44 50 58 65 75 85 95 110 130 150 170 200
5 6 8 8 8 9 11 11 12 14 14 16 18 21 23 26
5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 32 36 40 45
5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 14 14 16 18 20 22 25
Determined and indicated on the basis of design
0,16
0,25
0,4
0,6
1

r1
perm.
+0,09
deviation
d5
d3
d4
t5

Material

Fastening

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

shaft

d6 x

For footnotes see page 2

+ 0,15

+ 0,2
M4
4,5
8
3,2

M5
5,5
10
4,1

M6
6,6
11
4,8

200
230
28
50
28

230
260
32
56
32

260
290
32
63
32

290
330
36
70
36

330
380
40
80
40

380
440
45
90
45

1,6

2,5

+ 0,4

+ 0,5

440
500
50
100
50

M8 M10
M12
M16
M20
9
11
13,5
17,5
22
15
18
20
26
33
6
7,3
8,3
11,5
13,5
C45+C (C 45 K)
2,5 3 3,5 4 5 5 5,5 6 7 7,5 9 9 10 11 12 13 15 17 20 20 22 25 28 31
+ 0,1
+ 0,2
+ 0,3
b 1 P9
0,16
0,25
0,4
0,6
1
1,6
2,5
- 0,08
- 0,09
- 0,15
- 0,2
- 0,3
- 0,4
- 0,5
0,06
0,08
0,1
1,8 2,3 2,8 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,8 4,3 4,4 4,9 5,4 5,4 6,4 7,4 8,4 9,4 10,4 11,4 12,4 12,4 14,4 15,4 17,4 19,5
+ 0,1
+ 0,2
+ 0,3
Parallel key b 1 P9 , sliding key b 1 F7 5)
0,16
0,25
0,4
0,6
1
1,6
2,5
- 0,08
- 0,09
- 0,15
- 0,2
- 0,3
- 0,4
- 0,5
0,06
0,08
0,1
M4
M5
M6
M8 M10
M12
M16
M20
6 6 6 7 6 8 9 9 11 15 13 15 12 13 13 17 18 20 20
10 11 11 13 12 14 16 17 19 24 22 24 21 22 22 27 28 32 32
ISO 1207 M ....x.... 4.8
DIN 7984 M ....x.... 8.8
10 10 10 12 12 16 16 16 20 25 25 30 30 35 35 40 40 50 50
To be stated separately in the bill of materials
Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 708 : 2002-01

Taper key with gib head to DIN 6887


inclination
shaft

hub
Example:

Example:

Example of designation: DIN 6887 - 12 x 8 x 80 C45+C

Removal of sharp edges on all sides

Hub keyway

Shaft keyseat

Key

for shaft dia. d 1

above
up to

d2=d1+
Width b1 h9
Height h h11
Length l
r1
Bevel or
curve
perm. dev.
Thread
d5
d3
Countersink
d4
t5
Material
t1
Depth
perm. dev.
Width
r2
Curve
perm. dev.
t2
Depth
perm. dev.
Width
r2
Curve
perm. dev.

10
12
4
4
4

12 17 22 30 38 44 50 58 65 75 85 95 110 130 150 170 200


17 22 30 38 44 50 58 65 75 85 95 110 130 150 170 200 230
5 6 8 8 8 9 11 11 12 14 14 16 18 21 23 26 28
5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 32 36 40 45 50
5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 14 14 16 18 20 22 25 28
Determined and indicated on the basis of design
0,16
0,25
0,4
0,6
1
+0,09
+ 0,15
+ 0,2
+ 0,2
+ 0,2
M4 M5
M6
M8 M10
M12
4,5 5,5
6,6
9
11
13,5
8
10
11
15
18
20
3,2 4,1
4,8
6
7,3
8,3
C45+C (C 45 K) or St 60-1
-2,5 3 3,5 4 5 5 5,5 6 7 7,5 9 9 10 11 12 13 15 17
+ 0,1
+ 0,2
for taper key b 1 D10
0,16
0,25
0,4
0,6
1
- 0,08
- 0,09
- 0,15
- 0,2
- 0,3
1,2 1,7 2,2 2,4 2,4 2,4 2,9 3,4 3,4 3,9 4,4 4,4 5,4 6,4 7,1 8,1 9,1 10,1
+ 0,1
+ 0,2
b 1 D10
0,16
0,25
0,4
0,6
1
- 0,08
- 0,09
- 0,15
- 0,2
- 0,3

230 260 290 330


260 290 330 380
32 32 36 40
56 63 70 80
32 32 36 40
1,6
+ 0,4
M16
17,5
26
11,5
20 20
+ 0,3

22

25

380 440
440 500
45 50
90 100
45 50
2,5
+ 0,5
M20
22
33
13,5
28

1,6
2,5
- 0,4
- 0,5
11,1 11,1 13,1 14,1 16,1 18,1
+ 0,3
1,6
- 0,4

2,5
- 0,5

Revision: Correction of t2 measurements under: Hub keyway Depth in the above table.

1)

2)
3)
4)

5)

31

When fitting keys of types B and D with hole for jack screw (s) are used, this has to be expressly stated in the order.
Example of designation:
DIN 6885 BS 12 x 8 x 80 C45+C
Use type D if l : b1 < 4
Use type F if l : b1 > 4
The keyway length depends upon the design and must be stated in the drawing.
The keyway length of the key types B, D and F is defined as the useful load-bearing length (functional dimension) without
curves.
H8 for secondary applications (e.g. support strip for pillow block) without transmission of moments.

January 2002

Pin without head

SN 530

Dimensions in mm

derived from
DIN EN 22340

Pin without head as in SN 530


Type A (manufacturing cost FK = 116%)

Type B (dimensions like types A and C)

up to d1 = 100mm dia.

(FK = 221%) from d1 = 18mm dia.

Designation of a pin, type A, as in SN 530


with diameter d 1 = 40 mm, tolerance range h9 1),
length l 1 = 130 mm and l h = 110 mm in E295:

Designation of a pin, type B, as in SN 530


with diameter d 1 = 40 mm, tolerance range h9 1),
length = 130 mm, l 2 = 60 mm and l 4 2) = 30 mm in E295:

Pin SN 530 A 40h9 x 130 x 110 E295

Pin SN 530 B 40h9 x 130 x 60 x 30 E295

Type C (dimensions like types A and B)

Type D

(FK = 221%)

(dimensions like type A)


(FK = 136%) from d1 = 25mm dia.

Designation of a pin, type C, as in SN 530


with diameter d 1 = 40 mm, tolerance range h9 and
2)
l 1 = 130 mm; l 2 = 60 mm and l 4 = 30 mm in E295:

Designation of a pin, type D, as in SN 530


with diameter d 1 = 40 mm, tolerance range h9 and
l 1 = 130 mm in E295:

Pin SN 530 C 40h9 x 130 x 60 x 30 E295

Pin SN 530 D 40h9 x 130 E295

Type E (dimensions like types A and D)


(FK = 100%)

Designation of a pin, type E, as in SN 530


with diameter d 1 = 40 mm, tolerance range h9 and
l 1 = 130 mm in E295:

Pin SN 530 E 40h9 x 130 E295

Continued on page 2

Diese Kopie wird bei nderung nicht bercksichtigt!

rounded off

Page 2
SN 530 : 2002-01

d 1 1)

dl

h9

H13

max.

6
8
10
12
14
* 15
16
18
20
22
24
* 25
27
* 28
30
* 32
33
* 35
36
* 38
40
* 42
45
* 48
50
55
60
* 65
70
* 75
80
* 85
90
* 95
100
* 110
* 120
* 130
* 140
* 150
* 160
* 170
* 180
* 190
* 200

1,6
2

d2

3,2
4

h1

t1

DIN EN ISO 1234

1,6 x
2 x
3,2 x
3,2 x

3
3
6

12
12
16
20

4 x 25
5 x 32

5
16

6,3

5 x 36
6,3 x 36
6,3 x 40
0,4

4,5
3

6,3 x 45
8 x 45

19

8 x 50
0,6

8
5,5

8 x 56
8 x 63

6,5
9

7
7,5
9

10

21

10 x 63
0,8
10 x 71
10 x 80

10
6
13

6
11

13 x 90

10,5
12

27

13 x 100
1

13
13
13
16

18
20

13
-

32

22

1,6

25
17

13 x 112
13 x 125

15

16 x 200

Inside dia.

7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
26
28
29
31
34
34
37
37
41
46
51
56
62
68
72
78
82
86
92
98
102

1,6
2
2,5
3
3
3

DIN 15058

20 x 5

5
25 x 6
6
6
7
8

30 x 8

9
10
40 x 10
12

50 x 12
-

16 x 224
38

28

60 x 16
16 x 250

Material: E295 (St50-2); preferred round bar as in DIN EN 10278.

1)

Axle stop plate

x 140
x 160
x 180
x 180

* These are no pin diameters as in DIN EN 22340.

2)

Washer,
coarse type
DIN 1441

Split pin

When other tolerances are required, these must be stated in the designation.
L 4 defined according to SN 364-3, bush length b 1 2 (a + c 1).

January 2002

Pin with head

SN 358

Dimensions in mm

DIN EN 22341
abridged and expanded

Pin with head as in DIN EN 22341


up to d 1 = 100mm dia.

Without split-pin hole type A


round off

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

drill during
shop assembly

Designation of a pin as in DIN EN 22341


with diameter d 1 = 65 mm, tolerance range h9 1)
and length l 1 = 95 mm, without split pin hole, in S355J2G3:

Ordering example:
Pin ISO 2341 A 65h9 x 95 S355J2G3

With split-pin hole type B


(dimensions as for pin without split-pin hole)
d 1 h9, f7 FK = 165% (FK: manufacturing cost)
d 1 g6
FK = 234%
rounded off

Designation of a pin as in DIN EN 22341


with diameter d 1 = 65 mm, tolerance range h9 1)
length l 1 = 95 mm and distance between split-pin hole and extreme end of shank
l h = 83 mm, made of S355J2G3:

Ordering example:
Pin ISO 2341 - B 65h9 x 95 x 83 S355J2G3

Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 358 : 2002-01
d 1 1)

dK

h9
6
8
10
12
14
* 15
16
18
20
22
24
* 25
27
* 28
30
* 32
33
* 35
36
* 38
40
* 42
45
* 48
50
55
60
* 65
70
* 75
80
* 85
90
* 95
100
* 110
* 120
* 130
* 140
* 150
* 160
* 170
* 180
* 190
* 200

10
14
18
20
22
25
28
30
33
36
40
44
47
50
55
60
66
72
78
90
100
110
120

dl

H13
1,6
2

max.
2

2
3

1
0,6

3,2
4

4
3

4,5

1,6
0,6

1,6

6,3

4
8

10

6
13

5,5
6
6
8
8
8
8
9
9
11
12
13
13
13
13

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3

Washer,
coarse type
DIN 1441
Inside dia.
s
7
1,6
9
2
11
2,5
13
3
15
17
3
19
21
23
4
25
26
28
29
31
5
34
34
37
6
37
41
6
46
7
51
8
56
62
9
68
72
10
78
82
86
92
12
98
102

DIN EN ISO 1234


1,6 x
2 x
3,2 x
3,2 x

Material: S355J2G3 (St52-3); preferred round bar as in DIN EN 10278.

When other tolerances are required, these must be stated in the designation.

12
12
16
20

4 x 25
5 x 32
5 x 36
6,3 x 36
6,3 x 40
6,3 x 45
8 x 45
8 x 50
8 x 56
8 x 63
10 x 63
10 x 71
10 x 80
13 x 90
13 x 100
13 x 112
13 x 125
13
13
13
16

* These are no pin diameters as in DIN EN 22341.

1)

Split pin

x 140
x 160
x 180
x 180

16 x 200
16 x 224
16 x 250

January 2002

Pin with head and lubrication hole

SN 356

Dimensions in mm

Type A with spring pin


Type B without spring pin
d1 h9, f7 FK (manuf. cost) = 165%
d1 g6
FK = 234%

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

from d1 = 25mm dia. to 100mm dia.

drill during shop


assembly

rounded off

axle stop plate


DIN 15058
unmachined washer
(DIN 1441)

3)

Designation of a pin with spring pin, type A , diameter d1 = 30 mm,


with tolerance range h9 1) and length l 1 = 80 mm, l 2 = 35 mm, l 4 2) = 20 mm aus S355J2G3:

Pin SN 356 A30h9 x 80 x 35 x 20 S355J2G3

For footnotes see page 2


Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 356: 2002-01
Spring
pin 3)
d 1 1)

dk

dl

H13
6 10 1,6
8 14 2
10 18
3,2
12 20
14 22
4
* 15 16 25
18 28
20 30 5
22 33
24 36
* 25 6,3
27 40
* 28 30 44
* 32 33 47
* 35 8
36 50
* 38 40 55
* 42 45 60
* 48 50 66
10
55 72
60 78
* 65 70 90
* 75 80 100
* 85 - 13
90 110
* 95 100 120
* 110
* 120
* 130
* 140
* 150
* 160
* 170
* 180
* 190
* 200

d2

d3

h9

h1

h2

l6

t1

t2

max.

2
3

1
0,6

4
4,5

1,6
-

0,6

1,6

5
16

4
3
5

19

6
4
8
21

10
6

27

12

5,5
6
6
8
8
8
8
9
9
11
12
13
13
13
13

14

1
1
1
1
1
1
-

3
0,4
4

6
0,6
8

10
0,8

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

6
1
1
1
1

h3
ISO 8752
with washer
min. DIN 1441
3,2
6,5
3,5
7,5
4,5
9,5
5,5
11
12
6
12
7
14,5

13

1
17

3
3
3
3

le

15,5
17

9
18

4 x 10

20,5
5 x 12
10

12

14

21,5
21,5
25,5
26,5

6 x 14

8 x 16

29,5
10 x 20
34

16
36

12 x 24

Washer,
coarse type

Axle stop plate

DIN 1441

DIN 15058

I.-
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
26
28
29
31

S
1,6
2
2,5

34

25 x 6

37

41
46
51
56
62
68
72
78
82
86
92
98
102

6
7
8

30 x 8

9
10
40 x 10
12

14 x 30
50 x 12

10

16

20 x 5

32
8

1,6 20

9
38

16 x 30
60 x 16

* These are no pin diameters as in DIN EN 22340 and 22341.


Material: S355J2G3 (St52-3); preferred round bar as in DIN EN 10278.

1)
2)
3)
4)

When other tolerances are required, these must be stated in the designation.
L 4 defined according to DIN 1850-2, bush length b 1 2 (a + c 1).
To be stated separately in the bill of materials.
When other thread connections are required, these must be specified as follows, e.g.: G 1/4 x 12/18 11 x l 2 + 6

January 2002

Bushings for plain bearings

SN 364
Part 1

made of copper alloys


Dimensions in mm

DIN ISO 4379


abridged and expanded

Bushings for plain bearings as in DIN ISO 4379


Use bushings of strip metal (e.g. DU bushings) for simple-type bearings.
Dimensions and designation:

Type C

Type F
(chamfers c1 and c2 same as type C)

X (without Y in the designation)

25

1,6
3,2

d3

c2x45

X (with Y in the designation)

0,2

d1

1,6

6,3
25

c2 (variable)

b2

b1

c2

b1

Designation of a bush, type C, inside dia. d1 = 20 mm and ISO tolerance range E9 prior to mounting,
outside dia. d2 = 26 mm with ISO tolerance range s6 and width b1 = 20 mm with press-in chamfer C2 of 15 (Y),
made of CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:

Ordering example:
Bushing ISO 4379 - C-20E9 x 26s6 x 20Y - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Material:

CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ as in DIN EN 1982


Other materials see SN 359

Design:

Permissible deviations of dimensions without tolerance indications: DIN ISO 2768m,


edges max. 0,3 mm deburred acc. to DIN ISO 13715,
press-in chamfer c 2 of 45: no particular indication in the designation,
press-in chamfer c 2 of 15: add Y in the designation.

Tolerance ranges recommended for SMS Demag:


pressed-in, shrunk-in
200
before mounting
d1

> 200

1)

after mounting
relevant shaft tolerance range
d2

120
> 120

location hole

F7

E9
d1
Vx =
15%
d2
H7
H8
f7; e9
s6
r6
H7

glued in (indicate in drawing)


D10
2)

E9
h9; h11

H7

H8
f7; e9

E9
h9; h11

g6
H7

Example of nom. dimension d1 > 200: (not standardised)

Desired:

location hole = 240 H7 ( 0+0,046 ) . bushing outside dia. d 2 = 240 r6 ( ++00,,113


084 ) .
bushing pressed-in or shrunk in.
bushing inside dia. d1 = 210 H7 ( 0+0,046 ) .

Required:

d 1 before mounting:

Given:

Vx =

d1
0,113 210
15% =
15% = 0,084
d2
240

This leads to a dimensions required before mounting of d 1 min. = 210+0,084 = 210,084 and
d 1 max. = 210,046+0,084 = 210,130; tolerance range: 210 E9 ( ++00,,215
100 ) .
When a suitable ISO tolerance range cannot be determined, the calculated values can be indicated as deviations
from the nominal dimension, e.g. 210 ( ++00,,113
084 ) .
Plain bearing bushings subjected to particularly heavy stresses by axial or radial forces shall be secured by setscrews or
bonding agent Loctite 675 as in SN 507. For bushes with lubricant feed and distribution for rotating bearing movement refer to
SN 364-3.
For footnotes see page 2

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

6,3

d2

c1 x 45

Page 2
SN 364 Part 1 : 2002-01
b1 3)
d1

6 4)
8
10
12
14
15
16
18
20
22
(24)
25
(27)
28
30
32
(33)
35
(36)
38
40
42
45
48
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200

d2

12
14
16
18
20
21
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
45
46
48
50
52
55
58
60
65
75
80
85
90
95
100
110
115
120
125
130
140
150
160
170
185
195
210
220
230

d3

14
18
20
22
25
27
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
58
60
63
66
68
73
83
88
95
100
105
110
120
125
130
135
140
150
160
170
180
200
210
220
230
240

Chamfer

Series

b2

10

45
c1, c2
max.

15
c2
max.

0,3

1
10

15

20

20

30

12
15

20

0,5

2
1,5

30

40

50
30

40
5

0,8

60
40

50

60

50
70
60

80

70

90

80

7,5

100
3

80

100

120
10

100

120

150

150

180

120
200
150
180

12,5

180
250

15

200

1
4,5
5,5
6,5
12,4
14,1
14,9
18,9
20,9
28,6
31,1
33,6
55,2
59
70,8
75,2
79,6
93,3
165,9
170
178,3
186,6
194,9
207,3
293
304
332
560
752
803
855
1089
1151
1659
1742
2433
2543
2654
3594
3871
4147
5308
7153
7568
12130
12751
16049

Weight (8,8 kg/dm3 red brass and bronze)


kg per 1000 pieces
Type C
Type F
for series b1
2
3
1
2
7,5
8,6
9,1
11,7
10,8
13,7
18,7
24,9
15,7
22
21,1
28,2
18,7
25,7
22,4
29,9
20,8
26,3
23,6
31,5
25,1
29,8
34,8
52,3
27,6
41,5
38,2
57,2
35,8
45,4
41,5
62,2
38,8
49,2
44,8
67,2
41,8
53
82,7
110,3
66,8
94,3
88,5
118
71,2
100,7
106,2
141,5
83,7
119,1
112,8
150,4
88,8
126,4
119,4
159,2
93,8
133,6
140
186,6
111,9
158,6
221,2
276,5
182,3
237,6
226,7
283,4
190,3
247
237,8
297,2
199,3
258,8
248,8
373,2
216,4
278,6
259,9
389,8
225,8
290,8
276,5
414,7
239,9
309,1
366
440
327
400
380
456
339
415
415
581
370
453
840
1120
625
905
902
1203
821
971
1125
1446
896
1218
1197
1540
953
1295
1451
1814
1192
1554
1534
1918
1259
1642
2212
3318
1817
2370
2903
3483
1907
3068
3041
3649
2605
3213
3179
3815
2722
3358
3317
3981
2840
3503
4313
5391
3794
4513
4645
5806
4085
4859
6220
7464
4375
6448
6635
7962
5549
6876
8942
10730
7651
9440
11352
12614
8092
11876
14556
20216
12575
15001
15302
21253
13217
15768
17832
22290
16536
18319

3
28,2
32,8
35,8
37,7
59
64,4
69,9
75,4
121,9
130,2
154,4
164
173,4
205,2
292,9
303,7
318,2
403
420,7
447,3
474
491
619
1185
1272
1539
1638
1917
2026
3476
3648
3820
3994
4167
5591
6020
7692
8203
11228
13138
20661
21719
22777

Whenever possible, avoid sizes shown in round brackets.

1)

dimensions above 200 mm are not standardised.

2)

Explanations of the variables in the equation:


V x = biggest anticipated diameter reduction of d1 after pressing or shrinking in.
= biggest interference between location hole and bushing outside diameter d2.
d 1 = nominal inside dia. of bushing.
d 2 = nominal outside dia. of bushing = nom. dia. of location hole.

3)

The dimensions of b1 indicated here have to be preferred. Other dimensions are allowed, but must not exceed 1,5 x d1.

4)

Dimension applies only to bushings of type C.

September 2003

Bushings for hydraulic cylinders


with pivot trunnion

SN 364
Part 2

made of copper alloys


Dimensions in mm

derived from
DIN ISO 4379

The bushings of this SN 364-2 are designed only for hydraulic cylinders with pivot trunnions.
They differ from types C and F of SN 364-1 by a bigger chamfer c1.
Dimensions and designation: Type

Type B
(chamfers c1 and c2 same as type A)

X ( without Y in designation)

25

1,6

X ( with Y in designation)

0,2

1,6

c2x45

d3

d1

c 1 x 45

6,3

25

c 2 (variable)

b1

b2
c2

b1

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

6,3

d2

3,2

Designation of a bushing, type A, inside dia. d1 = 30 mm and ISO tolerance range E9 prior to mounting,
outside dia. d2 = 38 mm with ISO tolerance range s6, width b1 = 30 mm with press-in chamfer C2 of 15 (Y)
made of CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:

Bushing SN 364 - A-30E9 x 38s6 x 30Y - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ


Material:

CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ as in DIN EN 1982


For other materials see SN 359

Design:

Permissible deviations of dimensions without tolerance indications: DIN ISO 2768m,


edges max. 0,3 mm deburred acc. to DIN ISO 13715,
press-in chamfer c2 of 45: no particular indication in the designation,
press-in chamfer c2 of 15: add Y in the designation.

Tolerance ranges recommended for SMS Demag:


pressed-in, shrunk-in
before mounting
d1

200

after mounting
relevant shaft tolerance range *)

d2

glued in (indicate in drawing)

F7

E9

D10

H7

H8

E9

f8 a) , c) or e8 b) , c), d)

120

s6

>

120

r6

location hole

H7

h9; h11

H7

H8
f7; e9

E9
h9; h11

g6
H7

*) In most cases the tolerance indications are standardised by the suppliers.

Example:
a)
Hydraulic cylinder up to 160 bar (type CDM1)
b)
Hydraulic cylinder up to 250 bar (types CDH1, CGH1)
c)
Hydraulic cylinder up to 250 bar (types CDH2, CGH2)
d)
Hydraulic cylinder up to 350 bar (types CDH3, CGH3)

Messrs. Mannesmann Rexroth AG

Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 364 Part 2 : 2003-09
b1 1)
d1

30
32
(33)
35
(36)
38
40
42
45
48
50
55
60
63 2)
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
120
125 2)
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200

d2

38
40
42
45
46
48
50
52
55
58
60
65
75
78 2)
80
85
90
95
100
110
115
120
125
130
140
140
150
160
170
185
195
210
220
230

Series

d3

44
46
48
50
52
54
58
60
63
66
68
73
83
86 2)
88
95
100
105
110
120
125
130
135
140
150
150
160
170
180
200
210
220
230
240

Chamfer
b2

20

30

40

45
15
c1
c2
c2
max. max. max.
0,5
2

50
30

40
5

0,8

3
2

60
40

50
70
60

80

70

90

50

7,5
2,5

60

80

80

100
1

100

4
3

120
10

100

120

150

150

180

120
200
150
180

5
12,5

180
250

15

200

1
75,2
79,6
93,3
165,9
170
178,3
186,6
194,9
207,3
293
304
332
560
731
752
803
855
1089
1151
1659
1742
2433
2543
2654
3594
3733
3871
4147
5308
7153
7568
12130
12751
16049

Weight (8,8 kg/dm3 for red brass and bronze)


kg per 1000 pieces
Type A
Type B
For series b1
2
3
1
2
112,8
150,4
88,8
126,4
119,4
159,2
93,8
133,6
140
186,6
111,9
158,6
221,2
276,5
182,3
237,6
226,7
283,4
190,3
247
237,8
297,2
199,3
258,8
248,8
373,2
216,4
278,6
259,9
389,8
225,8
290,8
276,5
414,7
239,9
309,1
366
440
327
400
380
456
339
415
415
581
370
453
840
1120
625
905
877
1169
799
945
902
1203
821
971
1125
1446
896
1218
1197
1540
953
1295
1451
1814
1192
1554
1534
1918
1259
1642
2212
3318
1817
2370
2903
3483
1907
3068
3041
3649
2605
3213
3179
3815
2722
3358
3317
3981
2840
3503
4313
5391
3794
4513
4479
5599
3940
4686
4645
5806
4085
4859
6220
7464
4375
6448
6635
7962
5549
6876
8942
10730
7651
9440
11352
12614
8092
11876
14556
20216
12575
15001
15302
21253
13217
15768
17832
22290
16536
18319

3
164
173,4
205,2
292,9
303,7
318,2
403
420,7
447,3
474
491
619
1185
1237
1272
1539
1638
1917
2026
3476
3648
3820
3994
4167
5591
5806
6020
7692
8203
11228
13138
20661
21719
22777

Whenever possible, avoid sizes shown in round brackets.

Revision of January 2003

Previous editions

Addition of bore diameter d1 = 125.

2002-01, 2003-01

1)
2)

The dimensions of b1 indicated here have to be preferred. Other dimensions are allowed, but must not exceed 1,5 x d1.
Dimension not in accordance with DIN ISO 4379.

January 2002

Bushings for plain bearings

SN 364

with lubrication holes and grooves


for rotating bearings

Part 3
DIN ISO 12128 and parts of
DIN 1850-2 (of March 1969),
abridged and expanded

Dimensions in mm

1 Field of application
This standard enables the assignment of types of lubricant feeders and distributors to the copper-alloy plain bearing bushings
as in DIN ISO 4379 (in part from DIN 1850-2 of March 1969); it shows that the bushing types C and F can be designed with
bores, longitudinal and ring grooves or combinations of these.
Ring grooves in conjunction with longitudinal grooves must be used only in exceptional cases (e.g. greasing
through tappet), as they heavily reduce the load bearing capacity of the plain bearings; longitudinal and ring
grooves must always be provided in the stationary section; for the types stated in section 3 below, blank
drawings of the bushing types C and F with press-in chamfers of 45 and 15 (Y) are available for in-house
manufacture.

Design recommendation:
For cost reasons it is useful in many cases to utilise bushings made of maintenance-free graphitic sliding
material or of sintered bronze (see SN 359). In this case there will be no manufacturing cost for the various
lubricant groove types A to H.

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

2 Types of lubricant feed and distribution


(Selection from DIN ISO 12128)
Lubrication hole

Longitudinal groove

Ring groove

Type L

Type D

Type G

round off

round off
Hole d2 drilled together with locating element,
except for locating elements with ring grooves.
Indication in assembly drawing or assembly note
in bill of materials is required.
For types L, D, G

Type L

Type D

Bearing wall thickness


s

d2

e1

2,5

> 2

2,5

> 2,5

> 3

> 4

Type G

For types L, D, G

e2

0,8

2,5

1,8

0,8

10,5

1,2

2,5

1,2

14

1,6

3,5

1,6

19

12

4,5

> 5

7,5

28

2,5

20

7,5

2,5

> 7,5

10

10

38

3,2

28

11

3,2

12

49

35

14

> 10

+0,2
0

d1

+0,2
0

30

> 30

100

> 100

Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 364 Part 3 : 2002-01

3 Table of types and designations


Lubrication holes and grooves
Quantity: 1, 2 or 3

Type

D
and
L

according to
DIN ISO 12128

Tappet

according to
DIN 1850-2
of March 1969

D
and
G

according to
DIN ISO 12128

Front face

according to
DIN ISO 12128

Longitudinal groove closed on


both sides and lubric. hole centric
or off-center

according to
DIN 1850-2
of March 1969

Designation of a bushing for plain bearing, type F, according to


DIN ISO 4379 or a bush for cylinder, type B, acc. to SN 364-2, each
with a dimension of 18E9x24s6x20Y, type A (A), with one lubrication
hole (1) of type L (L) at a distance of x = 10 acc. to DIN ISO 12128
and made of CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:
Bushing ISO 4379 F-18E9x24s6x20YA1L10 - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Bushing SN 364 B-18E9x24s6x20YA1L10 - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ

Dimension x
for centric lubrication
hole is 1/2 x b1.

Designation of a bushing for plain bearing, type F, according to


DIN ISO 4379 or a bush for cylinder, type B, acc. to SN 364-2, each
with a dimension of 18E9x24s6x20Y, type B (B), with one longitudinal
groove (1) of type D (D) and one lubrication hole (1) of type L (L) at a
distance of x = 6 acc. to DIN ISO 1850-2 and made of
CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:
Bushing ISO 4379F18E9x24s6x20YB1D1L6- CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Bushing SN 364B18E9x24s6x20YB1D1L6 - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ

Dimension x for centric lubrication


hole is 1/2 x b1.

Longitudinal groove
closed on both sides

Longitudinal groove, two sides


closed, and one ring groove with
diagonal sides, centric or off-centre

Hub

Longitud. groove, open on


side opposite to press-in
side

according to
DIN ISO 12128

Example of designation:

Type and arrangement

Lubrication hole centric


or off-center

Type

Longitudinal groove, open


on press-in side

Lubricant
feeding and
distribution
through ...

b1
> 15 30 > 30 60 > 60 100
> 100
a
3
4
6
10
Designation of a bushing for plain bearing, type C, according to DIN ISO
4379 or a bushing for cylinder, type A, acc. to SN 364-2, each with a
dimension of 18E9x24s6x20Y, type C (C), with three longitudinal
grooves (3), type D (D), according to DIN ISO 12128, and made of
CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:
Bushing ISO 4379 C18E9x24s6x20YC3D CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Bushing SN 364 A18E9x24s6x20YC3D CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
b1
> 15 30 > 30 60 > 60 100
> 100
a
3
4
6
10

Designation of a bushing for plain bearing, type F, according to


DIN ISO 4379 or a bush for cylinder, type B, acc. to SN 364-2, each
with a dimension of 18E9x24s6x20Y, type F (F), with three longitudinal
grooves (3) of type D (D) and one ring groove (1) of type G (G) at a
distance of x = 6 acc. to DIN ISO 1850-2, and made of
CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:
Bushing ISO 4379F18E9x24s6x20YF3D1G6-CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Bushing SN 364B18E9x24s6x20YF3D1G6-CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ

Dimension x for centric ring groove


is 1/2 x b1.

b1
> 15 30 > 30 60 > 60 100
> 100
a
3
4
6
10
Designation of a bushing for plain bearing, type C, according to DIN ISO
4379 or a bushing for cylinder, type A, acc. to SN 364-2, each with a
dimension of 18E9x24s6x20Y, type G (G), with one longitudinal
groove (1), type D (D), according to DIN ISO 12128, and made of
CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:
Bushing ISO 4379 C18E9x24s6x20YG1D - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Bushing SN 364 A18E9x24s6x20YC3D - CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
b1
> 15 30 > 30 60 > 60 100
> 100
a
3
4
6
10
Designation of a bushing for plain bearing, type C, according to DIN ISO
4379 or a bushing for cylinder, type A, acc. to SN 364-2, each with a
dimension of 18E9x24s6x20Y, type H (H), with one longitudinal
groove (1), type D (D), according to DIN ISO 12128, and made of
CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ:
Bushing ISO 4379 C18E9x24s6x20YH1D CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
Bushing SN 364 A18E9x24s6x20YH1D CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ
b1
> 15 30 > 30 60 > 60 100
> 100
a
3
4
6
10

Material: CuSn7Zn4Pb7-C-GZ (GZ-CuSn7ZnPb) according to DIN EN 1982 or other materials as in SN 359.

January 2002

Semi-finished products kept in stock

SN 483

This printed overview of parts kept in stock is updated only when a new edition of the standards book is issued. For
this reason the marking of availability from stock given in the STOR master data is relevant.
Parts whose stockkeeping will be discontinued are not stated in this standard.
Section

Current mat. designat. Semi-finish. A


material number,
product
G
(former mat. designat.) acc. to
A
S355J2G3 1)
G
1.0570
A
(St 52-3)
G
C60+N
1.0601
(C 60 N)

DIN
1013

42CrMo4+QT
1.7225
(42 CrMo4 V)
This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

X20Cr13+QT800
1.0421
(X20 Cr13 V-II)
18CrNiMo7-6+FP
1.6587
(17 CrNiMo 6 BG)
S355J2G3 1)
1.0570
(St 52-3)
E295+C
1.0050+C
(St 50-2K)

Wire

DIN
7527-6

DIN EN
10278

E295+SH
1.0050+SH
(St 50-2SH)

(DIN 671)

X5CrNi18-10
1.4301*
(X5 CrNi 18-10)

DIN EN
10218
(DIN 177)

S355J2G3 1)
1.0570
(St 52-3)

DIN
1014

C45+C
1.0503
(C 45 K)

DIN
6880

S235JRG2
1.0038
(RSt 37-2)

DIN EN
10 048

C 75
1.0605

DIN EN
10140

Dimensions

in mm

Weight in kg/m
20
2,47
130
104

30
5,55
140
121

40
9,86
150
139

50
15,4
160
158

60
22,2
170
178

70
30,2
180
200

80
39,5
190
223

90
49,9
200
247

100
61,7

100

120

200

61,7

88,8

247

40

50

9,86

110
74,6

120
88,8

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

15,4

22,2

39,5

61,7

88,8

121

158

200

247

50

65

100

130

160

15,1

25,5

60,5

102

155

140

160

180

215

121

158

200

285

220

240

260

280

300

320

340

360

400

298

355

417

483

555

631

713

799

986

10

12

16

20

24

25

30

40

0,154

0,222

0,395

0,617

0,888

1,58

2,47

3,55

3,85

5,55

9,86

50

55

70

15,4

18,7

30,2

0,9

0,006

0,025

A
G
A
G
A
G
A
G
A
G

20
25
30
40
3,14
4,91
7,07
12,6
120
130 2) 140 2)
113
133
154
5x5
6x6
8x7
0,196
0,283
0,44
28 x 16
36 x 20
40 x 22
3,52
5,65
6,91
100 x 50
39,3

100
78,5

110
95

Dimension 16
also in S235JRG2

Strength values according to SN 359

dimensions
correspond to
the forging
dimensions as in
DIN 7527-6

tolerance range h9

20 x 3

30 x 3

0,471

0,707

0,1 x 200

0,157

Dimensions
50
19,6

10 x 8
0,628
45 x 25
8,83

60
28,3

1,4 mm also in St galvanized


2 mm also in D9 annealed
70
38,5

12 x 8
0,754
50 x 28
11

80
50,2

14 x 14
1,54
56 x 32
14,1

90
63,6

16 x 10
1,26
70 x 36
19,8

20 x 12
1,88
90 x 45
31,8

* This material designation will be kept as search criterion in STOR.

For footnotes see page 3


Continued on pages 2 and 3

Page 2
SN 483 : 2002-01
Section

Current mat. designat. Semi-finish. A


material number,
product
G
(former mat. designat.) acc. to

S235JRG2
1.0038
(RSt 37-2)

DIN
1017

S235JR
1.0037
(St 37-2)

3)

Plate

S235JRG2
1.0038
(RSt 37-2)

3)

S355J2G3
1.0570
(St 52-3)

4)

DIN EN
10029,
class A

CuZn37-R370
CW508L
(CuZn 37.F37)
Cu-DHP-R240
CW024A
(SF-Cu.F24)

Cast. f. hydr.
components

Bulb plate

Al99,0-H12
EN AW-1200
(Al99F10)
S235JR
1.0037
(St37-2)

DIN
1751

DIN EN
485

DIN
59220

Al

EN-GJS-400-15
EN-JS 1030
(GGG-40)

Weight in kg/m, for plates in kg/m


30 x 6

30 x 10

30 x 20

40 x 5

40 x 8

40 x 10

40 x 15

40 x 20

1,41

2,36

4,71

1,57

2,51

3,14

4,71

6,28

40 x 25

50 x 5

50 x 8

50 x 10

50 x 15

50 x 20

50 x 25

60 x 5

7,85

1,96

3,14

3,93

5,89

7,85

9,81

2,36

60 x 8

60 x 10

60 x 12

60 x 15

60 x 20

60 x 25

60 x 30

60 x 40

3,77

4,71

5,65

7,07

9,42

11,8

14,1

18,8

70 x 10

70 x 15

70 x 20

70 x 25

70 x 30

80 x 8

80 x 10

80 x 12

5,5

8,24

11

13,7

16,5

5,02

6,28

7,54

80 x 15

80 x 20

80 x 30

80 x 40

90 x 10

90 x 20

100 x 6

100 x 10

9,42

12,6

18,8

25,1

7,07

14,1

4,71

7,85

A 100 x 15

100 x 20

100 x 25

100 x 30

100 x 40

120 x 10

120 x 15

120 x 20

11,8

15,7

19,6

23,6

31,4

9,42

14,1

18,8

A 120 x 25

150 x 10

150 x 15

150 x 20

11,8

17,7

23,6

G
DIN EN
10131

23,6

0,5

1,5

3,9

7,85

11,8

15,7

10

12

15

23,6

31,4

39,3

47,1

62,8

78,5

94,2

117,8

20

25

30

40

45

50

60

70

80

150

157

196

235,5

314

353,3

392,5

471

549,5

628

1177

15

20

25

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

117,8

157

196

235,5

314

392,5

471

549,5

628

720

785

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

200

210

863,5

942

1040

1099

1177

1280

1334

1413

1570

1648

It is recommended processing the products made of


steel DC01 within 6 weeks after their placing at disposal.

0,1 x 400 2)

0,15 x 400 2)

0,2 x 400

0,5 x 600

1 x 1000

2 x 1000

0,84

1,26

1,68

4,2

8,4

16,8

0,7

6,2

8,9

17,8

2,7

5,4

T5

T8

T 10

41,25

64,8

80,5

T5

14,5

Panel sizes
Sheet thickness 0,5 to 2 1000 x 2000
Sheet thickness 3 to 4 1500 x 3000
Plate thickness 5 to 90 2000 x 6000
Plate thickness 100 to 140 2000 x 4000
Plate thickness 150 to 210 2000 x 3000
Dimensions correspond to plate thickness without bulbs.
Panel size 1500 x 3000

187 x 162

256 x 256

332 x 302

247

478

732

* This material designation will be kept as search criterion in STOR.

For footnotes see page 3

in mm

DC01+LC
1.0330
(St 12 03)

Dimensions

Page 3
SN 483 : 2002-01
Section

Current mat. designat. Semi-finish. A


material number,
product
G
(former mat. designat.) acc. to
St 37.0
1.0254

St 37.4NBK
1.0255

X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2
1.4571 h*
(X10 CrNiMoTi 18 10)

DIN
2448

Weight in kg/m
26,9 x 2,3

33,7 x 2,6

42,4 x 2,6

48,3 x 2,6

60,3 x 2,9

76,1 x 2,9

1,4

1,99

2,55

2,93

4,11

5,24

88,9 x 3,2

114,3 x 3,6

139,7 x 4

168,3 x 4,5

219,1 x 6,3

6,76

9,83

13,4

18,2

33,1

6x1

8x1

8 x 1,5

10 x 1,5

12 x 2

16 x 2

16 x 2,5

0,12

0,17

0,24

0,32

0,5

0,7

0,83

18 x 2

20 x 2,5

20 x 3

22 x 2

25 x 3

25 x 4

28 x 2

0,8

1,1

1,26

1,65

2,1

1,28

30 x 4

30 x 5

35 x 2,5

38 x 3

38 x 5

38 x 6

2,6

3,1

2,6

4,06

4,74

6x1

8x1

10 x 1,5

12 x 2

16 x 2,5

20 x 3

25 x 4

G
DIN EN ISO
A
1127
G
(DIN 2462)
A

0,12

0,18

0,32

0,5

0,85

1,28

2,1

30 x 5

38 x 3

38 x 6

42,4 x 2,6

48,3 x 2,6

48,3 x 8

60,3 x 2,9

3,13

2,6

4,74

2,59

2,93

7,93

4,17

60,3 x 10

76,1 x 2,9

76,1 x 12,5

88,9 x 3,2

88,9 x 14,2

114,3 x 3,6

12,6

5,24

19,9

6,86

26,6

9,98

DIN
2391

A
DIN EN
10056

equalsided

DIN EN
10056
unequalsided
DIN
1025/2
DIN
1026

25 x 25 x 3

30 x 30 x 3

1,12
60 x 60 x 6

1,36
7,09

50 x 50 x 5

70 x 70 x 7

50 x 50 x 7

3,77

5,15

80 x 80 x 8

7,38

80 x 80 x 10

9,63

11,9

150 x 150 x 12

17,8
75 x 55 x 7

40 x 40 x 4
2,42

60 x 60 x 8

5,42

A 100 x 100 x 12
G

IPB

in mm

S235JRG2
1.0038
(RSt37-2)

Dimensions

27,3
120 x 80 x 12

6,8

130 x 65 x 10

150 x 100 x 12

200 x 100 x 10

17,8

14,6

22,5

22,8

A 200 x 100 x 12
G

27,3

100

120

140

160

200

20,4

26,7

33,7

42,6

61,3

40

80

100

120

140

160

200

4,87

8,64

10,6

13,4

16

18,8

25,3

* This material designation will be kept as search criterion in STOR.

1)

Selection of material:
Whenever possible use has to be made of the stocked semi-finished products stated in this standard or of the materials
given in the SMS Demag selection of SN 359.
The designation "St" is permitted for steel components without particular strength requirements. In this case it is at the
maker's discretion to use semi-finished products such as sheet, round material C22, E295+C (St50-2) or tubing for the
manufacture. Suitability for welding must be ensured.
When materials like St50 are indicated, the above procedure is used by analogy; the melting and treatment processes can
be freely chosen, but on condition that the tensile strength of the specified basic material is achieved. Manufacture in
E295+C (St50-2), S355J2G3 (St52-3), C35+N (C35N) is possible.

2)

Cannot be ordered according to DIN.

3)

The stocked plates in S235JR (St37-2) have not been ultrasonically tested; if necessary, such testing of parts exposed to
high dynamic loads has to be indicated in the drawings as follows: ultrasonic testing acc. to SEL 072 Table 1, Class 2, with
certificate of ultrasonic testing and certificate DIN EN 10204 -3.1.B, or plates in S355J2G3 (St52-3) must be used instead.

4)

Stocked plates in S355J2G3 (St52-3) have been ultrasonically tested acc. to SEL 072 Table 1, Class 2, with certificate of
ultrasonic testing and certificate DIN EN 10204 - 3-1.B.

January 2002

Steel structural sections

SN 805

Selection

Section dimensions
in mm
a
b
s
r1
30x 20x 3
30
20
3
4
4
30
20
4
4
40x 20x 4
40
20
4
4
40x 25x 4
40
25
4
4
45x 30x 4
45
30
4
4,5
50x 30x 5
50
30
5
5
60x 30x 5
60
30
5
5
60x 40x 5
60
40
5
6
6
60
40
6
6
65x 50x 5
65
50
5
6
70x 50x 6
70
50
6
7
75x 50x 6
75
50
6
7
8
75
50
8
7
80x 40x 6
80
40
6
7
8
80
40
8
7
80x 60x 7
80
60
7
8
100x 50x 6 100
50
6
8
8 100
50
8
8
100x 65x 7 100
65
7
10
8 100
65
8
10
10 100
65
10
10
100x 75x 8 100
75
8
10
10 100
75
10
10
12 100
75
12
10
120x 80x 8 120
80
8
11
10 120
80
10
11
12 120
80
12
11
125x 75x 8 125
75
8
11
10 125
75
10
11
12 125
75
12
11
135x 65x 8 135
65
8
11
10 135
65
10
11
150x 75x 9 150
75
9
12
10 150
75
10
12
12 150
75
12
12
15 150
75
15
12
150x 90x10 150
90
10
12
12 150
90
12
12
15 150
90
15
12
150x100x10 150
100
10
12
12 150
100
12
12
200x100x10 200
100
10
15
12 200
100
12
15
15 200
100
15
15
200x150x12 200
150
12
15
15 200
150
15
15
For footnotes see page 4
Symbol

r2
2
2
2
2
2,25
2,5
2,5
3
3
3
3,5
3,5
3,5
3,5
3,5
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7,5
7,5
7,5
7,5
7,5

d1
8,4
8,4
11
11
13
13
17
17
17
21
21
23
23
23
23
23
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28

Leg bores *)
in mm
d2
w1
w2
4,3
17
4,3
17
4,3
22
6,4
22
8,4
25
8,4
30
8,4
35
11
35
11
35
13
35
13
40
13
35
13
35
11
45
11
45
17
45
13
55
13
55
21
55
21
55
21/17
55
23
55
23
55
23
55
23
50
80
23
50
80
23
50
80
23
50
85
23
50
85
23
50
85
21
55
95
21
55
95
23
60
105
23
60
105
23
60
105
23
60
105
25
60
105
25
60
105
25
60
105
25
60
105
25
60
105
25
65
150
25
65
150
25
65
150
25
65
150
25
65
150

w3
12
12
12
15
17
17
17
22
22
30
30
30
30
22
22
35
30
30
35
35
35
40
40
40
45
45
45
40
40
40
35
35
40
40
40
40
50
50
50
55
55
55
55
55
100
100

Bending axes
in cm
in cm3
ex
ey
wx
wy
0,99 0,502
0,621 0,292
1,03 0,541
0,807 0,379
1,47 0,48
1,42 0,393
1,36 0,623
1,47 0,619
1,48 0,74
1,91 0,91
1,73 0,741
2,86 1,11
2,17 0,684
4,07 1,14
1,96 0,972
4,25 2,02
2
1,01
5,03 2,38
1,99 1,25
5,14 3,19
2,23 1,25
7,01 3,78
2,44 1,21
8,01 3,81
2,52 1,29
10,4
4,95
2,85 0,884
8,73 2,44
2,94 0,963 11,4
3,16
2,51 1,52
10,7
6,34
3,51 1,05
13,8
3,89
3,6
1,13
18,2
5,08
3,23 1,51
16,6
7,53
3,27 1,55
18,9
8,54
3,36 1,63
23,2 10,5
3,1
1,87
19,3 11,4
3,19 1,95
23,8 14
3,27 2,03
28
16,5
3,83 1,87
27,6 13,2
3,92 1,95
34,1 16,2
4
2,03
40,4 19,1
4,14 1,68
29,6 11,6
4,23 1,76
36,5 14,3
4,31 1,84
43,2 16,9
4,78 1,34
33,4
8,75
4,88 1,42
41,3 10,8
5,26 1,57
46,7 13,1
5,31 1,61
51,6 14,5
5,4
1,69
61,3 17,1
5,52 1,81
75,2 21
5
2,04
53,3 21
5,08 2,12
63,3 24,8
5,21 2,23
77,7 30,4
4,81 2,34
54,2 25,9
4,89 2,42
64,4 30,7
6,93 2,01
93,2 26,3
7,03 2,1
111
31,3
7,16 2,22 137
38,5
6,08 3,61 119
70,5
6,21 3,73 147
86,9

Weight
in
kg / m
1,12
1,46
1,77
1,93
2,25
2,96
3,36
3,76
4,46
4,35
5,41
5,65
7,39
5,41
7,07
7,36
6,84
8,97
8,77
9,94
12,3
10,6
13
15,4
12,2
15
17,8
12,2
15
17,8
12,2
15
15,4
17
20,2
24,8
18,2
21,6
26,6
19
22,5
23
27,3
33,75
32
39,6

Continued on pages 2 to 4

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Round-edge unequal steel angle (hot rolled) as in DIN EN 10056-1.

Page 2
SN 805 : 2002-01
Round-edge equal steel angle (hot rolled) as in DIN EN 10056-1.
Y

Y
Symbol

Section dimensions
in mm
s
r1
3
3,5
3
3,5
4
3,5
3
5
4
5
4
5
4
6
5
6
4,5
7
4
7
5
7
6
7

20x 20x 3
25x 25x 3
4
30x 30x 3
4
35x 35x 4
40x 40x 4
5
45x 45x 4,5
50x 50x 4
5
6

a
20
25
25
30
30
35
40
40
45
50
50
50

60x 60x 5
6
8
65x 65x 7
70x 70x 6
7

60
60
60
65
70
70

5
6
8
7
6
7

75x 75x 6
8
80x 80x 8
10
90x 90x 7
8
9
10
100x100x 8
10
12
120x120x10
12
130x130x12
150x150x10
12
15
160x160x15
180x180x16
18
200x200x16
18
20
24

75
75
80
80
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
120
120
130
150
150
150
160
180
180
200
200
200
200

250x250x28
250
35
250
For footnotes see page 4

Leg bores *)
in mm
w 1 4)
12
15
15
17
17
18
22
22
25
30
30
30

w2
-

Bending axes
in cm
in cm3
ex=ey
wx=wy
0,598
0,279
0,723
0,452
0,762
0,586
0,835
0,649
0,878
0,85
1
1,18
1,12
1,55
1,16
1,91
1,25
2,2
1,36
2,46
1,4
3,05
1,45
3,61

Weight in
kg/m

r2
1,75
1,75
1,75
2,5
2,5
2,5
3
3
3,5
3,5
3,5
3,5

d
4,3
6,4
6,4
8,4
8,4
11
11
11
13
13
13
13

8
8
8
9
9
9

4
4
4
4,5
4,5
4,5

17
17
17
21
21
21

35
35
35
35
40
40

1,64
1,69
1,77
1,85
1,93
1,97

4,45
5,29
6,89
7,18
7,27
8,41

4,57
5,42
7,09
6,83
6,38
7,38

6
8
8
10
7
8
9
10
8
10
12
10
12
12
10
12
15
15
16
18
16
18
20
24

9
9
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
14
16
16
16
17
18
18
18
18
18
18

4,5
4,5
5
5
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,5
6
6
6
6,5
6,5
7
8
8
8
8,5
9
9
9
9
9
9

23
23
23
23
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28

40
40
45
45
50
50
50
50
55
55
55
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
60 / 65
65
65
65
65 / 70

80
80
90
105
105
105
115
135
135
150
150
150
150

2,05
2,14
2,26
2,34
2,45
2,5
2,54
2,58
2,74
2,82
2,9
3,31
3,4
3,64
4,03
4,12
4,25
4,49
5,02
5,1
5,52
5,6
5,68
5,84

8,41
11
12,6
15,4
14,1
16,1
17,9
19,8
19,9
24,6
29,1
36
42,7
50,4
56,9
67,7
83,5
95,6
130
145
162
181
199
235

6,85
8,99
9,63
11,9
9,61
10,9
12,2
13,4
12,2
15
17,8
18,2
21,6
23,6
23
27,3
33,8
36,2
43,5
48,6
48,5
54,3
59,9
71,1

28
35

18
18

9
9

28
28

75
75

200
200

7,24
7,5

433
529

0,882
1,12
1,45
1,36
1,78
2,09
2,42
2,97
3,06
3,06
3,77
4,47

104
128

Page 3
SN 805: 2002-01
Wide I-beams with parallel flange surfaces, IPB series as in DIN 1025-2.

Symbol

I PB
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
360
400
450
500
550
600
650

h
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340
360
400
450
500
550
600
650

b
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300

Section dimensions
in mm
s
t
6
10
6,5
11
7
12
8
13
8,5
14
9
15
9,5
16
10
17
10
17,5
10,5
18
11
19
11,5
20,5
12
21,5
12,5
22,5
13,5
24
14
26
14,5
28
15
29
15,5
30
16
31

r
12
12
12
15
15
18
18
21
24
24
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27

e
56
74
92
104
122
134
152
164
177
196
208
225
243
261
298
344
390
438
486
534

d
13
17
21
23
25
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28

Leg bores
in mm
w1
w2
56
66
76
86
100
110
120
96
106
110
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120

w3
35
40
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45

Bending axes
in cm3
wx
wy
89,9
33,5
144
52,9
216
78,5
311
111
426
151
570
200
736
258
938
327
1150
395
1380
471
1680
571
1930
616
2160
646
2400
676
2880
721
3550
781
4290
842
4970
872
5700
902
6480
932

Weight in
kg/m
20,4
26,7
33,7
42,6
51,2
61,3
71,5
83,2
93
103
117
127
134
142
155
171
187
199
212
225

Medium-flange I-beams with parallel flange surfaces, IPB series (hot rolled) as in DIN 1025-5.

Symbol

I PE

h
b
80
80
46
100
100
55
120
120
64
140
140
73
160
160
82
180
180
91
200
200
100
220
220
110
240
240
120
270
270
135
300
300
150
330
330
160
360
360
170
400
400
180
450
450
190
500
500
200
550
550
210
600
600
220
For footnotes see page 4

Section dimensions
in mm
s
3,8
4,1
4,4
4,7
5
5,3
5,6
5,9
6,2
6,6
7,1
7,5
8
8,6
9,4
10,2
11,1
12

t
5,2
5,7
6,3
6,9
7,4
8
8,5
9,2
9,8
10,2
10,7
11,5
12,7
13,5
14,6
16
17,2
19

r
5
7
7
7
9
9
12
12
15
15
15
18
18
21
21
21
24
24

e
59
74
93
112
127
146
159
177
190
219
248
271
298
331
378
426
467
514

Leg bores 3)
in mm
d
w
Max. dim1)
6,4
26
8,4
30
8,4
36
11
40
13 **)
44
13
50
13
56
17
60
17
68
21/17
72
23
80
25/23
86
25
90
28/25
96
28
106
28
110
28
120
28
120

Bending axes
in cm3
wx
20
34,2
53
77,3
109
146
194
252
324
429
557
713
904
1160
1500
1930
2440
3070

wy
3,69
5,79
8,65
12,3
16,7
22,2
28,5
37,3
47,3
62,2
80,5
98,5
123
146
176
214
254
308

Weight in
kg/m
6
8,1
10,4
12,9
15,8
18,8
22,4
26,2
30,7
36,1
42,2
49,1
57,1
66,3
77,6
90,7
106
122

Page 4
SN 805: 2002-01
Normal U-sections as in DIN 1026-1.

Slopes of inner flanges:


up to h = 300 mm : 8%
above h = 300 mm : 5%
Section dimensions
in mm

Symbol

U
30 x 15
30
40 x 20
40
50 x 25
50
60
65
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
350
380
400

h
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
65
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
350
380
400

b
15
33
20
35
25
38
30
42
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
100
100
102
110

s
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
5,5
6
6
7
7
7,5
8
8,5
9
9,5
10
10
10
14
14
13,5
14

t=r1
4,5
7
5,5
7
6
7
6
7,5
8
8,5
9
10
10,5
11
11,5
12,5
13
14
15
16
17,5
16
16
18

c
7,5
16,5
10
17,5
12,5
19
15
21
22,5
25
27,5
30
32,5
35
37,5
40
42,5
45
47,5
50
43
43
44
48

Leg bores 3) *)
in mm
d
r2
2
3,5
2,5
3,5
3
3,5
3
4
4
4,5
4,5
5
5,5
5,5
6
6,5
6,5
7
7,5
8
8,75
8
8
9

e
12
1
18
11
25
20
35
33
47
64
82
97
116
133
151
166
185
201
216
232
247
283
313
325

Grtmae1) 2)

4,3
8,4
6,4
8,4
8,4
11
8,4
11
13 **)
13
17/13
17
21/17
21
23/21
23
25/23
25
25
28
28
28
28
28

1)

w
10
20
11
20
16
20
18
25
25
30
30
35
35
40
40
45
45
50
50
55
58
58
60
60

in cm
ey
0,52
1,31
0,67
1,33
0,81
1,37
0,91
1,42
1,45
1,55
1,6
1,75
1,84
1,92
2,01
2,14
2,23
2,36
2,53
2,7
2,6
2,4
2,38
2,65

Bending axes
in cm3
wx
1,69
4,26
3,79
7,05
6,73
10,6
10,5
17,7
26,5
41,2
60,7
86,4
116
150
191
245
300
371
448
535
679
734
829
1020

wy
0,39
2,68
0,86
3,08
1,48
3,75
2,16
5,07
6,36
8,49
11,1
14,8
18,3
22,4
27
33,6
39,6
47,7
57,2
67,8
80,6
75
78,7
102

Weight in
kg/m
1,74
4,27
2,87
4,87
3,86
5,59
5,07
7,09
8,64
10,6
13,4
16
18,8
22
25,3
29,4
33,2
37,9
41,8
46,2
59,5
60,6
63,1
71,8

The same tracing dimensions can be used for rivets and screws having smaller diameters than the max. diameters
stated here.
2)
When two d values are stated for a section, the smaller one is used for screws for high-tensile connections as in
DIN 6914. The bigger diameter applies to the rivet.
3)
Tracing dimensions for bars and rolled steel sections as in 997.
4)
When two tracing dimensions for w1 are stated for a section, the greater one is used for screws for high-tensile
connections as in DIN 6914.
*) Values shown in italics are not standardised. They have been taken from the booklet on "Stahlbau-Profile" (steel structural
sections), 23rd edition, by Verlag Stahleisen GmbH.
)
** Here the use of standardised screws for high-tensile connections as in DIN 6914 is not possible.
Other sections:
-

Narrow I-beams as in DIN 1025-1


Wide I-beams with parallel flanges, series IPBI (HE-A) as in DIN 1025-3
Wide I-beams with parallel flanges, series IPBv (HE-M) as in DIN 1025-4
Round-edged zeds as in DIN 1027
Round-edged T-sections as in DIN EN 10055
Crane rails as in DIN 536-1
Square and rectangular tubing as in DIN 10210-2
Square and rectangular tubing as in DIN 10219-2

January 2002

Standard pipe and tube dimensions


from the pipe/tube classes of SN 901

SN 553

Selection
Dimensions in mm

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Steel pipes/tubes for systems with a nominal pressure PN of 16 bar


Pipe outside dia.

Wall thickness

Pipe inside dia.

mm

mm

10
12

Standard, current
mat. designat.,
material number,
(former mat. design.)

Weight

mm

Sectional area
of flow
cm

1,5
2

7
8

0,39
0,50

0,314
0,493

16
18
20
22

2
2
2,5
2

12
14
15
18

1,13
1,54
1,77
2,55

0,691
0,789
1,08
0,986

25
28
30
35

3
2
4
2,5

19
24
22
30

2,84
4,52
3,80
7,07

1,63
1,28
2,57
2,00

38
42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3

3
2,6
2,6
2,9
2,9
3,2
3,6
4
4,5

32
37,2
43,1
54,5
70,3
82,5
107,1
131,7
159,3

8,04
10,87
14,59
23,33
38,82
53,46
90,09
136,23
199,31

2,59
2,55
2,93
4,11
5,24
6,76
9,83
13,4
18,2

219,1

4,5

210,1

346,69

23,8

DIN 2458

273

263

543,25

33,0

St 37.0

323,9

5,6

312,7

767,97

44,0

1.0254

kg / m

Technical terms
of delivery

DIN 2391
St 37.4 NBK
(NBK = normalised
bright-annealed
cold-drawn)

DIN 2391-2

1.0255

DIN 2448
St 37.0

DIN 1629

1.0254

DIN 1626

Stainless steel pipes/tubes for systems with a nominal pressure PN of 16 bar


10

1,5

0,39

0,314

12

16

2,5

0,50

0,493

11

0,95

0,832

18

14

1,54

0,789

20

14

1,54

1,26

22

18

2,55

0,990

25

17

2,27

2,07

28

24

4,52

1,28

30

20

3,14

3,08

35

2,5

30

7,07

2,00

38

32

8,04

2,59

42,4

2,6

37,2

10,87

2,55

48,3

2,6

43,1

14,59

2,93

60,3

2,9

54,5

23,33

4,11

76,1

2,9

70,3

38,82

5,24

88,9

3,2

82,5

53,46

6,76

114,3

3,6

107,1

90,09

9,83

139,7

2,6

134,5

142,08

168,3

162,3

206,88

12,2

219,1

213,1

356,66

16,0

273

267

559,90

20,0

323,9
4
315,9
783,77
* This material designation will be kept as search criterion in STOR.

8,79

31,6

DIN EN ISO 1127


seamless
(previous DIN 2462)
1.4571 h *
Tolerance D4/T3
DIN 17458

DIN EN ISO 1127


seamless
(previous DIN 2462)
1.4571 h *
Tolerance D3/T3
DIN EN ISO 1127
welded
(previous DIN 2463)
1.4571 d1 *
Tolerance D2/T2

DIN 17457

Page 2
SN 553 : 2002-01
Steel pipes/tubes for hydraulic systems with a nominal pressure PN of 250 bar
Pipe outside dia.

Wall thickness

Pipe inside dia.

Weight

mm

Sectional area
of flow
cm

mm

mm

10
12
16
20
25
30
38
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3

1,5
2
2
2,5
3
4
5
6,3
8
10
11
14,2

7
8
12
15
19
22
28
35,7
44,3
56,1
66,9
85,9

0,39
0,50
1,13
1,77
2,84
3,80
6,16
10,01
15,41
24,72
35,15
57,95

0,314
0,493
0,691
1,08
1,63
2,57
4,07
6,53
10,3
16,3
21,1
35,0

kg / m

Standard, current
mat. designat.,
material number,
(former mat. design.)

Technical terms
of delivery

DIN 2391
St 37.4 NBK
(normalised brightannealed colddrawn)

DIN 2391-2

1.0255
DIN 2448
St 52.4

DIN 1630

1.0581

Stainless steel pipes/tubes for hydraulic systems with a nominal pressure PN of 250 bar
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3

1,5
2
2,5
3
4
5
6
8
10
12,5
14,2
20

7
8
11
14
17
20
26
32,3
40,3
51,1
60,5
74,3

0,39
0,50
0,95
1,54
2,27
3,14
5,31
8,19
12,76
20,51
28,75
43,36

0,314
0,493
0,832
1,26
2,07
3,08
4,74
7,95
12,4
19,6
26,2
46,5

DIN EN ISO 1127


(previous DIN 2462)
1.4571 h *
Tolerance D4/T3

DIN 17458

DIN EN ISO 1127


(previous DIN 2462)
1.4571 h *
Tolerance D2/T2

Steel pipes/tubes for hydraulic systems with a nominal pressure PN of 315 bar
Weight

Pipe outside dia.

Wall thickness

Pipe inside dia.

mm

mm

mm

cm

kg / m

10
12
16
20
25
30
38
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3

1,5
2
2,5
3
4
5
6
8
10
12,5
14,2
20

7
8
11
14
17
20
26
32,3
40,3
51,1
60,5
74,3

0,39
0,50
0,95
1,54
2,27
3,14
5,31
8,19
12,76
20,51
28,75
43,36

0,314
0,493
0,832
1,26
2,07
3,08
4,74
7,95
12,4
19,6
26,2
46,5

Sectional area
of flow

Standard, current
mat. designat.,
material number,
(former mat. design.)

Technical terms
of delivery

DIN 2391
St 37.4 NBK
(normalised brightannealed colddrawn)

DIN 2391-2

1.0255
DIN 2448
St 52.4

DIN 1630

1.0581

Stainless steel pipes/tubes for hydraulic systems with a nominal pressure PN of 315 bar
10
12
16
20

1,5
2
2,5
3

7
8
11
14

0,39
0,50
0,95
1,54

0,314
0,493
0,832
1,26

25
30
38
48,3

4
5
6
8

17
20
26
32,3

2,27
3,14
5,31
8,19

2,07
3,08
4,74
7,95

60,3
10
40,3
12,76
76,1
12,5
51,1
20,51
88,9
14,2
60,5
28,75
114,3
20
74,3
43,36
* This material designation will be kept as search criterion in STOR.

12,4
19,6
26,2
46,5

DIN EN ISO 1127


seamless
(previous DIN 2462)
1.4571 h *
Tolerance D4/T3
DIN EN ISO 1127
seamless
(previous DIN 2462)
1.4571 h *
Tolerance D2/T2

DIN 17458

January 2002

Pipe couplings

SN 456

Selection
Dimensions in mm
Selection of couplings, adapted to pipe dimensions of the pipe classes as in SN 901
Straight male stud
Reducing male stud
Rotary couplings
couplings with U-rings
couplings with U-rings
GUV
GUR
SKV
SN 751
SN 877

Welding cone
couplings
(AVIT)

PN 1)

Throttle-free adjustable
rotary couplings
SV
SN 879

Thread
of the
union nut

d4
d2
bar
G 1/4A
10x1,5
M18 x 1,5
315
G 3/8A
12x2
M20 x 1,5
16x2
250
G 1/2A
M24 x 1,5
16x2,5
315
20x2,5
250
G 3/4A
M30 x 2
20x3
315
25x3
250
G1 A
M36 x 2
25x4
315
30x4
250
G1 1/4A
M42 x 2
30x5
315
38x3
16
38x5 G1 1/2A 250 M52 x 2
38x6
315
d1

SN 751 GUV...
10 x 1,5 G 1/4A
10 x 1,5 G 3/8A
12 x 2 G 3/8A
16 x 2 G 1/2A
16 x 2,5 G 1/2A
20 x 2,5 G 3/4A
20 x 3 G 3/4A
25 x 3 G1 A
25 x 4 G1 A
30 x 4 G1 1/4A
30 x 5 G1 1/4A
38 x 3 G1 1/2A
38 x 5 G1 1/2A
38 x 6 G1 1/2A

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


Weight SN 751 GUR... d 3 Weight SN 877 SKV...
0,09
10 x 1,5 G 1/4A
0,11
10 x 1,5 G 3/8A
0,12 12 x 2 G 1/4A G 1/4A 0,11 12 x 2 G 3/8A
16 x 2 G 3/8A
16 x 2 G 1/2A
0,2
G 3/8A 0,17
16 x 2,5G 3/8A
16 x 2,5 G 1/2A
20 x 2,5G 1/2A
20 x 2,5 G 3/4A
0,32
G 1/2A 0,3
20 x 3 G 1/2A
20 x 3 G 3/4A
25 x 3 G 3/4A
25 x 3 G1 A
0,56
G 3/4A 0,54
25 x 4 G 3/4A
25 x 4 G1 A
30 x 4 G1 A
30 x 4 G1 1/4A
0,78
G1 A 0,72
30 x 5 G1 A
30 x 5 G1 1/4A
38 x 3 G1 1/4A
38 x 3 G1 1/2A
1,16 38 x 5 G1 1/4A G1 1/4A 1,1 38 x 5 G1 1/2A
38 x 6 G1 1/4A
38 x 6 G1 1/2A

Straight weld-on couplings

Straight couplings

GAV

GV

Weight
0,18
0,26
0,27
0,57
0,82
1,18
1,94
3,45

SN 879 SV... Weight


10 x 1,5 G 1/4A 0,16
10 x 1,5 G 3/8A 0,2
12 x 2
0,35
16 x 2
0,4
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
0,9
20 x 3
25 x 3
1,1
25 x 4
30 x 4
1,7
30 x 5
38 x 3
38 x 5
1,95
38 x 6

Equal T couplings

Elbow couplings

TV

WV

SN 752
Welding cone couplings
(AVIT)

PN 1)
d1
10 x 1,5
12 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 5
38 x 3
38 x 5
38 x 6

bar
315
250
315
250
315
250
315
250
315
16
250
315

Thread
of the
union nut
d4
M 18 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2

For footnotes see page 7

SN 752 GAV...
10 x 1,5
12 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 5
38 x 3
38 x 5
38 x 6

Weight
0,08
0,12
0,18
0,3
0,52
0,66
1,1

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


SN 752 GV...
Weight SN 752 TV...
Weight SN 752 WV...
10 x 1,5
0,14
10 x 1,5
0,22
10 x 1,5
12 x 2
0,17
12 x 2
0,28
12 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2
0,29
0,49
16 x 2,5
16 x 2,5
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
0,47
0,74
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 3
0,83
1,49
25 x 4
25 x 4
25 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 4
1,2
1,72
30 x 5
30 x 5
30 x 5
38 x 3
38 x 3
38 x 3
38 x 5
1,67
38 x 5
2,7
38 x 5
38 x 6
38 x 6
38 x 6

Weight
0,15
0,19
0,33
0,51
0,9
1,22
1,88

Continued on pages 2 to 7

Page 2
SN 456: 2002-01
Straight bulkhead
couplings
GSV

Angular bulkhead
couplings
WSV

Pressure test
and vent couplings
DEV

Pressure-gauge
couplings
MAV

SN 732

SN 753

Welding cone couplings


(AVIT)

PN 1)
d1
10 x 1,5
12 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 5
38 x 3
38 x 5
38 x 6

bar
315
250
315
250
315
250
315
250
315
16
250
315

Thread
of the
union nut
d4
M18 x 1,5
M20 x 1,5
M24 x 1,5
M30 x 2
M36 x 2
M42 x 2
M52 x 2

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


SN 732 GSV... Weight SN 732 WSV... Weight SN 753 DEV... Weight SN 753 MAV-S.. d 3 Wght.
10 x 1,5
0,2
10 x 1,5
0,21
10 x 1,5
0,25 10 x 1,5 G 1/2A
0,14
G 1/2A
12 x 2
0,27
12 x 2
0,28
12 x 2
0,28 12 x 2 G 1/2A
0,15
16 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2
0,4
0,44
0,38
16 x 2,5
16 x 2,5
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
0,64
0,51
0,62
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 3
1,05
0,9
0,89
25 x 4
25 x 4
25 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 4
30 x 4
1,33
1,22
1,11
30 x 5
30 x 5
30 x 5
38 x 3
38 x 3
38 x 3
2,15
1,88
1,73
38 x 5
38 x 5
38 x 5
38 x 6
38 x 6
38 x 6
-

Welding cone
AK
SN 807

SN 807 AK ...
10 x 1,5
12 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2,5
20 x 2,5
20 x 3
25 x 3

d1
10
12
16
20
25

Reducing
welding cones
ARK
SN 807

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


Pertaining
O-rings
Pertaining continued
d 2 Wght. SN 430- ...
pipes
SN 807 AK ... d 1
7 0,02
7,5 x 1,5
10 x 1,5
25 x 4
25
8 0,02
9 x 1,5
12 x 2
30 x 4
30
12 0,03
16 x 2
30 x 5
12 x 2
11 0,04
16 x 2,5
38 x 3
38
15 0,06
20 x 2,5
38 x 5
16,3 x 2,4
14 0,06
20 x 3
38 x 6
19 0,09 20,3 x 2,4
25 x 3
-

Pertaining
O-rings
Pertaining
d 2 Wght. SN 430- ...
pipes
17 0,11
20,3 x 2,4
25 x 4
22 0,14
30 x 4
25,3 x 2,4
20 0,17
30 x 5
32 0,22
38 x 4
33,3 x 2,4
28 0,25
38 x 5
26 0,28
38 x 6
-

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)

SN 807 ARK ...


12/10 x 1,5
16/10 x 1,5
16/12 x 2
20/10 x 1,5
20/12 x 2
20/16 x 2
20/16 x 2,5
25/10 x 1,5
25/12 x 2
25/16 x 2
25/16 x 2,5
25/20 x 2,5
25/20 x 3
30/10 x 1,5
30/12 x 2
30/16 x 2

For footnotes see page 7

d1
10
12
10
12
16
10
12
16
20
10
12
16

Pertaining
O-rings
d 2 Wght. SN 430- ...
0,02
9 x 1,5
7
0,03
12 x 2
8 0,04
7
8 0,07
16,3 x 2,4
12
11 0,08
7 0,13
8 0,15
12
20,3 x 2,4
11 0,11
15
14 0,12
7
0,22
8
25,3 x 2,4
12 0,17

Pertaining continued
pipes
SN 807 ARK ...
30/16 x 2,5
10 x 1,5
30/20 x 2,5
12 x 2
30/20 x 3
10 x 1,5
30/25 x 3
12 x 2
30/25 x 4
16 x 2
38/10 x 1,5
16 x 2,5
38/12 x 2
10 x 1,5
38/16 x 2
12 x 2
38/16 x 2,5
16 x 2
38/20 x 2,5
16 x 2,5
38/20 x 3
20 x 2,5
38/25 x 3
20 x 3
38/25 x 4
10 x 1,5
38/30 x 4
12 x 2
38/30 x 5
16 x 2
-

d1 d2
16 11
15
20
14
19
25
17
10 7
12 8
12
16
11
15
20
14
19
25
17
22
30
20
-

Pertaining
O-rings
Pertaining
Wght. SN 430 ...
pipes
16 x 2,5
0,17
20 x 2,5
25,3 x 2,4 20 x 3
25 x 3
0,16
25 x 4
10 x 1,5
0,32
12 x 2
16 x 2
16 x 2,5
0,28
20 x 2,5
33,4 x 2,4
20 x 3
25 x 3
0,27
25 x 4
30 x 4
0,26
30 x 5
-

Page 3
SN 456 : 2002-01
Straight male stud coupling
with profile packing
GE-R-ED
SN 883

Tapered pipe reducer


with sealing cone
RED
SN 882

Pipe couplings
(ERMETO)

PN 1)

Thread of the
union nut

d1
6
8

bar

d4
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5

10

630

M 18 x 1,5

12

M 20 x 1,5

16

M 24 x 1,5

20

M 30 x 2
400

25

M 36 x 2

30

M 42 x 2

38
6
8
10
12

315

315

M 52 x 2
M 12 x 1,5
M 14 x 1,5 1)
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5

18

M 26 x 1,5

22

M 30 x 2

28

M 36 x 2
160

35

M 45 x 2

42

M 52 x 2

1)

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


SN 883 GE ...
6 SR ED
8 SR ED
10 SR ED
10 S/R 1/4 ED
12 SR ED
12 S/R 1/4 ED
16 SR ED
16 S/R 3/8 ED
20 SR ED
20 S/R 1/2 ED
25 SR ED
25 S/R 3/4 ED
30 SR ED
30 S/R1 ED
38 SR ED
38 S/R1 1/4 ED
6 LR ED
8 LR ED
10 LR ED
12 LR ED
12 L/R 1/4 ED
18 LR ED
18 L/R 3/8 ED
22 LR ED
22 L/R 1/2 ED
28 LR ED
28 L/R 3/4 ED
35 LR ED
35 L/R1 ED
42 LR ED
42 L/R1 1/4 ED
-

d2
G 1/4A
G 1/4A
G 3/8A
G 1/4A
G 3/8A
G 1/4A
G 1/2A
G 3/8A
G 3/4A
G 1/2A
G1 A
G 3/4A
G1 1/4A
G1 A
G1 1/2A
G1 1/4A
G 1/8A
G 1/4A
G 1/4A
G 3/8A
G 1/4A
G 1/2A
G 3/8A
G 3/4A
G 1/2A
G1 A
G 3/4A
G1 1/4A
G1 A
G1 1/2A
G1 1/4A
-

Weight
0,053
0,062
0,087
0,073
0,099
0,093
0,161
0,152
0,259
0,25
0,485
0,461
0,659
0,6
0,904
0,89
0,024
0,043
0,047
0,068
0,058
0,135
0,13
0,188
0,179
0,27
0,268
0,426
0,405
0,582
0,57
-

SN 882 RED ...


10/ 8 S
12/ 8 S
12/10 S
16/ 8 S
16/10 S
16/12 S
20/10 S
20/12 S
20/16 S
25/10 S
25/12 S
25/16 S
25/20 S
30/12 S
30/16 S
30/20 S
30/25 S
38/16 S
38/20 S
38/25 S
38/30 S
12/10 L
18/10 L
18/12 L
22/10 L
22/12 L
22/18 L
28/10 L
28/12 L
28/18 L
28/22 L
35/18 L
35/22 L
35/28 L
42/22 L
42/28 L
42/35 L

d2
8
10
8
10
12
10
12
16
10
12
16
20
12
16
20
25
16
20
25
30
10
12
12
10
12
18
10
12
18
22
18
22
28
22
28
35

O-ring
Weight SN 430 -...
0,078 7,5 x 1,5
0,093
9 x 1,5
0,107
0,148
0,155
0,206
0,213
0,259
0,332
0,334
0,373
0,436
0,443
0,487
0,536
0,673
0,77
0,812
0,85
0,878
0,07
0,128
0,172
0,178
0,186
0,244
0,299
0,308
0,383

12 x 2
16,3 x 2,4

20,3 x 2,4

25,3 x 2,4

33,3 x 2,4
9 x 1,5
15 x 1,5
20 x 2

26 x 2

0,391
0,416 32 x 2,5
0,426
0,665
0,68 38 x 2,5
0,695

correction of the dimension

For footnotes see page 7

Page 4
SN 456 : 2002-01
Straight bulkhead
couplings
SV

Angular bulkhead
couplings
WSV
SN 517

Weld-in bulkhead
couplings
ESV

Weld-on pipe
couplings
AS
SN 789

Pipe couplings
(ERMETO)

PN 1)
d1
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
6
8
10
12
18
22
28
35
42

bar
630

400
315

315

160

Thread
of the
union nut

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)

d4
SN 517 SV ...
M 14 x 1,5
6S
M 16 x 1,5
8S
M 18 x 1,5
10 S
M 20 x 1,5
12 S
M 24 x 1,5
16 S
M 30 x 2
20 S
M 36 x 2
25 S
M 42 x 2
30 S
M 52 x 2
38 S
M 12 x 1,5
6L
M 14 x 1,5
8L
M 16 x 1,5
10 L
M 18 x 1,5
12 L
M 26 x 1,5
18 L
M 30 x 2
22 L
M 36 x 2
28 L
M 45 x 2
35 L
M 52 x 2
42 L

Weight SN 517 WSV ... Weight SN 517 ESV ...


0,103
6S
0,11
6S
0,132
8S
0,143
8S
0,179
10 S
0,196
10 S
0,216
12 S
0,233
12 S
0,343
16 S
0,391
16 S
0,569
20 S
0,612
20 S
0,922
25 S
1,048
25 S
1,106
30 S
1,364
30 S
1,805
38 S
2,059
38 S
0,061
6L
0,072
6L
0,084
8L
0,095
8L
0,109
10 L
0,12
10 L
0,136
12 L
0,153
12 L
0,334
18 L
0,374
18 L
0,43
22 L
0,49
22 L
0,566
28 L
0,679
28 L
0,858
35 L
1,041
30 L
1,236
42 L
1,511
42 L

Adjustable
T connecting sockets
ET

Adjustable 45 angular
connecting sockets
EV
SN 884

d8
20
22
25
28
35
38
45
50
60
18
20
22
25
32
36
40
50
60

Weight SN 789 AS ...


0,174
6S
0,208
8S
0,268
10 S
0,324
12 S
0,584
16 S
0,737
20 S
1,151
25 S
1,348
30 S
1,97
38 S
0,126
6L
0,156
8L
0,184
10 L
0,234
12 L
0,469
18 L
0,572
22 L
0,645
28 L
1,025
35 L
1,475
42 L

d2
11
13
15
17
21
26
31
36
44
10
12
14
16
22
27
32
40
46

Weight
0,039
0,053
0,073
0,092
0,151
0,241
0,438
0,538
0,789
0,022
0,031
0,042
0,054
0,13
0,184
0,265
0,386
0,56

Adjustable
angular connection sockets
EW

Pipe couplings
(ERMETO)

PN 1)
d1
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
6
8
10
12
18
22
28
35
42

bar
630

400
315

315

160

Thread
of the
union nut
d4
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2
M 12 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 26 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 45 x 2
M 52 x 2

SN 884 ET ...
6S
8S
10 S
12 S
16 S
20 S
25 S
30 S
38 S
6L
8L
10 L
12 L
18 L
22 L
28 L
35 L
42 L

For footnotes see page 7

Weight
0,096
0,121
0,168
0,208
0,377
0,575
1,071
1,356
2,06
0,059
0,082
0,105
0,139
0,342
0,453
0,659
0,965
1,464

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


O-ring
O-ring
SN 430 - ... SN 884 EV ... Weight SN 430 - ... SN 884 EW ... Weight
4 x 1,5
6S
0,064
4 x 1,5
6S
0,064
6 x 1,5
8S
0,084
6 x 1,5
8S
0,084
7,5 x 1,5
10 S
0,115
7,5 x 1,5
10 S
0,115
9 x 1,5
12 S
0,142
9 x 1,5
12 S
0,142
12 x 2
16 S
0,26
12 x 2
16 S
0,26
16,3 x 2,4
20 S
0,406 16,3 x 2,4
20 S
0,406
20,3 x 2,4
25 S
0,747 20,3 x 2,4
25 S
0,747
25,3 x 2,4
30 S
0,957 25,3 x 2,4
30 S
0,957
33,3 x 2,4
38 S
1,429 33,3 x 2,4
38 S
1,429
4 x 1,5
6L
0,043
4 x 1,5
6L
0,043
6 x 1,5
8L
0,057
6 x 1,5
8L
0,057
7,5 x 1,5
10 L
0,073
7,5 x 1,5
10 L
0,073
9 x 1,5
12 L
0,1
9 x 1,5
12 L
0,1
15 x 2
18 L
0,241 15 x 2
18 L
0,241
20 x 2
22 L
0,33
20 x 2
22 L
0,33
26 x 2
28 L
0,493 26 x 2
28 L
0,493
32 x 2,5
35 L
0,69
32 x 2,5
35 L
0,69
38 x 2,5
42 L
1,081 38 x 2,5
42 L
1,081

Oring
SN 430 - ...
4 x 1,5
6 x 1,5
7,5 x 1,5
9 x 1,5
12 x 2
16,3 x 2,4
20,3 x 2,4
25,3 x 2,4
33,3 x 2,4
4 x 1,5
6 x 1,5
7,5 x 1,5
9 x 1,5
15 x 2
20 x 2
26 x 2
32 x 2,5
38 x 2,5

Page 5
SN 456 : 2002-01
Straight male studs
with sealing cones
EGE R ED
SN 878

Straight male stud couplings


with metric threads
GE M ED

Straight male stud couplings


with NPT threads
GE NPT
SN 788

Pipe couplings
(ERMETO)

PN 1)
d1
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
6
8
10
12
18
22
28
35
42

bar
630

400
315

315

160

Thread
of the
union nut
d4
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2
M 12 x 1,5
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 26 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 45 x 2
M 52 x 2

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


SN 878 EGE ...
6 SR ED
8 SR ED
10 SR ED
12 SR ED
16 SR ED
20 SR ED
25 SR ED
30 SR ED
38 SR ED
6 LR ED
8 LR ED
10 LR ED
12 LR ED
18 LR ED
22 LR ED
28 LR ED
35 LR ED
42 LR ED

d2
G 1/4A
G 3/8A
G 1/2A
G 3/4A
G1 A
G1 1/4A
G1 1/2A
G 1/8A
G 1/4A
G 1/4A
G 3/8A
G 1/2A
G 3/4A
G1 A
G1 1/4A
G1 1/2A

Weight SN 788 GE ...

0,053
0,064
0,093
0,1
0,17
0,273
0,493
0,691
0,934
0,027
0,026
0,054
0,095
0,143
0,2
0,289
0,5
0,718

6 SM ED
8 SM ED
10 SM ED
12 SM ED
16 SM ED
20 SM ED
25 SM ED
30 SM ED
38 SM ED
6 LM ED
8 LM ED
10 LM ED
12 LM ED
18 LM ED
22 LM ED
28 LM ED
35 LM ED
42 LM ED

d2
M 12 x 1,5
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 22 x 1,5
M 27 x 2
M 33 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 48 x 2
M 10 x 1
M 12 x 1,5
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 22 x 1,5
M 26 x 1,5
M 33 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 48 x 2

Weight SN 788 GE ...

0,048
0,064
0,088
0,108
0,167
0,264
0,479
0,66
0,93
0,025
0,039
0,05
0,068
0,142
0,192
0,267
0,437
0,595

d2

6 S / 1/4 NPT
8 S / 1/4 NPT
10 S / 3/8 NPT
12 S / 3/8 NPT
16 S / 1/2 NPT
20 S / 3/4 NPT
25 S / 1
NPT
30 S / 1 1/4 NPT
38 S / 1 1/2 NPT
6 L / 1/8 NPT
8 L / 1/4 NPT
10 L / 1/4 NPT
12 L / 3/8 NPT
18 L / 1/2 NPT
22 L / 3/4 NPT
28 L / 1
NPT
35 L / 1 1/4 NPT
42 L / 1 1/2 NPT

Straight couplings

Angular pipe couplings

Equal T couplings

W
SN 832

1/4 18 NPT
3/8 18 NPT
1/2 14 NPT
3/4 14 NPT
1
11,5 NPT
1 1/4 11,5 NPT
1 1/2 11,5 NPT
1/8 27 NPT
1/4 18 NPT
1/4 18 NPT
3/8 18 NPT
1/2 14 NPT
3/4 14 NPT
1
11,5 NPT
1 1/4 11,5 NPT
1 1/2 11,5 NPT

Weight
0,056
0,061
0,082
0,1
0,168
0,263
0,493
0,635
0,932
0,024
0,042
0,047
0,065
0,147
0,197
0,376
0,456
0,616

Adjustable angular
male stud couplings
WH
SN 865

Pipe couplings
(ERMETO)

PN 1)
d1
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
6
8
10
12
18
22
28
35
42
1)

bar
630

400
315

315

160

Thread
of the
union nut
d4
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2
M 12 x 1,5
M 14 x 1,5
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 26 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 45 x 2
M 52 x 2

SN 832 G...
6S
8S
10 S
12 S
16 S
20 S
25 S
30 S
38 S
6L
8L
10 L
12 L
18 L
22 L
28 L
35 L
42 L

correction of the dimension

Weight
0,064
0,081
0,111
0,135
0,231
0,371
0,681
0,805
1,267
0,035
0,051
0,065
0,086
0,202
0,269
0,333
0,523
0,775

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


PN 1)
SN 832 W... Weight SN 832 T...
Weight bar
6S
0,09
6S
0,124
8S
0,118
8S
0,131
400
10 S
0,164
10 S
0,185
12 S
0,212
12 S
0,223
16 S
0,28
16 S
0,404
315
20 S
0,422
20 S
0,6
25 S
0,788
25 S
1,112 250
30 S
1,021
30 S
1,399
160
38 S
1,59
38 S
2,168
6L
0,052
6L
0,072
8L
0,077
8L
0,104
10 L
0,1
10 L
0,105 315
12 L
0,136
12 L
0,14
18 L
0,249
18 L
0,356
22 L
0,33
22 L
0,462
28 L
0,454
28 L
0,61
160
30 L
0,71
35 L
0,953
42 L
1,088
42 L
1,41

SN 865 WH...
d2
Weight
6 SR KDS
0,127
G 1/4 A
8 SR KDS
0,13
10 SR KDS
0,221
G 3/8 A
12 SR KDS
0,228
16 SR KDS G 1/2 A
0,389
20 SR KDS G 3/4 A
0,701
25 SR KDS G1
A
1,288
30 SR KDS G1 1/4 A
1,797
38 SR KDS G1 1/2 A
2,656
6 LR KDS G 1/8 A
0,064
8 LR KDS
0,118
G 1/4 A
10 LR KDS
0,124
12 LR KDS G 3/8 A1) 0,21
18 LR KDS G 1/2 A
0,387
22 LR KDS G 3/4 A
0,666
28 LR KDS G1
A
1,133
35 LR KDS G1 1/4 A
1,656
42 LR KDS G1 1/2 A
2,434
For footnotes see page 7

Page 6
SN 456 : 2002-01
Socket-type pipe reducers for high and low-pressure lines
RI
SN 455
SN 591

Screwed plug > female thread


PN
bar

630

400

315

Screwed plug < female thread

d1
G 1/4A

d2
G 1/8A

G 3/8A
G 1/4A
G 1/2A

G 3/8A
G 1/4A
G 3/4A G 3/8A
G 1/2A
G 3/8A
G 1/2A
G 3/4A
G 1/2A
G1 1/4A G 3/4A
G1 A
G 1/2A
G 3/4A
G1 1/2A
G1 A
G1 1/4A
G2 A G1 1/2A
G1

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


PN
d1
Weight bar SN 591 RI ...
0,038
1/8 ED x 1/4
G 1/8A
0,039
1/8 ED x 3/8
0,068
1/4 ED x 3/8
630
0,056
1/4 ED x 1/2 G 1/4A
0,091
1/4 ED x 3/4
0,103
3/8 ED x 1/2
G 3/8A
0,087
3/8 ED x 3/4
0,143
1/2 ED x 3/4
0,195
1/2 ED x 1
G 1/2A
400
0,179
1/2 ED x 1 1/4
0,157
3/4 ED x 1
0,268
3/4 ED x 1 1/4 G 3/4A
0,308 315
3/4 ED x 1 1/2
0,266 400 1
ED x 1 1/4
G1 A
0,458
1
ED x 1 1/2
315
0,47
1 1/4 ED x 1 1/2 G1 1/4A
0,402 0,337 0,542 0,99
-

Double nipples

Cutting rings

DU
SN 718

B
DIN 3861

d2
Weight
G 1/4A 0,039
0,063
G 3/8A
0,067
G 1/2A 0,116
G 3/4A 0,17
G 1/2A 0,125
0,183
G 3/4A
0,182
G1 A 0,221
G1 1/4A 0,482
G1 A 0,235
G1 1/4A 0,481
G1 1/2A 0,56
G1 1/4A 0,503
0,585
G1 1/2A
0,616
-

PN
bar SN 811-VK...
6
8
630
10
12
16
20
400
25
30
315
38
315
18
22
28
160
35
42
-

d
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
18
22
28
35
42
-

l Weight
0,008
25
0,012
18 0,014
19 0,02
20 0,034
22 0,061
24 0,1
26 0,153
28 0,256
21 0,047
23 0,075
25 0,13
27 0,216
29 0,33
-

Straight intermediate socket


with sealing cone
GZ
SN 880

250

SN 455 RI ...
1/4 ED x 1/8
3/8 ED x 1/8
3/8 ED x 1/4
1/2 ED x 1/4
1/2 ED x 3/8
3/4 ED x 1/4
3/4 ED x 3/8
3/4 ED x 1/2
1
ED x 1/2
1
ED x 3/8
1
ED x 1/2
1
ED x 3/4
1 1/4 ED x 1/2
1 1/4 ED x 3/4
1 1/4 ED x 1
1 1/2 ED x 1/2
1 1/2 ED x 3/4
1 1/2 ED x 1
1 1/2 ED x 1 1/4
2
ED x 1 1/2

Plug cones
VK
SN 811

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


PN
bar

SN 718 DU ...
G 1/4 A
G 3/8 A
G 1/2 A
400
G 3/4 A
G1
A
G 1 1/4 A
G 1 1/2 A
-

12

40

14
16
18
20
22
-

50
55
60
65
70
-

PN
SW Weight bar DIN 3861B...
19 0,055
S 6
22 0,076
S 8
630
27 0,145
S 10
32 0,255
S 12
41 0,4
S 16
50 0,52
400
S 20
55 0,765
S 25
S 30
250
S 38
L 18
160
L 22
L 28
100
L 35
L 42

PN
d Weight bar SN 880GZ ...
6
10 S
0,002 630
8
12 S
10
16 S
0,003
12
20 S
400
16
0,006
25 S
20
0,011
30 S
25
0,013 315
38 S
30
0,018
10 L
38,3 0,022 315
12 L
18
0,006
18 L
22
0,007
22 L
28
0,009
28 L
160
35,3 0,019
35 L
42,3 0,022
42 L

d1
10
12
16
20
25
30
38
10
12
18
22
28
35
42

Thread of
the union nut
d4
M 18 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2
M 16 x 1,5
M 18 x 1,5
M 26 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 45 x 2
M 52 x 2

L1
35
38
42
48
53
62
67
34
38
44
48
52
57

L 2 Weight
33 0,074
36 0,095
39 0,172
44 0,261
46 0,477
0,605
52
0,826
0,053
33
0,071
36 0,165
42 0,243
46 0,319
48 0,449
52 0,737

Page 7
SN 456: 2002-01
Double nipples
for low pressure (PN 40 bar)

Sockets
for low pressure (PN 40 bar)

DIN 2990

DIN 2986

Pipe couplings type K


for low pressure (PN 40 bar)
K
DIN 2993

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


DIN 2990 ...
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3

l
24
28
34
40
46
52
54
62
70
78

SW Weight
14 0,02
19 0,04
22 0,06
30 0,09
36 0,16
46 0,27
50 0,36
65 0,45
80 0,85
90 1,22

DIN 2986 ...


1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3

d
18,5
21,3
26,4
31,8
39,5
48,3
54,5
66,3
82
95

l Weight DIN 2993 K ...


25 0,03
1/4
26 0,04
3/8
34 0,07
1/2
36 0,12
3/4
43 0,17
1
0,25
1 1/4
48
0,34
1 1/2
56 0,46
2
65 0,78
2 1/2
71 1,13
3

l
St
40
46
54
60
66
72
81
91
102
107

l
1.4571
38
41
46
50
56
62
64
69
75
83

m
15
16
18
20
22
24
25
27
30
31

SW Weight
27
0,08
32
0,11
41
0,23
50
0,36
55
0,60
70
0,80
75
1,10
90
1,35
110 2,10
130 3,25

Shut-off valve
for low pressure (PN 10 bar)
V
SN 555
with valve open

Weld-on pipe couplings with sealing cones


for low pressure (PN 75 bar)
K
SN 862

d
17,5
21,5
27
33,5
40,5
50
57
70
86
100

SW

Designations and weights (weight in kg/unit)


SN 862 K ...
17,2 x 2
21,3 x 2
26,9 x 2,3
33,7 x 2,6
42,4 x 2,6
48,3 x 2,6
60,3 x 2,9
76,1 x 2,9
88,9 x 3,2

1)

d1
17,2 x 2
21,3 x 2
26,9 x 2,3
33,7 x 2,6
42,4 x 2,6
48,3 x 2,6
60,3 x 2,9
76,1 x 2,9
88,9 x 3,2

l
40
48
55
62
68
75
80
90
100

SW
27
32
41
50
60
70
85
100
120

Weight
0,075
0,106
0,185
0,315
0,42
0,75
0,91
1,4
2,32

SN 555 V ...
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
-

G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

d
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
-

PN refers to the permissible nominal pressure of the complete coupling.

h
55

l
50

65

65

75
95
115
130
145
-

75
90
110
120
150
-

Hexagon
18
21
27
32
41
-

SW

Octagon
50
55
70
-

Weight
0,12
0,2
0,24
0,36
0,65
1,04
1,38
2,32
-

January 2002

Flanges

Welding fittings
SN 836
Selection
Dimensions in mm

LB

Flange connection, type A

PN

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Flange-type coupling, type B

Pipe connection

Outside Inside
max.
max.
max.

Inside dia

Outside dia

Ouside dia

Inside dia

SAE flanges with welding collars as in SN 532


LA
A

LA

3000 PSI (PN according to pipe dimension)


Screw
Nut
ISO 4762 - ... - 8.8
ISO 4032
LB
M
Type A
Type B
8

20

14

17,5

38,1

30

60

24,3 M 8x25

M 8x40

30

20

22,3

47,6

35

70

32,2

M 10x40

250

M 8

O-ring
SN 430
NBR
18,64x3,53
24,99x3,53

M 10x30
38

28

26,2

52,4

40

80

38,5

M 10

32,92x3,53

M 10x45
42,4

33

30,2

58,7

45

90

48,3

42

35,7

69,9

50 100

43,7 M 10x35

37,69x3,53

50,8

200

47,22x3,53
M 12x35

M 12x50

60,3

52

42,9

77,8

60 120

62,8

160

76,1

65

50,8

88,9

70 140

74,9 M 12x40

M 12x60

69,44x3,53

100

88,9

81

61,9 106,4

80 160

90,9 M 16x45

M 16x70

85,32x3,53

114,3

106

77,8 130,2

80 160 115,0

25

M 16
M 16x50

139,7

PN

M 12

132

92,1 152,4

Pipe connection

Outside Inside
max.
max.
max.

LA

56,74x3,53

110,72x3,53

M 16x80

80 160 140,5

136,12x3,53

6000 PSI (PN according to pipe dimension)


Screw
Nut
ISO 4762 - ... - 8.8
ISO 4032
LB
M
Type A
Type B
8

A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B

O-Ring
SN 430

1/2-3/ 20,0 x 2,5


1/2-3/ 20,0 x 2,5
3/4-3/ 25,0 x 3,0
3/4-3/ 25,0 x 3,0
1 -3/ 30,0 x 4,0
1 -3/ 30,0 x 4,0
1 1/4-3/ 38,0 x 3,0
1 1/4-3/ 38,0 x 3,0
1 1/2-3/ 48,3 x 2,6
1 1/2-3/ 48,3 x 2,6
2 -3/ 60,3 x 2,9
2 -3/ 60,3 x 2,9
2 1/2-3/ 76,1 x 2,9
2 1/2-3/ 76,1 x 2,9
3 -3/ 88,9 x 3,2
3 -3/ 88,9 x 3,2
4 -3/ 114,3 x 3,6
4 -3/ 114,3 x 3,6
5 -3/ 139,7 x 4,0
5 -3/ 139,7 x 4,0

St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St

Ordering example 1)

NBR

20

14

18,2

40,5 40

80

24,6 M 8x 30 M 8x 45

M 8

18,64x3,53

30

20

23,8

50,8 45

90

32,5 M 10x 35 M 10x 50

M 10

24,99x3,53

38

28

27,8

57,2 50

100

38,8 M 12x 40 M 12x 65

M 12

32,92x3,53

42,4

33

31,8

66,7 55

110

44,5 M 14x 45 M 14x 70

M 14

37,69x3,53

48,3

42

36,5

79,4 60

120

51,6 M 16x 50 M 16x 80

M 16

47,22x3,53

60,3

52

44,5

96,8 70

140

67,6 M 20x 60 M 20x100

M 20

56,74x3,53

88,9

65

58,7 123,8 75

150

89,5 M 24x 80 M 24x120

M 24

85,32x3,53

114,3

81

71,4 152,4 80

160 114,5 M 30x100 M 30x140

M 30

110,72x3,53

400

320

1)

Ordering example 1)

A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B

1/2-6/ 20,0 x 3,0


1/2-6/ 20,0 x 3,0
3/4-6/ 25,0 x 4,0
3/4-6/ 25,0 x 4,0
1 -6/ 30,0 x 5,0
1 -6/ 30,0 x 5,0
1 1/4-6/ 38,0 x 6,0
1 1/4-6/ 38,0 x 6,0
1 1/2-6/ 48,3 x 8,0
1 1/2-6/ 48,3 x 8,0
2 -6/ 60,3 x10,0
2 -6/ 60,3 x10,0
2 1/2-6/ 88,9 x14,2
2 1/2-6/ 88,9 x14,2
3 -6/ 114,3 x20,0
3 -6/ 114,3 x20,0

St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St
St

Other pipe sizes and materials can also be specified in accordance with the above standard taking into account
the pipe sizes and materials laid down in the pipe classes of SN 901.
Continued on pages 2 and 3

Page 2
SN 836: 2002-01
Flanges for low-pressure pipelines up to PN 16 bar
Welding neck flange PN 16
DIN 2633

Blind flange PN 16
DIN 2527

DN

d1

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200

42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
219,1

DN

16

40
42

2,6

18

45

2,9

20

50
52

22

55

24

62

3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5
5,9

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200

16
18
20
22
24

DIN 2633...

140
150
165
185
200
220
250
285
340

100
110
125
145
160
180
210
240
295

C 32 / 42,4 x 2,6 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)


C 40 / 48,3 x 2,6 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 50 / 60,3 x 2,9 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 65 / 76,1 x 2,9 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 80 / 88,9 x 3,2 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 100 / 114,3 x 3,6 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 125 / 139,7 x 4,0 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 150 / 168,3 x 4,5 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)
C 200 / 219,1 x 5,9 S235JRG2 (RSt 37-2)

DIN 2527...

140
150
165
185
200
220
250
285
340

100
110
125
145
160
180
210
240
295

B 32 PN 16
B 40 PN 16
B 50 PN 16
B 65 PN 16
B 80 PN 16
B 100 PN 16
B 125 PN 16
B 150 PN 16
B 200 PN 16

42,4 S235JR (St 37-2)


48,3 S235JR (St 37-2)
60,3 S235JR (St 37-2)
76,1 S235JR (St 37-2)
88,9 S235JR (St 37-2)
114,3 S235JR (St 37-2)
139,7 S235JR (St 37-2)
168,3 S235JR (St 37-2)
219,1 S235JR (St 37-2)

Weight
kg/unit
1,69
1,86
2,53
3,06
3,7
4,62
6,3
7,75
11
Weight
kg/unit
1,8
2,09
2,88
3,7
4,83
5,75
8,59
10,6
16,5

Pertaining screws/bolts, nuts and seals to be specified separately


Screw/bolts

Nut
ISO 4032

Seals
SN 922

8-galvanised

Material:
NBR/
Metal insert

for flange

DN
Quantity
connection

coupling

32

32 PN 40-4

M 16 x 40
40
50

65

M 16 x 60
M 16 x 45

80
100
8

50 PN 40-5
M 16

M 16 x 70

100 PN 16-6

M 16 x 50
M 20 x 50
M 20 x 80

12

M 20 x 55

8.8galvanised

flange
coupling

125 PN 16-6

ISO 4014

150

65 PN 40-5
80 PN 40-5

125

200

ISO 4017
8.8galvanised

ISO 4017
8.8galvanised

40 PN 40-4

flange
connection

M 20

150 PN 16-7
200 PN 16-7

Arrangement of the bolt holes acc. to DIN 2501

Every flange is provided with a number of bolt holes which is divisible by four. In the case of pipelines and fittings, the bolt
holes must be arranged symmetrically to the two main axes in such a way that they do not lie on these axes.

Page 3
SN 836: 2002-01
Butt welding fittings for low-pressure pipelines up to PN 16 bar
Welding elbow 2)
DIN 2605-1

T-piece
DIN 2615-1

Reducing tee
DIN 2615-1

Pipe reducer
DIN 2616-2
Type K

Cap
DIN 2617

DN

d1

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200

42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
219,1

DN

d1

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200

42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
219,1

DN

d1

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200

42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
219,1

DN

d1

32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200

42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
219,1

DN

d1

s
2,6
2,9
3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5
4,5

DIN 2605-...

48
57
76
95
114
152
190
229
305

90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 -

s
2,6
2,9
3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5
4,5
s1

d2

3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5
4,5

33,7
42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3

s1

d2

2,6
2,9

3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5
4,5

33,7
42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3

2,6
2,9

32 42,4
2,6
40 48,3
50 60,3
2,9
65 76,1
80 88,9 3,2
100 114,3 3,6
125 139,7 4,0
150 168,3 4,5
200

38
51
64
76
89

s2
2,6
2,9
3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5

48
57
64
76
86
105
124
143
178

48
57
64
76
86
105
124
143
178

48 48
57 57
64 60
76 70
86 83
105 98
124 117
143 137
178 168

s2

2,6

50
64
76

2,9

90

3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5

100
127
140
152

333333333-

42,4 x 2,6 St 37.0


48,3 x 2,6 St 37.0
60,3 x 2,9 St 37.0
76,1 x 2,9 St 37.0
88,9 x 3,2 St 37.0
114,3 x 3,6 St 37.0
139,7 x 4,0 St 37.0
168,3 x 4,5 St 37.0
219,1 x 4,5 St 37.0
DIN 2615-...
42,4 x 2,6 St 37.0
48,3 x 2,6 St 37.0
60,3 x 2,9 St 37.0
76,1 x 2,9 St 37.0
88,9 x 3,2 St 37.0
114,3 x 3,6 St 37.0
139,7 x 4,0 St 37.0
168,3 x 4,5 St 37.0
219,1 x 4,5 St 37.0
DIN 2615-...
42,4 x 2,6 33,7 x 2,6 - St 37.0
48,3 x 2,6 42,4 x 2,6 - St 37.0
60,3 x 2,9 48,3 x 2,6 - St 37.0
76,1 x 2,9 60,3 x 2,9 - St 37.0
88,9 x 3,2 76,1 x 2,9 - St 37.0
114,3 x 3,6 88,9 x 3,2 - St 37.0
139,7 x 4,0 114,3 x 3,6 - St 37.0
168,3 x 4,5 139,7 x 4,0 - St 37.0
219,1 x 4,5 168,3 x 4,5 - St 37.0
DIN 2616-...

K 42,4 x 2,6 33,7 x 2,6 - St 37.0


K 48,3 x 2,6 42,4 x 2,6 - St 37.0
K 60,3 x 2,9 48,3 x 2,6 - St 37.0
K 76,1 x 2,9 60,3 x 2,9 - St 37.0
K 88,9 x 3,2 76,1 x 2,9 - St 37.0
K114,3 x 3,6 88,9 x 3,2 - St 37.0
K139,7 x 4,0 114,3 x 3,6 - St 37.0
K168,3 x 4,5 139,7 x 4,0 - St 37.0
K219,1 x 4,5 168,3 x 4,5 - St 37.0
DIN 2617-...

42,4 x 2,6 St 37.0


48,3 x 2,6 St 37.0
60,3 x 2,9 St 37.0
76,1 x 2,9 St 37.0
88,9 x 3,2 St 37.0
114,3 x 3,6 St 37.0
139,7 x 4,0 St 37.0
168,3 x 4,5 St 37.0
torospherical dished ends acc. to 28011

Weight
kg/unit
0,19
0,26
0,49
0,79
1,22
2,35
4,01
6,52
15,8
Weight
kg/unit
0,49
0,69
0,99
1,68
2,33
4
6,9
10,7
18,3
Weight
kg/unit
0,49
0,69
0,99
1,68
2,33
4
6,9
10,7
18,3
Weight
kg/unit
0,15
0,18
0,3
0,4
0,56
0,95
1,6
2,5
4,3
Weight
kg/unit
0,13
0,2
0,28
0,34
0,53
1
1,7
2,65

Other wall thicknesses and materials can also be specified in accordance with the above standards taking into
account the wall thicknesses and materials laid down in the pipe classes of SN 901.

2)

For cost-effective manufacture of pipelines, the bending of pipes has to be preferred to the welding-in of elbows,
see SN 740.

January 2002

Pipe fasteners
SN 837
Selection
Dimensions in mm
Pipe fasteners for low-pressure lines
Pipe clamps
DIN 1592

Spacers
SN 428

Pipe clamps
DIN 1593

Spacers
SN 428

Pipe
outside
dia.
Pertaining
screws
ISO 4017 - ... 8.8
M 6 x 12

Designation
SN 428 -...St
A 7
A 9

Weight

Weight

kg/unit
0,063
0,077

Designation
DIN 1593-...St
7
9

A 13

0,092

13

0,020

A 19

0,156

19

13 1)

0,014

19

0,040

23

0,094

A 23

0,302

26

0,105

A 26

0,312

28,5

0,108

31

M 10 x 16

M 12 x 20

kg/unit
0,011
0,018

Pertaining
screws
ISO 4017 - ... 8.8

Designation
SN 428 - ... St
B 7
B 9

Weight
kg/unit
0,098
0,107

B 13

0,117

0,025

B 19

0,138

23

0,057

B 23

0,223

26

0,061

B 26

0,229

M 6 x 12

M 10 x 16

A 28,5

0,326

28,5

0,066

0,119

A 31

0,34

31

0,069

B 31

36

0,176

A 36

0,606

36

0,166

B 36

0,473

39
43
49
61
-

0,185
0,208
0,378
0,456
-

A 39
A 43
A 49
A 61
-

0,637
0,707
0,825
0,903
-

39
43
49
61
77
91
115
142 2)
171 2)

0,174
0,187
0,200
0,333
0,405
0,764
0,930
2,260
2,620

B 39
B 43
B 49
B 61
B 77
B 91
B 115
B 142
B 171

0,492
0,529
0,539
1,071
1,304
1,476
1,696
5,077
5,642

M 16 x 25
-

Steel straps
DIN 3570

Pipe
Designation
DIN 3570 - ... outside

St-galvanised
25,0
A 30
26,9
30,0
A 38
33,7
38,0
A 46
42,4
48,3
A 52
60,3
A 64
76,1
A 82
88,9
A 94
114,3
A 120
139,7
A 148
168,3
A 176
219,1
A 228
For footnotes see page 2

M 12 x 20

M 16 x 25
M 20 x 35
M 20 x 40

B 28,5

0,247

Pipe clamps
SN 432

Weight
kg/unit

Pertaining nuts
ISO 4032 - ... 8

Pipe
outside

0,094
0,105

6
M 10

0,12
0,129
0,222
0,259
0,288
0,64
0,727
0,834
1,698
-

8
M 12
M 16
10
M 20
-

Designation
SN 432 - ... St
2x 6
3x 6
4x 6
5x 6
6x 6
2x 8
3x 8
4x 8
5x 8
6x 8
2 x 10
3 x 10
4 x 10
5 x 10
6 x 10

Weight
kg/unit
0,013
0,014
0,015
0,017
0,018
0,014
0,016
0,018
0,02
0,021
0,016
0,018
0,021
0,023
0,025

Pertaining screws
DIN 7513 - ... C15 galvanised

BE M 6 x 12

Continued on page 2

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

6
8
10
12
16
18
20
21,3
22
25
26,9
28
30
33,7
35
38
42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3

Designation Weight
DIN 1592 -...St
kg/unit
7
0,007
9
0,011

Page 2
SN 837: 2002-01
Pipe fasteners for high-pressure lines
Pipe holders
SN 734
Base clamps

Set-up clamps

Pipe
outside
diameter

Weight
kg/unit
PP / PA
10

AL

DPAL AS

SPAL 3012

3)

DPAL AS

SPAL 3016

3)

DPAL AS

SPAL 3017,2

3)

DPAL AS

18

SPAL 3018

3)

DPAL AS

20

SPAL 4020

3)

DPAL AS

SPAL 4021,3

3)

SPAL 4022

3)

SPAL 4025

3)

DPAL AS

26,9

SPAL 4026,9

3)

DPAL AS

28

SPAL 4028

3)

DPAL AS

30

SPAL 5030

3)

DPAL AS

SPAL 5033,7

3)

DPAL AS

SPAL 5035

3)

DPAL AS

SPAL 5038

3)

SPAL 6042

3)

DPAL AS

0,93

0,4
0,33
0,39

17,2

21,3
22
25

33,7

0,42

0,51

0,53

0,68

35
38
42,4

0,5
1,29

0,66
1,75

Designation
AL

3010

3)

SIP AF

3012

3)

SIP AF

3016

3)

SIP AF

3017,2

3)

SIP AF

3018

3)

SIP AF

4020

3)

SIP AF

4021,3

3)

SIP AF

4022

3)

SIP AF

4025

3)

SIP AF

4026,9

3)

SIP AF

4028

3)

SIP AF

5030

3)

SIP AF

5033,7

3)

SIP AF

5035

3)

SIP AF

5038

3)

SIP AF

6042

3)

SIP AF

1,55

6048,3

3)

SIP AF

0,2
0,13
0,19

0,2

0,31

DPAL AS
DPAL AS

DPAL AS
DPAL AS

0,19
0,3
0,18
0,24
0,23

0,45

0,21
0,95

SN 734 - ...

1,6

48,3

1,28

1,7

SPAL 6048,3

3)

60,3

1,26

1,68

SPAL 6060,3

3)

DPAL AS

0,88

1,4

6060,3

3)

SIP AF

76,1

2,55

3,43

SPAL 7076,1

3)

DPAL AS

1,95

3,2

7076,1

3)

SIP AF

88,9

2,35

3,26

SPAL 7088,9

3)

DPAL AS

1,85

7088,9

3)

SIP AF

114,3

5,87

8,34

SPAL 8114

3)

DPAL AS

4,75

8114

3)

SIP AF

139,7

8,75

SPAL 9140

3)

DPAL AS

7,5

12

9140

3)

SIP AF

SPAL 9168

3)

9168

3)

SIP AF

SPAL 10219

3)

10219

3)

SIP AF

168,3
219,1

3)

PP / PA

SPAL 3010

16

2)

SN 734 - ...
3)

12

1)

Weight
kg/unit

Designation

8,31
23,2

12,4
11,9
28,5

DPAL AS
DPAL AS

7
17

11
26,5

This pipe clamp has to be specified according to DIN 1596.


This pipe clamp has to be specified according to SN 589.
The material of the clamping element (PP, PA, AL) must be inserted in the supplier's designation.

High- and low-pressure


Selection
Dimensions in mm

High-pressure
Complete hoselines 5)
SN 756
with hose fittings for
Welding cone couplings
from DN 6 to DN 32
Type A

Component parts for complete hoseline


according to SN 756
from DN 6 to DN 32
Hoses
SN 757

Solderless pipe couplings


from DN 6 to DN 8
Type B

Operating
pressure

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

bar
DN

dynamic

static

Nominal
size

400

600

HA 6 x l M 18 x 1,5

8
12
16
20
25
32

350
415

560
660

350

500

380
350

550
500

HA 8 x l
4 HA 12 x l
4 HA 16 x l
4 HA 20 x l
4SHA 25 x l
4SHA 32 x l

d4

M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2

Weight
kg / m
0,53
0,6
1,19
1,69
2,37
3,38
4,74

Nominal
size
HB 6 x l
HB 6 x l
HB 6 x l
HB 8 x l
-

d3
6
8
10
12
-

Weight
kg / m
0,45
0,45
0,47
0,54
-

Nominal
size

d1

H 6xl

6,4

H 8xl
4 H 12 x l
4 H 16 x l
4 H 20 x l
4SH 25 x l
4SH 32 x l

7,9
12,7
15,9
19
25,4
31,8

Smallest
bending Weight
radius
kg / m

d3
15

100

0,35

16,6
24,6
28,2
32,2
38,7
45,5

115
230
250
300
340
460

0,4
0,87
1,19
1,49
2,08
2,51

Complete hoseline with SAE flange connection


6000 PSI
from DN 12 to DN 32
SN 756
pertaining SAE flange SN 532
Type C

Type D
90

Type E
45

Operating
pressure
Flange
size

bar
DN
12
16
20
25
32

dynamic
415

static
660

350

500

380
350

550
500

6000 psi
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2

Nominal size
4 HC 12
4 HC 16
4 HC 20
4SHC 25
4SHC 32

Weight
kg / m
1,29
1,77
2,31
3,08
4,14

Nominal size
4 HD 12
4 HD 16
4 HD 20
4SHD 25
4SHD 32

Weight
kg / m
1,29
1,77
2,31
3,08
4,14

Nominal size
4 HE 12
4 HE 16
4 HE 20
4SHE 25
4SHE 32

Weight
kg / m
1,29
1,77
2,31
3,08
4,14

Specification in the bill of materials:


Complete hoselines are specified in the bill of materials on AP (order item) level. This means that the hoseline
components (hose and fittings) are specified only by the operations scheduling department on AUP (order sub-item)
level.
Hoselines with fire protection (thermal protection) are specified as bought-out item numbers with indication of the
thermal stability.

1)
2)
3)

High-pressure hoselines of DN 6, 8, 12 and 16 are also used as low-pressure hoselines.


The length is specified as appropriate, however, with due regard to the standard lengths.
Connection to the compression ferrule couplings according to SN 456.

January 2002

Hoselines
SN 576
Selection
Dimensions in mm

Hoselines 1)
Components for complete
hoseline acc. to SN 756
Hose fitting SN 758 for ...
Couplings
from DN 6 to DN 32
Type A

Nom.
size

Connection socket
SN 759

Solderless couplings
from DN 6 to DN 8
Type B

Weight Nom.
kg / unit size d 3
B6
6
A 6 M 18 x 1,5
0,09 B 6
8
B 6 10
A 8 M 20 x 1,5
0,1
B 8 12
A 12 M 24 x 1,5
0,16
A 16 M 30 x 2
0,25
A 20 M 36 x 2
0,44
A 25 M 42 x 2
0,65
A 32 M 52 x 2
1,1
d4

Weight
kg / unit
0,05
0,05
0,06
0,07
-

AVIT weld-on sockets


from DN 6 to DN 32
Type GAV

AVIT male studs


from DN 6 to DN 32
Type GUV

Nominal size
SN 759 GUV ...

d2

d4

Weight
Nominal size
kg / unit SN 759 GAV ...

d1

d4

Weight
kg / unit

10 / G 3/8 A 1+ 5 G 3/8A M 18 x 1,5

0,05

10 x 1,5 1

10

M 18 x 1,5

0,04

12 / G 3/8 A 1+ 5
16 / G 1/2 A 1+ 5
20 / G 3/4 A 1+ 5
25 / G1
A 1+ 5
30 / G1 1/4 A 1+ 5
38 / G1 1/2 A 1+ 5

0,06
0,09
0,15
0,27
0,42
0,56

12 x 2 1
16 x 2,5 1
20 x 3 1
25 x 4 1
30 x 5 1
38 x 6 1

12
16
20
25
30
38

M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2

0,05
0,07
0,14
0,22
0,32
0,51

G 3/8A
G 1/2A
G 3/4A
G1 A
G1 1/4A
G1 1/2A

M 20 x 1,5
M 24 x 1,5
M 30 x 2
M 36 x 2
M 42 x 2
M 52 x 2

Hose fittings for SAE flange connections


6000 PSI
from DN 12 to DN 32
SN 758
Type C

Nominal size
C 12
C 16
C 20
C 25
C 32

Type D
90

Weight
kg / unit
0,21
0,29
0,41
0,5
0,8

Nominal size
D 12
D 16
D 20
D 25
D 32

l5

+4

50
58
70
94

Type E
45

Weight
kg / unit
0,21
0,29
0,41
0,5
0,8

Nominal size
E 12
E 16
E 20
E 25
E 32

l4

+4

25
26
32
44

Weight
kg / unit
0,21
0,29
0,41
0,5
0,8

4) Stainless-steel welding nipples which are put on the pipes and fastened by welding must have at least twice the length (2 x l3)
indicated in the table. Otherwise the welding stresses will deform the thread (to oval shape) and the hoseline cannot be screwed on.
5) These hoselines are interchangeable with the corresponding types of Aeroquip and Argus and therefore should be used
with preference.
Examples of application on page 5

Page 3
SN 576 : 2002-01

Low pressure
Complete hoselines
SN 544-1
Type A
for DN 20
with hoseline-end sleeve mountings

Hoses
SN 544-2

Type B
for DN 25 to DN 100
with hoseline-end clamping shell
mountings

Operating
pressure
DN
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
100

bar

16

Nominal size
NA 20
-

d3
G 3/4
-

Nominal size
NB 25
NB 32
NB 40
NB 50
NB 63
NB 75
NB100
Couplings
SN 545-1

Clamping rings
Type A

Operating
pressure
DN
32
40
50
63
75

bar

16

Nominal size
A 32
A 40
A 50
A 63
A 75

d3
G1
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
G2
G 2 1/2
G3
G4

Weight
kg / unit
0,84
0,88
0,9
2,1
2,3

d1
G 1 1/4 A
G 1 1/2 A
G2
A
G 2 1/2 A
G3
A

Nom.
size
N 20
N 25
N 32
N 40
N 50
N 63
N 75
N100

Smallest
bending
radius
70
80
90
110
130
160
180
250

d1 d2
19 31
25 37
32 44
40 54
50 64
63 79
75 90
100 116

Weight
kg / m
0,8
0,9
1,2
1,4
2,1
2,8
3,3
4,8

Cams
Type B

Nominal size

d2

Weight
kg / unit

B 50

G2

0,34

B 75

G3

0,85

Complete hoseline with SAE flange connection


3000 psi
from DN 25 to DN 100
SN 544-1
pertaining SAE flange SN 532
Type NE

Operating
pressure

Flange
size

DN
bar
3000 psi
25
1
32
1 1/4
40
1 1/2
16
50
2
63
2 1/2
75
3
100
4
Footnotes see pages 1 and 2

Nominal size
NE 25
NE 32
NE 40
NE 50
NE 63
NE 75
NE100

Type NF
90

Weight
kg / m
1,52
2,08
2,58
4,44
6,34
7,38
13,18

Nominal size
NF 25
NF 32
NF 40
NF 50
NF 63
NF 75
NF100

Type NG
45

Weight
kg / m
1,7
2,36
3,16
5,16
7,92
9,3
17,16

Nominal size
NG 25
NG 32
NG 40
NG 50
NG 63
NG 75
NG100

Weight
kg / m
1,58
2,16
2,7
4,68
6,84
8,1
14,8

Page 4
SN 576 : 2002-01

Hoselines
Hose fittings
SN 544-3
Type A

Types of connections for hoselines


SN 544-4
SN 545-2
Type C

for DN 20
with hoseline-end sleeve
mountings

Double nipples
Type C

for DN 20
sleeve mounting

for DN 25 to DN 75
clamping shell mounting

d3

Type B
for DN 25 to DN 100
with hoseline-end clamping shell
mountings

Welding nipples
Type D

Nominal
size
A 20
B 25
B 32
B 40
B 50
B 63
B 75
B100

Weight
kg / unit
0,16
0,19
0,28
0,5
0,75
1,35
1,47
3,37

d3
G 3/4
G1
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
G2
G 2 1/2
G3
G4

Nominal
size
C 20
C 25
C 32
C 40
C 50
C 63
C 75
-

Weight
kg / unit
0,2
0,23
0,55
0,6
0,7
1,53
1,42
-

d2
G1
G2
G3
-

Nominal
size
C 20
C 25
C 32
C 40
C 50
C 63
C 75
C100

Weight
kg / unit
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,21
0,4
0,75
0,8
-

d
G 3/4 A
G1
A
G 1 1/4 A
G 1 1/2 A
G2
A
G 2 1/2 A
G3
A
G4
A

Nominal
size
D 20
D 25
D 32
D 40
D 50
D 63
D 75
D100

l 3 4)
for St
30
35
35
35
45
45
45
45

d
G 3/4 A
G1
A
G 1 1/4 A
G 1 1/2 A
G2
A
G 2 1/2 A
G3
A
G4
A

Weight
kg / unit
0,06
0,1
0,14
0,15
0,31
0,36
0,46
0,65

Couplings
SN 545-3
Filler plugs

Type D
for clamping rings

Type E
for cams

Nominal size

Weight
kg / unit

Nominal size

Weight
kg / unit

D 50

0,31

E 50

0,45

D 75

0,77

E 75

1,2

Hose fittings for SAE flange connections


3000 psi
from DN 25 to DN 100
SN 544-3
Type E

Nominal size
E 25
E 32
E 40
E 50
E 63
E 75
E100

Type F
90

Weight
kg / unit
0,31
0,44
0,69
1,17
1,77
2,04
4,19

Nominal size
F 25
F 32
F 40
F 50
F 63
F 75
F100

l 5 +4
55
65
75
100
120
145
185

Type G
45

Weight
kg / unit
0,4
0,58
0,88
1,53
2,56
3
6,18

Nominal size
G 25
G 32
G 40
G 50
G 63
G 75
G100

l 4 +4
25
27
30
40
60
73
92

Weight
kg / unit
0,34
0,48
0,75
1,29
2,02
2,4
5

Page 5
SN 576: 2002-01
The illustrations are given only as a help for better understanding of the possible applications.

Examples of application: for high-pressure hoseline

Flange connection
SN 532 F

Coupling
SN 884 EW
Hoseline
SN 756 HB

Hoseline
SN 756 HC

Male stud
SN 759 GUV

Flange connection
SN 532 F

Pipe
Coupling
SN 832 T

Pipe

Male stud
SN 759
Hoseline
SN 756 HA
Male stud
SN 759 GUV

Coupling
SN 753 DEV

Intermediate socket
SN 880

Examples of application: for low-pressure hoselines


Double nipple
DIN 2990

Double nipple
SN 544-4

Elbow
DIN 2987
Coupling
SN 545-1

Hoseline
SN 544-1
Hose fitting
SN 545-2

Pipe

Welding nipple
SN 544-4

Hose
SN 544-2
T-piece
DIN 2987
Hose fitting
SN 544-3

Double nipple
SN 544-4

Filler plug
SN 545-3

Pipe
Socket
DIN 2986

Coupling
SN 545-1

Hose fitting
SN 544-3

Welding nipple
SN 544-4

Cam
SN 545-1
Hoseline fitting
SN 545-2

Pipe

Hose
SN 544-2

Hose fitting
SN 544-3

Pipe

Hose
SN 544-2

January 2002 (July 1997)

Hydraulic cylinders

SN 690

Double-acting with cushioning and SAE flange connections


Pmax. = 250 bar

1)

The above mentioned company standard is currently under revision in cooperation with the department of
hydraulic systems and media. Given the huge coordination work, it was not possible to include a revised version
in this edition of the standards book.
Please note that the company standards SN 690 and SN 806 will remain valid till the revised versions are issued.
Data sheets of the company standards will be kept available via the SMS Demag Intranet under
"Standardization/Standards Online" or can be obtained from the Dept. of Standardization.
Dimensions in mm
For hydraulic cylinders with piston dia. 160 see SN 806.
This standard specifies the dimensions and weights of double-acting hydraulic cylinders with cushioning for maximum working
pressures of Pmax = 250 bar.

Types of construction
Type A: clevis with spherical plain bearing 5)
Type B: pivot
Type C: foot mounting
Type E: flange mounting

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

Cylinder sizes with pertaining connection ports


Piston rod
d2 when

Piston dia.
d1

= 1,4 = 1,6 = 2

Cushioning 3)
Work
capacity 7)
Length
W [J]
50
8500

160

90

100

110

200

110 6)

125

140

60

16000

220

125

140

160

70

20000

250

140

160

180

80

30000

280

160

180

200

90

42500

320

180

200

220

100

67500

SAE flange connection 6000 psi


NW

A 0,25

B 0,25

44,5

96,8

50,8

M20

2 1/2

58,7

123,8

63,5

M24

71,4

152,4

76,2

M30

Hole pattern

Designation of a hydraulic cylinder, type A, acc. to SN 690 with a piston dia. d1 = 160 mm,
hard-chrome plated piston rod of diameter d2 = 100 mm and stroke l1 2) = 200 mm:

Hydraulic cylinder SN 690 - A 160/100 x 200


1)

The cylinder rating is for a max. working pressure Pmax = 250 bar. For use under pulsating loads the max. working pressure
has to be reduced according to the pressure increase.
The test pressure is at least 375 bar.
2)
Stroke l1 is indicated as required for the respective purpose. The max. lifts of stroke for the different installation positions
(3.5-fold safety against buckling) can be taken from the tables in the manufacturers' catalogues.
3)
All cylinders are equipped with adjustable cushioning devices on both sides. The cushioning sleeves are made in bronze or
equivalent material. For lifts of stroke up to 100 mm cushioning is not provided as a standard feature.
4)
If the pivot of type B has to be in an extreme off-center position, the cylinder manufacturer must be consulted to clarify the
dimensional details.
5)
Lubrication of the spherical plain bearing (GE ... DO) is through the hinged clevis via hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
according to DIN 71412 - AS6.
6)
When the piston rod diameter is d2 = 110, the thread d5 is M 100 x 2 and the lengths are l7 = 100; l8 = 210; l9 = 115.
7)
The kinetic energy (E) as the product of all masses (m) acting upon the piston rod and the stroke speed (v) at the beginning
of cushioning, must not exceed the maximum work capacity (W) of the cushioning device.
The following relation applies:
E=

m
v2 W = A
D
2

PD

s
2

The calculation of W is based on:


AD = max. effective cushioning area, assuming that piston-side and piston-rod side areas are identical.
PD = 350 bar
s = cushioning length
If the kinetic energy (E) exceeds the given working capacity of the cushioning device, our department of hydraulic systems
must be informed so that the remaining residual energy can be taken into account for the control system.

Continued on pages 2 and 3

Page 2
SN 690 : 2002-01
Type A
cushioning valve

Width of spherical
plain bearing
b3

d3
max.

d4

d5

d6

0
- 0,15

195

270

M 80 x 2

180

80

70

0
- 0,20

245

320

M100 x 2
M110 x 2 6)

215

0
- 0,20
0
- 0,20
0
- 0,25
0
- 0,25

d1

b1

b2

160

135

60

55

200

170

70

220

170

80

70

250

170

90

85

280

215

100

90

320

215

110

105

d1

l2

l3

l4

l5

d7

h1

h2

0
- 0,015

145

27

100

0
- 0,020

180

27

0
- 0,020
0
- 0,020
0
- 0,025
0
- 0,025

200

27

230

27

260

27

290

27

276

365

M120 x 3

260

110

300

410

M130 x 3

280

120

324

450

M140 x 4

305

140

381

508

M150 x 4

340

160

l10

l11

l6

l7

l8

l9

Total weight G1 + G2 (kg/unit)


G2 per 100 mm stroke when
G1
= 1,4 = 1,6 = 2

160

630 4

58

201

59

142

200

795 4

78

253

78

175

220

850 5

78

287

78

250

889 5

78

310

280

975 5

90

320

1070 5

90

170
210 6)
235
265

95
115 6)
125
145

85

180

292

12,7

13,8

15,1

115

240

405

19,8

22,0

24,4

209

80
100 5)
110
115

125

270

545

26,8

29,2

32,9

78

232

120

310

180

140

300

676

29,1

32,7

36,9

322

90

232

125

345

185

150

325

938

32,2

36,3

41,1

360

90

270

140

400

200

175

375

1310

46,4

51,0

56,2

Type B
cushioning valve

d1

b1

b4

b5

b6

b7

d3
max.

d4

d5

d6

160

135

80

90

275

52

195

270

M 80x2

180

320

M 100x2
M 110x2

200

170

100

120

320

55

245

215

d7
75

- 0,06
- 0,10

27

100

0
- 0,020

90

- 0,07
- 0,12

27

0
- 0,020
0
- 0,020
0
- 0,025
0
- 0,025

100

- 0,07
- 0,12
- 0,07
- 0,12
- 0,08
- 0,15
- 0,08
- 0,15

27

27

27

27

2,5

110

130

370

60

276

365

M 120x3

260

110

250

170

125

147

410

65

300

410

M 130x3

280

120

280

215

150

158

450

70

324

450

M 140x4

305

140

320

215

180

184

510

90

381

508

M 150x4

340

160

d1

h1

h2

l4

l5

l8

l7

l8

145

545 4

58

201

59

142

95
115
125
145

130
160

200

180

680 4

78

253

78

175

220

200

725 5

78

287

78

209

80
100
110
115

250

230

749 5

78

310

78

232

120

310

180

650

29,1

32,7

36,9

280

260

825 5

90

322

90

232

125

345

185

715

32,2

36,3

41,1

320

290

895 5

90

360

90

270

140

400

200

1295

46,4

51,0

56,2

6)

170
210 6)
235
265

110

Total weight G1 + G2 (kg/unit)


G2 per 100 mm stroke when
G1
= 1,4 = 1,6 = 2

l9

160

0
- 0,015

170

l3

80

220

l2

d8

6)

290

12,7

13,8

15,1

395

19,8

22,0

24,4

535

26,8

29,2

32,9

Page 3
SN 690 : 2002-01
Type C
cushioning valve

d1

b1

b8

b9

b10

d3
max.

d4

d5

d6

160

135

76

330

400

195

270

M 80 x 2

180

d7

145

70

140

27

215

100

39

180

85

165

27

0
- 0,020
0
- 0,020
0
- 0,025
0
- 0,025

45

200

95

188

27

52

230

110

210

27

52

260

125

230

27

52

290

140

260

27

470

245

320

220

170

104

445

535

276

365

M120 x 3

260

110

250

170

114

510

610

300

410

M130 x 3

280

120

280

215

124

540

640

324

450

M140 x 4

305

140

320

215

134

620

740

381

508

M150 x 4

340

160

d1

l2

l3

l9

l12

l13

94

58

201

59

142

200

97

78

253

78

175

220

100

78

287

78

250

100

78

310

78

280

108

90

322

320

131

90

360

Total weight G1 + G2 (kg/unit)


G2 per 100 mm stroke when
= 1,4
= 1,6
=2

l14
G1

160

390

l8

h4

33

96

l7

h3

0
- 0,020

170

l6

h2

0
- 0,015

200

l5

h1

80

M100 x 2
M110 x 2 6)

l4

d9

170
210 6)
235
265

95
115 6)
125
145

297

154

38

302

12,7

13,8

15,1

379

204

48

415

19,8

22,0

24,4

209

80
100 5)
110
115

417

208

52

563

26,8

29,2

32,9

232

120

310

180

440

208

52

697

29,1

32,7

36,9

90

232

125

345

185

474

242

62

957

32,2

36,3

41,1

90

270

140

400

200

517

247

67

1330

46,4

51,0

56,2

Type E
cushioning valve

d1

b1

b11

d3
max.

d4

d5

d6

160

135

70

195

270

M 80x2

180

80

200

170

85

245

320

M 100x2
M 110x2

215

100

220

170

95

276

365

M 120x3

260

d7

d10

d11

0
- 0,015

325

385

275

0
- 0,020

375

445

180

27

370

33

200

27

39

230

27

260

27

510

45

290

27

450

M 140x4

305

140

0
- 0,025

l7

324

l6

33

- 0,12
- 0,21

39

105

l5

- 0,12
- 0,21

- 0,14
- 0,25

215

l4

320

- 0,13
- 0,23

280

l3

27

450

120

l2

145

590

280

d1

520

M 130x3

340

26

415

410

M 150x4

- 0,11
- 0,19

555

300

508

485

95

381

h2

-.0,13
- 0,23

170

105

h1

0
- 0,020

250

215

d13

110

0
- 0,020

320

d12

160
l8

430

0
- 0,025

490

600
l9

680
l15

l16

Total weight G1 + G2 (kg/unit)


G2 per 100 mm stroke when
G1
= 1,4 = 1,6 = 2

160

545 4

58

129

59

72

80

170

95

10

22

55

332

12,7

13,8

15,1

200

680 4

78

163

78

90

100

210

115

10

30

50

462

19,8

22,0

24,4

220

725 5

78

173

78

114

115

265

145

10

44

55

622

26,8

29,2

32,9

250

749 5

78

173

78

137

120

310

180

10

62

60

768

29,1

32,7

36,9

280

825 5

90

195

90

127

125

345

185

10

47

55

1048

32,2

36,3

41,1

320

895 5

90

195

90

165

140

400

200

10

80

60

1442

46,4

51,0

56,2

Hydraulic cylinders
double-acting with cushioning 2)
Pmax = 250 bar 5)
Dimensions in mm
Type A: clevis with spherical plain bearing 6)

rod side
(cylinder head) section A-A

bottom side (cylinder bottom)

cushioning valve

detail X
turned by 90
section B-B
Type B: pivot

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

variable

Designation of a hydraulic cylinder, type A, with piston dia. d1 = 100 mm,


hard-chrome-plated piston rod with diameter d2 = 56 mm and stroke l11) = 200 mm:

Hydraulic cylinder SN 806 - A 100/56 x 200


Piston
diameter
d1 2)

=1,4

40
50
63
80
100
125
140

22
28
36
45
56
70
80

Piston
diameter

1)

Piston rod diameter


d2 when
=1,6

90

=2
28
36
45
56
70
90
100

Piston rod diameter


d2 when

d1 2)

=1,4

40
50
63
80
100
125
140

22
28
36
45
56
70
80

=1,6

90

=2
28
36
45
56
70
90
100

Width of
spherical plain
bearing
b10
b9

Cushioning
Work
Length capacity W
(J) 9)
18
24
28
35
40
45
50

50
350
650
1350
2500
4200
6000

l4

l5

16
22
28
35
45
58
65

b1

b2

35

25
30
40
50
60
65

40
50
55
60

l6

55
62,5
65
77,5
87,5
95

10

b3

b4

135
155
180
210
250
305
340

110
130
150
170
205
255
280

b5

b6

95
115
130
145
175
215
230

38
42
48
58
68
72

l7

l8

l9

25

60 2
65 2

60

27,5
30
32,5
40,5
43

67,5
70
75 3 82,5
90 4 97,5
105 4 105
70 3

b7

20
25
30
40
42,5

l10
122,5
132,5
155
170
210
250
272,5

b8

23
28
30
35
40
50
55

20
22
25
28
35
44
49

l11

12,5
15
20
25
30
32,5

40
0
-0,12

d3

d4

G 3/8 25
G 1/2 31

0
-0,15

50
G 3/4 44
55
68 G1
50
74
G1 1/4 60
80

l12

l13

210 2
215 2
65 240 2
75 260 2
85 295 2
103 353 2
110,5 388 2
57,5

l14
30
40
50
55
75
90
100

Stroke l1 is indicated as required for the respective purpose. The max. lifts of stroke for the different installation positions can
be taken from the diagrams of the manufacturers' catalogues.
2)
All cylinders are equipped with adjustable cushioning devices on both sides. The cushioning sleeves are made of bronze.
For reasons of functioning, venting and check valves are installed separately of each other. Cylinder bottom and cylinder
head are screw-fastened.
3)
In exceptional cases the pivot length b7 of type B can be increased to the value of diameter d14. This has to be stated in the
note column of the parts list.
4)
If the pivot of type B has to be in an extreme off-center position, the cylinder manufacturer must be consulted to clarify the
dimensional details.
5)
The cylinder rating is for a max. working pressure Pmax = 250 bar. In the case of pulsating loads the max. working pressure
must be reduced according to the pressure increase.

January 2002 (July 1997)

SN 806
Dimensions in mm

abridged

Type C: foot mounting

Type E: Front flange mounting

d5

d6

d7

d8

d9

d10

d11

85
105
120
135
165
200
220

e8
90
110
130
145
175
210
230

min.
56
63,5
76,1
101,6
121
152,4
171

M 16x1,5
M 22x1,5
M 28x1,5
M 35x1,5
M 45x1,5
M 58x1.5
M 65x1,5

9
11

108
130
155
170
205
245
265

130
160
185
200
245
295
315

l15

l16

l17

d12

d13 9)

d14

6)

20
22,5
25
27,5
32,5
35

30
35
45
50
60
70
75

h1

h2

h3

h4

h5

l2

l3

45
55
65
70
85
105
115

25
30
35
40
50
60
65

18
21

41,5
51,5
56
64
79,5
96
106

205 2
210 2
235 3
255 2
290 3
343 4
378 4

e8

l18

14
18
22

l19

l20

l21

11
14
18
22
26

55
68
75
95
115
135
155

30
35
40
50
60
65

60
69
87
100
123
140
157

40
45
55
65
70

50
60
70
85
105
130
150

28
32
39
47
58
70
82

s
10
14

0,5
19
1

25
30
35
40
50
60
70

24

87,5
0
-0,010 107,5
125
0
137,5
-0,012
67,5
205
-0
-0,015 225

31
38

Total weight G1 and G2 (kg/unit)


G2 per 100 mm stroke
piston rod dia. when

G1
Type
A

235 2
245 2
280 3
305 2
350 3
415 4
455 4

d15

7
8
7,6
11
12,5 12
18
19
18
24,5 25,6 27
43,5 45,8 46
80
81
83
101 104,5 110,5

= 1,4

9,5
15
23
30,2
54
95
121,5

1,2
1,4
1,8
3,5
4,7
7,7
9,9

= 1,6

10,4

=2
1,4
1,7
2,2
4,3
5,9
8,6
12,1

The spherical plain bearing is lubricated through the pin.


Up to a piston diameter of 140 without extension piece.
9)
The kinetic energy (E) as the product of all masses (m) acting upon the piston rod and the stroke speed (v) at the beginning
of cushioning, must not exceed the maximum work capacity (W) of the cushioning device.
The following relation applies:
m
s
E = v2 W = A P
D
D
2
2
The calculation of W is based on:
AD = max. effective cushioning area, assuming that piston-side and piston-rod side areas are identical.
pD = 350 bar
If the kinetic energy (E) exceeds the given working capacity of the cushioning device, our department of hydraulic systems
must be informed so that the remaining residual energy can be taken into account for the control system.
8)

January 2002

Materials kept in stock


Auxiliary and operating materials

SN 531

Overview
Dimensions in mm
Designation

Dimensions
Thickn. Width Length
mm
mm
mm

Technical values

Notes

Sealing material
Sealing plates,
one side graphitized
Supplier: Fa. Hellhake
44143 Dortmund

Nebar standard No. 1


Supplier: Fa. Haacke & Shne
22767 Hamburg
Sealing tape

1500

0,8

1200

1200

0,1

12,5

runn.
meter

1000

runn.
meter

12

runn.
meter

2
Flat rubber with canvas lining
3

This copy will not be updated in case of changes!

material:
NP 815 (aramide-nitrile)
1500 permiss. pressure: up to 50 bar
perm. temperature: up to 300 C

Soft rubber with skin on all


sides

permiss. pressure: up to 20 bar


perm. temperature: - 30C to + 120C
oil resistance:
good (also resistant
against Somentor N35)
material:
PTFE
perm. temperature: - 100C to + 300C
perm. pressure: up to 10 bar
perm. temperature: up to + 80C
hardness:
60 Shore A
oil resistance:
gut
material:
neoprene
perm. temperature: up to + 70C
hardness:
15 Shore A
oil resistance:
good

High-temperature resistant insulating material


perm. temperature: up to +1260C
8
Ezeram
resistant to:
oil, steam, water,
Round-twisted ceramic-fibre
chemicals, liquid
cord
metal
10
outstanding feature: asbestos-free

For general purposes of sealing against


oils, greases, petrol, benzol and solvents.
Substitute for IT
Levels up slight roughnesses of the sealing
surface; hence particularly suited for large
sealing surfaces. Required min. surface
pressure = 300 N/cm.
For sealing screwed joints on pipe lines (e.g.
used instead of hemp)
For sealing uneven (unworked) surfaces.

For use as wiper and for sealing purposes

Used for sealing flaps, covers and


as insulating cord

Acrylic glass
Acrylic glass
(e.g. plexiglass)

2
4
6
10

1200

2000

forming
temperature:

+ 130C to 150C

Workable by sawing, drilling, grinding, etc.

Sealing compound
Curil K2
Fermit-Special
Cleaning materials
Nikutex 1459
Supplier: Chem. Werke Kluthe GmbH
69115 Heidelberg
Lubricant
Gleitmo 805
Supplier: Gleitmolybdn Schmierstoffe GmbH
85386 Eching
MOLYKOTE Gn plus
Supplier: DOW CORNING GmbH
80992 Mnchen
MOLYKOTE Un
Supplier: DOW CORNING GmbH
80992 Mnchen
Repair filler
METALIX S
Supplier: DOW CORNING GMBH
80992 Mnchen

perm. temperature: - 40C to +200C


oil resistence:
good
atoxic

Sealing of gear, machine and motor housings,


pumps, flanges, oil trays etc.
Used primarily for water lines

mixture of organic solvents


form and colour: liquid, colourless
flash point
A II

Machine cleaning material

perm. temperature:

- 20C to + 110C

Lubricant for stainless-steel bolts, nuts and


pipe couplings.

perm. temperature:
coefficient of friction:
- with screws:
- at 40 m2/kg:
colour:

- 40C to + 450C

perm. temperature:

- 40C to + 450C

0,09
0,07
black

colour: black
perm. temperature: - 50C to + 180C
compressive strength:1500 N/cm2
tensile strength:
5500 N/cm2
chemically stable

Assembly lubricant, reduces friction and wear.


Prevents seizing and metal-to-metal contact.
Reduces fretting corrosion.
After the evaporation of the carrier oil, a
lubrication-effective solid lubricant remains.
Compatible with natural rubber and plastics.
Reduces fretting corrosion.
For repair of machines, pipes, vessels and
shrinkholes. Sealing against penetration of
liquids under pressure

Continued on page 2

Page 2
SN 531 : 2002-01

Designation

Technical values

Adhesives acc. to SN 507


Loctite
Parts to be joined 75/AAV 1)
perm. temperature:
Code No. 675
Loctite
Pipe sealant, extra strong AVX
perm. temperature:
Code No. 586
Loctite
Medium-strength bolt securing agent
perm. temperature:
Code No. 242
Loctite
Instant adhesive IS 496
perm. temperature:
Code No. 496
OMNIFIT
Low-strength pipe sealant
perm. temperature:
Code No. 50 H
Technicoll 2)
Epoxy resin/hardener
perm. temperature:
8266 Part A / 8267 Part B
Hoses, except hoses as in SN 544 and SN 756
Hose

1)
2)

Note

- 55C to +150C

Bonding of cylindrical joints, e.g. universal


joint shaft heads, bearings, etc.

- 55C to + 150C

Seals and securing of pipe couplings


> 16 bar

- 55C to + 150C

Bonding of wear plates.


Securing of threaded connections.

- 50C to + 80C

Bonding of neoprene rubber seals.

- 60C to + 150C

Sealing and securing of pipe couplings and


threaded fittings 16 bar.

up to + 150C

Bonding of wear plates, sliding


liners, nameplates, reinforcements,
scales, etc.

Rubber
pressure 6 bar, temperature: + 50C
1/4 (19/13); 1/2 (29/19);
1 (34/23)
PVC
Temperature: + 20C
Pressure 25 bar
Pressure 14 bar
6 x 12
12,5 x 18,5
8 x 14
19 x 27

Water etc.

Compressed-air control systems etc.

Previous SMS designation A1


Previous SMS designation B1

All products for which no suppliers are stated are purchased from technical dealers.

Further standards
SN 180-1
SN 180-2
SN 180-3
SN 507

Operating media, lubricant recommendations grease


Operating media, lubricant recommendations oil
Morgoil lubricant specification new oil
Metal bonding

Revisions made in January 2002


General

For reasons of copyright, four standards sheets of the 1997 standards book have been made SN standards:
DIN 509 is now SN 695; DIN 15058 is SN 370; DIN ISO 4379 is SN 364-1;
DIN ISO 12128 and DIN 1850-2 are now SN 364-3.
SN 833 (of chapter 8) has been split up into SN 530, SN 358 and SN 356.
SN 151 (of chapter 6) has been cancelled.
SN 690 and SN 806 (of chapter 10) are still in the versions of July 1997 and are currently under revision.
SN 364-2: addition of bushings for cylinders.
All numbers of files no longer appear in the standards book 2002, as the file numbers will be newly assigned and the files are
available e.g. through the Intranet.
Generally, all SN standards have been editorially revised.

Chapter 1: Materials
SN 359: - The material designations have been converted to the new designation system.
- Addition of table-type designation systems.
- Newly added materials: - steels for pressure purposes according to DIN EN 10028-2 and 3,
- engineering steels with higher yield point ... according to DIN EN 10137-2 and SEW 090-2,
- forging steels according to DIN EN 10222, DIN EN 10250 and SEW 550,
- heat resistant steel according to DIN EN 10269,
- malleable cast iron according to DIN EN 1562,
- sintered bronze, oil-impregnated
- As far as necessary, the values have been adapted to the new materials standards.
- Relative cost factors have been rounded off to one decimal place.
- Updating of suitability for welding and of welding preheat temperatures.
- Updating of footnotes.

Chapter 2: Drilling and thread depths, thread selection series and undercuts
SN 480: -

Table of "Maximum drilling depths": updating of values


Table of "Maximum drilling depths for multi-diameter and single-diameter holes": updating of values
Table of "Pipe threads as in DIN ISO 228": addition of outside and inside diameter values.
Table of "Metric thread as in DIN 13": tables condensed.

Chapter 3: Curves, diagonals, undercuts


SN 481: - Indication of current sizes in the table of "Curves and diagonals on milled parts".
SN 695: - Revision of blank form (contents as in DIN 509 unchanged).

Chapter 4: Permissible bolt loads, tightening torques, pretensioning units


SN 403: - Indication of additional pretensioning units.
- Updating of all tables and graphic charts.

Chapter 5: Design instructions on fasteners


Screws and bolts, nuts, washers in conjunction with countersinks/
counterbores and/or holes; foundation anchoring elements
SN 351: SN 372: -

As far as necessary, graphic charts and values in tables adapted to the new standards.
Addition of screw plugs according to DIN 908.
Hexagon socket screw acc. to DIN 6912 cancelled.
Addition of:
- Threaded pin acc. to SN 172;
- Adhesive anchor acc. to SN 705.
- Lock nut in the column of "Projection" cancelled.
- Addition of footnotes.

Chapter 6: Mechanical fasteners


Screws, bolts, nuts; setscrews, pins, studs, other screws/bolts; washers
and retaining elements, locknuts and locking plates
SN 151: - Cancelled.
SN 485: - DIN 561: Addition of M 56.
- DIN 908, SN 595: Indication of metric sizes.
- DIN 912 replaced by DIN EN ISO 4762, addition e.g. of M56 and M64.
- DIN 980 replaced by DIN EN ISO 7042 and 10513.
- DIN 6912 cancelled.
- DIN 7991 replaced by DIN EN ISO 10642, cancelling e.g. of M24.
- DIN EN 24014 replaced by DIN EN ISO 4014.
- DIN EN 24017 replaced by DIN EN ISO 4017.
- DIN EN 24032 replaced by DIN EN ISO 4032, addition e.g. of DIN EN ISO 8673.

Continued on page 2

Page 2
Revisions: 2002-01
SN 486: SN 487: -

DIN 94 replaced by DIN EN ISO 1234, addition e.g. of diameter 1.6.


DIN 186: Addition of M48.
DIN 529: Addition of M48 and M56.
DIN 580: Addition of M56 and M64.
DIN 939: Addition of M48.
DIN EN 22338 replaced by DIN EN ISO 2338.
DIN EN 22339: Addition of diameters 16, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, cancelling of diameters 2, 3, 4 and 5.
DIN EN 28733 replaced by DIN EN ISO 8733, addition e.g. of diameter 50.
DIN EN 28734 replaced by DIN EN ISO 8734, addition e.g. of diameter 50.
DIN EN 28736: Addition of diameters 6 and 8.
DIN EN 28752 replaced by DIN EN ISO 8752, addition e.g. of diameter 50.
DIN 125 replaced by DIN EN ISO 7089 (DIN EN ISO 7090), washers e.g. for screw diameters
M72 and M80 cancelled.
- SN 808: Addition of washers for screw diameters M90, M100, M110, M125, M140, M160.
SN 489: - No revision with regard to contents

Chapter 7:

Fitting keys, keys

SN 708: - Revision of sketch stating the position tolerances for fitting keys.

Chapter 8:
SN 370:
SN 530:
SN 358:
SN 356:
SN 364-1:

Axle stop plates, pins, bushings


-

Revision of blank form (contents as in DIN 15058).


Revision of blank form
Revision of blank form previously SN 833.
Revision of blank form
Revision of blank form (contents as in DIN ISO 4379), addition of detail X in the sketch, revision of
calculation example.
SN 364-2: - Newly added.
SN 364-3: - Revision of blank form (contents as in DIN ISO 12128 and DIN 1850-2), new structure of table on types
of lubricant feeding and distribution.

Chapter 9:

Semi-finished products available from stock, structural steel sections

SN 483: -

DIN 176 cancelled.


DIN 671 replaced by DIN EN 10278; e.g. dimensions 45 and 60 cancelled.
DIN 1025/2: Dimension 180 cancelled.
DIN 1028 replaced by DIN EN 10056, e.g. addition of dimension 150 x 150 x 15.
DIN 1029 replaced by DIN EN 10056.
DIN 1783 replaced by DIN EN 485.
DIN 2462 replaced by DIN EN ISO 1127, cancelling e.g. of dimensions 16x2; 20x2,5; 25x3; 30x4; 35x2,5
and 38x5; addition of dimensions 42,4x2,6; 60,3x2,9; 76,1x12,5; 88,9x14,2 and 114,3x3,6.
SN 805: - DIN 1028 and DIN 1029 replaced by DIN EN 10056-1 and -2.
- DIN 59410 replaced by DIN EN 10210-2.
- DIN 59411 replaced by DIN EN 10219-2.

Chapter 10: Pipe dimensions, flanges, welding fittings, pipe couplings and fasteners,
hoselines, hydraulic cylinders, sealing and insulating materials, revisions
SN 553: - completely revised and adapted to pipe classification of SN 901, max. 300 mm nominal diameter.
SN 456: - SN 875 replaced by SN 878.
- SN 787 replaced by SN 882.
- SN 832 replaced by SN 883 (only straight male stud coupling).
- SN 457, SN 479 and SN 790 replaced by SN 884.
- Addition of: SN 811, SN 862, SN 879 and SN 880.
- Revision of pressure stages.
SN 836: - Revision of pressure stages.
- Addition of screw-hole arrangement as in DIN 2501 (with sketch).
- Addition of new material designations.
SN 837: - No revision with regard to contents.
SN 576: - Addition of data on low-pressure hoseline.
- Revision of application examples.
SN 690: - Contents as in July 1997 edition, as revision not complete at copy deadline.
SN 806: - Contents as in July 1997 edition, as revision not complete at copy deadline.
SN 531: - Cancelling of sealing plates, thickness 1 mm, one side graphitized.

Previous editions:
Standards book and SN 200:
Standards book:

1975-11, 1978-01, 1981-01,1985-01, 1992-03


1997-07

Codes of the units of quantity


Code
0
1
2
3
4

Designation
set
kg
piece
m
m2

Code
5
6
7
8
9

Designation
m
t
litre
slab
pair

Imprint
The STANDARDS BOOK 2002 is edited by SMS Demag Aktiengesellschaft, Dept. of Standardization.
Wiesenstrae 30, 57271 Hilchenbach/Germany
Phone: (0 27 33) 2910 93
Fax:
(0 27 33) 2910 73
E-mail: hueb@sms-demag.de
mott@sms-demag.de